JP2017099461A - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2017099461A
JP2017099461A JP2015233118A JP2015233118A JP2017099461A JP 2017099461 A JP2017099461 A JP 2017099461A JP 2015233118 A JP2015233118 A JP 2015233118A JP 2015233118 A JP2015233118 A JP 2015233118A JP 2017099461 A JP2017099461 A JP 2017099461A
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
opening
state
main body
closing member
player
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
JP2015233118A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP6575328B2 (en
Inventor
岡村 鉉
Gen Okamura
鉉 岡村
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd filed Critical Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority to JP2015233118A priority Critical patent/JP6575328B2/en
Publication of JP2017099461A publication Critical patent/JP2017099461A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6575328B2 publication Critical patent/JP6575328B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of sufficiently reflecting change of a button to a presentation.SOLUTION: A switching of an operation member 310's response mode to an operation is generated by an opening/closing member 340's change in a motion mode. Therefore, by visually recognizing the opening/closing member 340, an occurrence of a switching by a switching device 400 can be easily grasped by a player. In this way, attention drawing power of the operation member 310 and the opening/closing member 340 can be improved. Also, a motion of the opening/closing member 340 is generated by the player's operation of the operation member 310. Accordingly, a reduction of attention drawing power to the operation member 310 and the opening/closing member 340 after the operation can be prevented.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

本発明は、パチンコ機などの遊技機に関するものである。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、ボタンを復帰させる付勢バネの弾性力を予め変化させることにより、ボタンを押した遊技者が感じる反発力を変化させ、それを演出に利用する遊技機がある(特許文献1)。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that changes the repulsive force felt by the player who presses the button by changing the elastic force of the biasing spring that returns the button, and uses it for production ( Patent Document 1).

特開2010−252949号公報JP 2010-252949 A

しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、ボタンの変化を、十分に演出に反映させられていないという問題点があった。   However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the button change is not sufficiently reflected in the performance.

本発明は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、ボタンの変化を十分に演出に反映できる遊技機を提供することを目的とする。   The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can sufficiently reflect changes in buttons in the production.

この目的を達成するために請求項1記載の遊技機は、遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、を備える遊技機において、前記動作手段の動作態様を変化させることで、操作に対する前記操作手段の反応の態様を切り替える切替手段を備える。   In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operating means operated by a player, a first position in accordance with an operation of the operating means, and a second position different from the first position. In a gaming machine comprising operating means that is operable between the operating means and return means for returning the operating means to the first position, the operating means for the operation by changing the operating mode of the operating means And a switching means for switching the reaction mode.

請求項2記載の遊技機は、請求項1記載の遊技機において、前記切替手段により、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に配置された状態における前記操作手段の操作後の復帰を遅延可能に切り替えられる。   The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching means switches the return of the operating means after the operation in the state where the operating means is located at the second position so that the return can be delayed. It is done.

請求項3記載の遊技機は、請求項1又は2に記載の遊技機において、前記動作手段は、前記第1位置から、前記第2位置へ動作する間に、間の状態である第3位置を経由し、前記切替手段は、前記動作手段の動作態様を、前記動作手段が前記第2位置まで動作する第1動作態様と、前記動作手段が前記第3位置まで動作し前記第2位置までは至らない第2動作態様とで、切替可能に構成され、前記操作手段の反応の態様は、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に到達するか否かで切り替えられる。   The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the operating means is in a state in between while operating from the first position to the second position. And the switching means changes the operating mode of the operating means from the first operating mode in which the operating unit operates to the second position and the operating unit to the third position. The second operation mode is not switchable, and the operation mode is switched depending on whether or not the operation unit reaches the second position.

請求項1記載の遊技機によれば、操作手段の反応の態様が、動作手段の動作態様の変化により切り替えられるので、操作手段の変化を十分に演出に反映できる。   According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the mode of response of the operating means is switched by the change of the operating mode of the operating means, the change of the operating means can be sufficiently reflected in the production.

請求項2記載の遊技機によれば、請求項1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、操作手段の動作態様が切り替えられるので、視覚的に操作手段に起きた変化を遊技者に認識させることができる。   According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation mode of the operation means can be switched, so that the player can visually recognize the change that has occurred in the operation means. Can do.

請求項3記載の遊技機によれば、請求項1又は2に記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、動作手段が変化しても操作手段の反応の態様が変化しない場合も形成することができるので、操作手段および動作手段の注目力を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to form a case where the mode of reaction of the operating means does not change even if the operating means changes. Therefore, the attention of the operating means and the operating means can be improved.

第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機の正面図である。It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. パチンコ機の遊技盤の正面図である。It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面図である。It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. 操作デバイスの分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of an operation device. (a)及び(b)は、操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。(A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. 土台部材、クラッチ部材、開閉部材及び切替装置の分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. 図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. 切替装置の外周面の展開図である。It is an expanded view of the outer peripheral surface of a switching apparatus. 図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. 図11の矢印XII方向視における操作デバイスの上面図である。FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. 11. 図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. 図13の矢印XIV方向視における操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of the operation device in the arrow XIV direction view of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図18のXIX−XIX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XIX-XIX line | wire of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図20のXXI−XXI線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG. (a)から(d)は、開閉部材のモデル図である。(A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (a)から(d)は、開閉部材のモデル図である。(A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (a)及び(b)は、開閉部材のモデル図である。(A) And (b) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. 開閉部材のモデル図である。It is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図26のXXVII−XXVII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXVII-XXVII line | wire of FIG. 第2実施形態における操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment. 土台部材、クラッチ部材、開閉部材及び切替装置の分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. (a)は、各開閉部材の状態の計時変化を示した図であり、(b)は、各開閉部材の構成の置き換え方を図示する表である。(A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening-and-closing member, (b) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening-and-closing member. (a)は、各開閉部材の状態の計時変化を示した図であり、(b))は、各開閉部材の構成の置き換え方を図示する表である。(A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening / closing member, (b)) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening / closing member. 第3実施形態における操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment. 土台部材、クラッチ部材、開閉部材及び切替装置の分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. 本体円環部及び調整段部の上面図である。It is a top view of a main body ring part and an adjustment step part. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図37のXXXVIII−XXXVIII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXXVIII-XXXVIII line | wire of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図39のXL−XL線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. 図39のXL−XL線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. 図39のXL−XL線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図43のXLIV−XLIV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. 図43のXLIV−XLIV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. 図43のXLIV−XLIV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. 第4実施形態における操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (a)は、切替装置の側面図であり、(b)は、図49(a)の矢印XLIXb方向視における切替装置の上面図である。(A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49 (a). (a)は、一方の第1復帰部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図50(a)の矢印Lb方向視における第1復帰部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図50(a)の矢印Lc方向視における第1復帰部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of one first return member, (b) is a top view of the first return member as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 1st return member in the arrow Lc direction view of (a). (a)は、一方の第2復帰部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図51(a)の矢印LIb方向視における第2復帰部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図51(a)の矢印LIc方向視における第2復帰部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of one second return member, (b) is a top view of the second return member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 2nd return member in the arrow LIc direction view of (a). 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図56のLVII−LVII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. 図56のLVII−LVII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. 操作部材を押し込み操作した遊技者に与えられる反力の計時変化を示した図である。It is the figure which showed the time change of the reaction force given to the player who pushed the operation member and operated. 第5実施形態における操作デバイスの分解正面斜視図である。It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. 切替装置の分解正面斜視図である。It is a disassembled front perspective view of a switching device. (a)及び(b)は、図61のLXIIa−LXIIa線における本体円環部の部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the main body ring part in the LXIIa-LXIIa line of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図64のLXV−LXV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXV-LXV line | wire of FIG. (a)及び(b)は、図65の矢印LXVIa方向視における開閉部材及び切替装置の部分側面図である。(A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIa direction view of FIG. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. (a)及び(b)は、図67の矢印LXVIIIa方向視における開閉部材及び切替装置の部分側面図である。(A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. (a)から(c)は、図65の矢印LXVIa方向視における切替装置及び開閉部材の側面図である。(A) to (c) are side views of the switching device and the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における第6実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (a)は、切替装置の側面図であり、(b)は、図71(a)の矢印LXXIb方向視における切替装置の上面図である。(A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). (a)は、開閉部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図72(a)の矢印LXXIIb方向視における開閉部材の側面図であり、(c)は、移動カバー部材の正面図であり、(d)は、図72(c)の矢印LXXIId方向視における移動カバー部材の側面図であり、(e)は、図72(c)の矢印LXXIIe方向視における移動カバー部材の上面図である。(A) is a front view of an opening / closing member, (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and (c) is a front view of the movable cover member. (D) is a side view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and (e) is a top view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIe in FIG. 72 (c). . 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図73のLXXIV−LXXIV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. 図73のLXXIV−LXXIV線における操作デバイスの断面図である。FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. 図76のLXXVII−LXXVII線における操作デバイスの断面図である。FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. 76. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における第7実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. (a)及び(b)は、図78のLXXXa―LXXXa線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. (a)及び(b)は、図78のLXXXa―LXXXa線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 操作カバーを長期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材の配置の計時変化を示した図である。It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. 操作カバーを短期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材の配置の計時変化を示した図である。It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period. (a)は、切替装置の上面図であり、(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における切替装置の側面図であり、(c)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIc方向視における切替装置の正面図である。(A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is an arrow LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (a). It is a front view of the switching device in the direction view. 操作デバイスの上面図である。It is a top view of an operation device. (a)及び(b)は、図87のLXXXVIIIa―LXXXVIIIa線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 図87のLXXXIX−LXXXIX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. 図87のLXXXIX−LXXXIX線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. 操作カバーを長期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材の配置の計時変化を示した図である。It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. 操作カバーを短期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材の配置の計時変化を示した図である。It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period.

以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図1から図27を参照し、第1実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機(以下、単に「パチンコ機」という)10に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10の正面図であり、図2はパチンコ機10の遊技盤13の正面図であり、図3はパチンコ機10の背面図である。   Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 27, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

図1に示すように、パチンコ機10は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠11と、その外枠11と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠11に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠12とを備えている。外枠11には、内枠12を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ18が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ18が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠12が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。   As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

内枠12には、多数の釘や入賞口63,64等を有する遊技盤13(図2参照)が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤13の正面を球(遊技球)が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠12には、球を遊技盤13の正面領域に発射する球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)やその球発射ユニット112aから発射された球を遊技盤13の正面領域まで誘導する発射レール(図示せず)等が取り付けられている。   A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

内枠12の正面側には、その正面上側を覆う正面枠14と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット15とが設けられている。正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ19が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ19が設けられた側を開閉の軸として正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠12の施錠と正面枠14の施錠とは、シリンダ錠20の鍵穴21に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。   On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

正面枠14は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部14cが設けられている。正面枠14の裏面側には2枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット16が配設され、そのガラスユニット16を介して遊技盤13の正面がパチンコ機10の正面側に視認可能となっている。   The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

正面枠14には、球を貯留する上皿17が正面側へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿17に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿17の底面は正面視(図1参照)右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿17に投入された球が球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)へと案内される。また、上皿17の上面には、枠ボタン22が設けられている。この枠ボタン22は、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。   On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

正面枠14には、その周囲(例えばコーナー部分)に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部14cの周縁には、LED等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部29〜33が設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、これら電飾部29〜33が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するLEDの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部29〜33が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、正面枠14の正面視(図1参照)左上部には、LED等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ34が設けられている。   The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

また、右側の電飾部32下側には、正面枠14の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓35が形成され、遊技盤13正面の貼着スペースK1(図2参照)に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機10の正面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機10においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部29〜33の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したABS樹脂製のメッキ部材36が取り付けられている。   In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

窓部14cの下方には、貸球操作部40が配設されている。貸球操作部40には、度数表示部41と、球貸しボタン42と、返却ボタン43とが設けられている。パチンコ機10の側方に配置されるカードユニット(球貸しユニット)(図示せず)に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部40が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部41はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたLEDが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン42は、カード等(記録媒体)に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿17に供給される。返却ボタン43は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿17に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部40が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部40の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。   A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

上皿17の下側に位置する下皿ユニット15には、その左側部に上皿17に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿50が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿50の右側には、球を遊技盤13の正面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル51及び操作デバイス300が配設される。なお、操作デバイス300については後述する。   In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

操作ハンドル51の内部には、球発射ユニット112aの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ51aと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ51bと、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器(図示せず)などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル51が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ51aがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ(発射強度)で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤13の正面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル51が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ51aおよび発射停止スイッチ51bがオフとなっている。   Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

下皿50の正面下方部には、下皿50に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー52が設けられている。この球抜きレバー52は、常時、右方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して左方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿50の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー52の操作は、通常、下皿50の下方に下皿50から排出された球を受け取る箱(一般に「千両箱」と称される)を置いた状態で行われる。下皿50の右方には、上述したように操作ハンドル51が配設され、下皿50の左方には灰皿(図示せず)が取り付けられている。   In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

図2に示すように、遊技盤13は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板60に、球案内用の多数の釘(図示せず)や風車(図示せず)の他、レール61,62、一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、特定入賞口65a、スルーゲート67、可変表示装置ユニット80等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠12(図1参照)の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板60は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板60の背面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変表示装置ユニット80は、ルータ加工によってベース板60に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤13の正面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。   As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a specific winning port 65a, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

遊技盤13の正面中央部分は、正面枠14の窓部14c(図1参照)を通じて内枠12の正面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図2を参照して、遊技盤13の構成について説明する。   The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

遊技盤13の正面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール62が植立され、その外レール62の内側位置には外レール62と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール61が植立される。この内レール61と外レール62とにより遊技盤13の正面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤13とガラスユニット16(図1参照)とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤13の正面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤13の正面であって2本のレール61,62とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材73とにより区画して形成される領域(入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域)である。   An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

2本のレール61,62は、球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)から発射された球を遊技盤13上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール61の先端部分(図2の左上部)には戻り球防止部材68が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤13の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール62の先端部(図2の右上部)には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム69が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム69に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。   The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

遊技領域の正面視左側下部(図2の左側下部)には、発光手段である複数のLED及び7セグメント表示器を備える第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bが配設されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、主制御装置110(図4参照)で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機10の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞したか、第2入賞口640へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Aが作動し、一方で、球が、第2入賞口640へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Bが作動するように構成されている。   First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、LEDにより、パチンコ機10が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、7セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のLEDは、それぞれのLEDの発光色(例えば、赤、緑、青)が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないLEDでパチンコ機10の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。   In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

尚、本パチンコ機10では、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機10は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定(大当たり抽選)を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、15R確変大当たり、4R確変大当たり、15R通常大当たりが用意されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。   In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

ここで、「15R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「4R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が4ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「15R通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間(例えば、100変動回数)は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。   Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中(確変中)の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態(確変中)は、後述する第2図柄の当たり確率がアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態(時短中)とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第2図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機10が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態(大当たり確率も第2図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態)である。   In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

確変中や時短中は、第2図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物640aが開放された状態(開放状態)にある場合は、その電動役物640aが閉鎖された状態(閉鎖状態)にある場合と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。   During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer time than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

なお、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間および1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間や、1回の当たりで電動役物640aを開放する回数はせず、第2図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。   In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより5個から15個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口63が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット80が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット80には、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640への入賞(始動入賞)をトリガとして、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第3図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ(以下単に「表示装置」と略す)で構成された第3図柄表示装置81と、スルーゲート67の球の通過をトリガとして第2図柄を変動表示するLEDで構成される第2図柄表示装置(図示せず)とが設けられている。また、可変表示装置ユニット80には、第3図柄表示装置81の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム86が配設されている。   The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

第3図柄表示装置81は9インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置114(図4参照)によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の3つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄(第3図柄)によって構成され、これらの第3図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第3図柄表示装置81の表示画面上にて第3図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第3図柄表示装置81は、主制御装置110(図4参照)の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bで行われるのに対して、その第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第3図柄表示装置81を構成するようにしても良い。   The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

第2図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート67を通過する毎に表示図柄(第2図柄(図示せず))としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機10では、球がスルーゲート67を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第2図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第3図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。   Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

パチンコ機10は、第2図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄(本実施形態においては「○」の図柄)で停止した場合に、第2入賞口640に付随された電動役物640aが所定時間だけ作動状態となる(開放される)よう構成されている。   In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第2図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第2入賞口640の電動役物640aが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。   The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、1回に当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、1回の当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。   It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

スルーゲート67は、可変表示装置ユニット80の左右の領域において遊技盤13に組み付けられ、遊技盤13に発射された球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート67を球が通過すると、第2図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第2図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。   The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

球のスルーゲート67の通過回数は、合計で最大4回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより表示されると共に第2図柄保留ランプ(図示せず)においても点灯表示される。第2図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の4つ設けられ、第3図柄表示装置81の下方に左右対称に配設されている。   The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

なお、第2図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第2図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第2図柄保留ランプの点灯を第3図柄表示装置81の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート67の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は4回に限定されるものでなく、3回以下、又は、5回以上の回数(例えば、8回)に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け数は2つに限定されるものではなく、例えば1つであっても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット80の左右に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の下方でも良い。また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより保留球数が示されるので、第2図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。   Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

可変表示装置ユニット80の下方には、球が入賞し得る第1入賞口64が配設されている。この第1入賞口64へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第1入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第1入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Aで示される。   Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

一方、第1入賞口64の正面視下方には、球が入賞し得る第2入賞口640が配設されている。この第2入賞口640へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第2入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第2入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Bで示される。   On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

また、第1入賞口64および第2入賞口640は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると5個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の1つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を3個とし、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を5個として構成してもよい。   Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

第2入賞口640には電動役物640aが付随されている。この電動役物640aは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物640aが閉鎖状態(縮小状態)となって、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート67への球の通過を契機として行われる第2図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第2図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となり、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しやすい状態となる。   The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第2図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第2図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物640aが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。   As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

ここで、第1入賞口64に球が入賞した場合と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として15R確変大当たりとなる確率は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第1入賞口64は、第2入賞口640にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。   Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

よって、通常中においては、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第2入賞口640に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第1入賞口64へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「左打ち」)、第1入賞口64への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。   Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート67に球を通過させることで、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放状態となりやすく、第2入賞口640に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第2入賞口640へ向けて、可変表示装置80の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「右打ち」)、スルーゲート67を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第2入賞口640への入賞によって15R確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。   On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

なお、本実施形態におけるパチンコ機10は、遊技盤13の構成が左右対称とされるため、「右打ち」で第1入賞口64を狙うことも、「左打ち」で第2入賞口640を狙うこともできる。そのため、本実施形態のパチンコ機10は、パチンコ機10の遊技状態(確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか)に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることを不要にできる。よって、球の打ち方を変化させる煩わしさを解消することができる。   In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

第1入賞口64の下方には特定入賞口65aが設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、第1入賞口64又は第2入賞口640への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間(変動時間)が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第1図柄表示装置37A又は第1図柄表示装置37Bを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態(大当たり)に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口65aが、所定時間(例えば、30秒経過するまで、或いは、球が10個入賞するまで)開放される。   A specific winning port 65 a is provided below the first winning port 64. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

この特定入賞口65aは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口65aの開閉動作は、最高で例えば15回(15ラウンド)繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値(遊技価値)の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。   The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口65aとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおいて大当たりに対応したLEDが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口65aの開放中に、球が特定入賞口65a内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口65aとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口65aは1つに限るものではなく、1つ若しくは2以上の複数(例えば3つ)を配置しても良く、また配置位置も第1入賞口64の下方右側や、第1入賞口64の下方左側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。   Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

遊技盤13の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースK1が設けられ、貼着スペースK1に貼られた証紙等は、正面枠14の小窓35(図1参照)を通じて視認することができる。   A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

遊技盤13には、アウト口71が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口63,64,65a,640にも入賞しなかった球は、アウト口71を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。アウト口71は、特定入賞口65aの左右に一対で配設される。   The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

遊技盤13には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材(役物)とが配設されている。   A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

図3に示すように、パチンコ機10の背面側には、制御基板ユニット90,91と、裏パックユニット94とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット90は、主基板(主制御装置110)と音声ランプ制御基板(音声ランプ制御装置113)と表示制御基板(表示制御装置114)とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット91は、払出制御基板(払出制御装置111)と発射制御基板(発射制御装置112)と電源基板(電源装置115)とカードユニット接続基板116とが搭載されてユニット化されている。   As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

裏パックユニット94は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック92と払出ユニット93とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る1チップマイコンとしてのMPU、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。   The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

なお、主制御装置110、音声ランプ制御装置113及び表示制御装置114、払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112、電源装置115、カードユニット接続基板116は、それぞれ基板ボックス100〜104に収納されている。基板ボックス100〜104は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。   The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

また、基板ボックス100(主制御装置110)及び基板ボックス102(払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112)は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット(図示せず)によって開封不能に連結(かしめ構造による連結)している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール(図示せず)が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス100,102を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス100,102を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス100,102が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。   Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

払出ユニット93は、裏パックユニット94の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク130と、タンク130の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール131と、タンクレール131の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール132と、ケースレール132の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ216(図4参照)の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置133とを備えている。タンク130には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置133により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール131には、当該タンクレール131に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ134が取り付けられている。   The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

また、払出制御装置111には状態復帰スイッチ120が設けられ、発射制御装置112には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ121が設けられ、電源装置115にはRAM消去スイッチ122が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ120は、例えば、払出モータ216(図4参照)部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消(正常状態への復帰)するために操作される。操作つまみ121は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。RAM消去スイッチ122は、パチンコ機10を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。   The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

次に、図4を参照して、本パチンコ機10の電気的構成について説明する。図4は、パチンコ機10の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。   Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

主制御装置110には、演算装置である1チップマイコンとしてのMPU201が搭載されている。MPU201には、該MPU201により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したROM202と、そのROM202内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるRAM203と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置110では、MPU201によって、大当たり抽選や第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81における表示の設定、第2図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機10の主要な処理を実行する。   The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

なお、払出制御装置111や音声ランプ制御装置113などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置110から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置110からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。   Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

RAM203は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、MPU201の内部レジスタの内容やMPU201により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。なお、RAM203は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM203に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。   The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時(停電発生時を含む。以下同様)のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がRAM203に記憶される。一方、電源投入時(停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様)には、RAM203に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機10の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。RAM203への書き込みはメイン処理(図示せず)によって電源遮断時に実行され、RAM203に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理(図示せず)において実行される。なお、MPU201のNMI端子(ノンマスカブル割込端子)には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路252からの停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU201へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。   When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

主制御装置110のMPU201には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン204を介して入出力ポート205が接続されている。入出力ポート205には、払出制御装置111、音声ランプ制御装置113、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B、第2図柄表示装置、第2図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口65aの開閉板の下辺を軸として正面側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド209が接続され、MPU201は、入出力ポート205を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。   An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

また、入出力ポート205には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサSや回転位置検出センサRを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ208、電源装置115に設けられた後述のRAM消去スイッチ回路253が接続され、MPU201は各種スイッチ208から出力される信号や、RAM消去スイッチ回路253より出力されるRAM消去信号SG2に基づいて各種処理を実行する。   The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

払出制御装置111は、払出モータ216を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるMPU211は、そのMPU211により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM212と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM213とを有している。   The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制御装置111のRAM213は、主制御装置110のRAM203と同様に、MPU211の内部レジスタの内容やMPU211により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。RAM213は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM213に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置110のMPU201と同様、MPU211のNMI端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路252から停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU211へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。   The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

払出制御装置111のMPU211には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン214を介して入出力ポート215が接続されている。入出力ポート215には、主制御装置110や払出モータ216、発射制御装置112などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置111には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置111に接続されるが、主制御装置110には接続されていない。   An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

発射制御装置112は、主制御装置110により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット112aを制御するものである。球発射ユニット112aは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル51に触れていることをタッチセンサ51aにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ51bがオフ(操作されていないこと)を条件に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル51の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。   The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出(変動表示)や予告演出といった表示制御装置114で行われる第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるMPU221は、そのMPU221により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM222と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM223とを有している。   The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

音声ランプ制御装置113のMPU221には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン224を介して入出力ポート225が接続されている。入出力ポート225には、主制御装置110、表示制御装置114、音声出力装置226、ランプ表示装置227、その他装置228、枠ボタン22などがそれぞれ接続されている。その他装置228には駆動モータ490,4590が含まれる。   An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 490, 4590.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、主制御装置110から受信した各種のコマンド(変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等)に基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド(表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等)によって表示制御装置114へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、枠ボタン22からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン22が操作された場合は、第3図柄表示装置81で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置114へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた背面画像を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた背面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置114へ送信する。ここで、背面画像とは、第3図柄表示装置81に表示させる主要な画像である第3図柄の背面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置114は、この音声ランプ制御装置113から送信されるコマンドに従って、第3図柄表示装置81に各種の画像を表示する。   The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、表示制御装置114から第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を表すコマンド(表示コマンド)を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置113では、表示制御装置114から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置226から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置227の点灯および消灯を制御する。   Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

表示制御装置114は、音声ランプ制御装置113及び第3図柄表示装置81が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置113より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81における第3図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置114は、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置113へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置113は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置226から音声を出力することで、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と音声出力装置226からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。   The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

電源装置115は、パチンコ機10の各部に電源を供給するための電源部251と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路252と、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が設けられたRAM消去スイッチ回路253とを有している。電源部251は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置110〜114等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部251は、外部より供給される交流24ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ208などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド209などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための12ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の5ボルトの電圧、RAMバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら12ボルトの電圧、5ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置110〜114等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。   The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

停電監視回路252は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置110のMPU201及び払出制御装置111のMPU211の各NMI端子へ停電信号SG1を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路252は、電源部251から出力される最大電圧である直流安定24ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が22ボルト未満になった場合に停電(電源断、電源遮断)の発生と判断して、停電信号SG1を主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111へ出力する。停電信号SG1の出力によって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、停電の発生を認識し、NMI割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部251は、直流安定24ボルトの電圧が22ボルト未満になった後においても、NMI割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である5ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、NMI割込処理(図示せず)を正常に実行し完了することができる。   The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM消去スイッチ回路253は、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が押下された場合に、主制御装置110へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのRAM消去信号SG2を出力するための回路である。主制御装置110は、パチンコ機10の電源投入時に、RAM消去信号SG2を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置111においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置111に対して送信する。   The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

次いで、操作デバイス300について説明する。操作デバイス300は、操作により、遊技者を演出に参加させるための装置である。図5は、パチンコ機10の斜視図であり、図6は、操作デバイス300の分解斜視図であり、図7(a)及び図7(b)は、操作デバイス300の正面斜視図であり、図8は、土台部材320、クラッチ部材330、開閉部材340及び切替装置400の分解斜視図であり、図9は、図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図6及び図9では、正面枠14が部分的に図示される。また図7(a)及び図7(b)では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図6及び図7(a)では、開閉部材340の第1位置状態が図示され、図7(b)では、開閉部材340の第2位置状態が図示される。   Next, the operation device 300 will be described. The operation device 300 is an apparatus for causing a player to participate in the production by an operation. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, FIGS. 7A and 7B are front perspective views of the operation device 300, 8 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 400, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6 and 9, the front frame 14 is partially illustrated. 7A and 7B, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 6 and 7A, the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 7B, the second position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated.

操作デバイス300は、図6、図7(a)及び図7(b)に例示として図示される開閉部材340の状態変化を、操作部材310の操作に対応して実行させ、その状態変化を遊技者に視認させることで、遊技者の興趣を向上させる演出を行う装置である。   The operation device 300 causes the state change of the opening / closing member 340 illustrated in FIGS. 6, 7A, and 7B to be executed in response to the operation of the operation member 310, and the state change is a game. It is an apparatus that produces an effect that improves the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize.

操作デバイス300は、内部機構を一部視認させることで操作デバイス300自体に演出効果を持たせる機能を有しており、逆カップ形状の底中心部に開口301aを有して形成されると共に正面枠14との間に切替装置400等の動作装置を収容する態様で正面枠14に固定される外壁部材301と、その外壁部材301の高さ方向幅を短縮した形状から形成され底中心部に開口301aと同軸かつ略同形状(若干大径)の開口302aを有すると共に外壁部材301との間に内部空間を形成する態様で重ねて固定される重ね部材302と、開口301a,302aに挿通され外壁部材301と重ね部材302とで形成される内部空間により移動を制限される部材であって光透過性材料から構成される皿形状の操作部材310と、その操作部材310の押し込み方向奥側に配置される土台部材320と、その土台部材320に、操作部材310の押し込み方向にスライド動作可能に支持されるクラッチ部材330と、そのクラッチ部材330と嵌合することにより姿勢を固定可能に構成されると共に、土台部材320に軸支される一対の開閉部材340と、その開閉部材340と当接することで開閉部材340の移動終端を規定し、押し込み操作方向視でドーナツ形状に構成されると共に、土台部材320の周囲を回転可能に土台部材320に支持される切替装置400と、その切替装置400を回転させる駆動モータ490と、を主に備える。   The operation device 300 has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 300 by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism, and is formed with an opening 301a at the bottom center portion of the inverted cup shape and the front surface. An outer wall member 301 fixed to the front frame 14 in a mode in which an operation device such as the switching device 400 is accommodated between the frame 14 and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 301 is shortened. An overlap member 302 that has an opening 302a that is coaxial with and substantially the same shape (slightly larger in diameter) as the opening 301a and that is overlapped and fixed in such a manner as to form an internal space with the outer wall member 301, is inserted into the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped operation member 310 which is a member whose movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 301 and the overlapping member 302 and is made of a light-transmitting material, and its operation A base member 320 disposed on the back side in the pushing direction of the material 310, a clutch member 330 supported on the base member 320 so as to be slidable in the pushing direction of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 being fitted The position of the opening / closing member 340 is defined by a pair of opening / closing members 340 pivotally supported by the base member 320 and abutting the opening / closing member 340, as viewed in the pushing operation direction. A switching device 400 that is configured in a donut shape and is supported by the base member 320 so as to be rotatable around the base member 320, and a drive motor 490 that rotates the switching device 400 are mainly provided.

外壁装置301は、逆カップ形状の底中心部に円形の貫通孔として形成される開口301aと、その開口301aの径方向外側に開口301aの中心を基準として90度間隔で離間して配置され上面から下方へ凹設される凹設部301bと、を主に備える。   The outer wall device 301 has an opening 301a formed as a circular through hole at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup shape, and an upper surface that is spaced apart by 90 degrees on the radial outer side of the opening 301a with respect to the center of the opening 301a. And a recessed portion 301b recessed downward from the main.

凹設部301bは、操作部材310の外側延設部313と上下方向で重なる配置とされ、操作部材310を上方に復帰させるスプリングSP1の下側端部を収容する(図9参照)。   The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 310 upward (see FIG. 9).

操作部材310は、正面枠14の上皿17の正面側に配置され、逆カップ形状に形成されると共に鉛直方向に移動可能に支持される本体部311と、その本体部の上底部中央に下方へ向けて凸設される凸設部312と、本体部311の周面部から外側へフランジ状に延設される外側延設部313と、その延設部313を基準として上底とは反対側へ延設される位置ずれ防止部314と、位置ずれ防止部314の延設端から内周側へフランジ状に延設される内側延設部315と、を主に備える。   The operation member 310 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 17 of the front frame 14, is formed in an inverted cup shape, and is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A projecting portion 312 projecting toward the outside, an outer extending portion 313 extending outwardly from the peripheral surface portion of the main body portion 311 in a flange shape, and the side opposite to the upper base with respect to the extending portion 313 And a misalignment prevention portion 314 extending to the inner periphery, and an inner extension portion 315 extending in a flange shape from the extension end of the misalignment prevention portion 314 to the inner peripheral side.

本体部311は、外周が断面円形に形成され、上下方向亘って直径が略同等とされる。   The main body 311 has a circular outer periphery and has substantially the same diameter in the vertical direction.

凸設部312は、後述するクラッチ部材330の当接部332と当接する部分である。この凸設部312により、操作部材310が押し込み操作された場合に、クラッチ部材330と操作部材310とが当接しても、本体部311にかけられる負荷を低減でき、本体部311が割れることを防止することができる。   The protruding portion 312 is a portion that comes into contact with a contact portion 332 of a clutch member 330 described later. When the operation member 310 is pushed in by the projecting portion 312, even if the clutch member 330 and the operation member 310 come into contact with each other, the load applied to the main body portion 311 can be reduced and the main body portion 311 can be prevented from cracking. can do.

外側延設部313は、外壁部材301の底部と、重ね部材302の底部との間にできる空間に挿入される部分であって、本体部311の周囲に亘って環状に形成される。この外側延設部313が、外壁部材301の底部の上面や、重ね部材302の底部の下面と当接する位置で、操作部材310の上下移動終端位置が形成される。   The outer extending portion 313 is a portion that is inserted into a space formed between the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 and the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302, and is formed in an annular shape around the periphery of the main body portion 311. The vertical movement end position of the operation member 310 is formed at a position where the outer extending portion 313 contacts the upper surface of the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 or the lower surface of the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302.

位置ずれ防止部314は、本体部311の外径と略同一直径で本体部311の下方に延設される環状の部分であって、その延設先端は、外壁部材301の開口301aに挿通される。ここで、開口301aが位置ずれ防止部314の外径よりも若干大きい内径から形成されると共に、開口302aが本体部311の外径よりも若干大きい内径から形成されるので、操作部材310を上下2位置で支持するとで、操作部材310の上下方向のスライド動作を許容しながら、操作部材310の姿勢が乱れる(径方向に位置ずれする)ことを防止することができる。   The misregistration prevention portion 314 is an annular portion having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the main body portion 311 and extending below the main body portion 311, and the extending tip is inserted into the opening 301 a of the outer wall member 301. The Here, the opening 301a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the misalignment prevention portion 314, and the opening 302a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 311. Supporting at the two positions can prevent the operation member 310 from being disturbed (displaced in the radial direction) while allowing the operation member 310 to slide in the vertical direction.

土台部材320は、操作部材310の鉛直下方において正面枠14に固定される部材であって、回転軸対称形状の本体部321と、操作部材310の凸設部312の中心を通る鉛直線を中心軸とする円柱形状で本体部321の上面から鉛直下方へ凹設される凹設部322と、その凹設部322から水平方向に離間すると共に凹設部322の凹設方向と直交する方向に延設されると共に本体部321の上面から突出する部分に支持される一対の回転軸棒である軸部323と、本体部321の下端から径方向外側へ延設される延設底部324と、を主に備える。   The base member 320 is a member that is fixed to the front frame 14 vertically below the operation member 310, and is centered on a vertical line that passes through the center of the rotationally symmetric main body 321 and the convex portion 312 of the operation member 310. A cylindrical portion serving as an axis, and a recessed portion 322 that is recessed vertically downward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and is spaced apart from the recessed portion 322 in the horizontal direction and perpendicular to the recessed direction of the recessed portion 322. A shaft portion 323 that is a pair of rotating shaft rods that are extended and supported by a portion protruding from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, an extended bottom portion 324 that extends radially outward from the lower end of the main body portion 321, Is mainly provided.

延設底部324は、その周辺において本体部321から径方向外側へ向けて周囲に亘って凸設される支持凸条部324aと、延設底部324の上面から上方へ向けて、本体部321の中心軸と同軸の円環形状に沿って凸設される円状凸設部324bと、を主に備える。   The extended bottom portion 324 includes a support protrusion 324a that protrudes from the main body portion 321 toward the outer side in the radial direction at the periphery thereof, and an upper surface of the extended bottom portion 324 that extends upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321. And a circular projecting portion 324b that projects along an annular shape coaxial with the central axis.

支持凸条部324aと円状凸設部324bとにより、後述する切替装置400と土台部材320との接触面積を減少させることができるので、切替装置400の動作抵抗を小さくすることができ、駆動モータ490に必要とされる駆動力を小さくすることができる。   Since the contact ridge between the switching device 400 and the base member 320, which will be described later, can be reduced by the support protrusions 324a and the circular protrusions 324b, the operating resistance of the switching device 400 can be reduced, and the drive The driving force required for the motor 490 can be reduced.

クラッチ部材330は、土台部材320の凹設部322に内嵌され、その凹設方向に沿って上下動作する部材であって、凹設部322の内径よりも若干小さな外径の円柱形状から形成されると共に凹設部322に下側部分が内嵌される本体棒部331と、その本体棒部331の上端から本体棒部331と同軸で延設されると共に本体棒部331よりも小径の当接部332と、同じく本体棒部331の上端から径方向に延設される延設部333と、本体部331を上端側で支持すると共に下端側で土台部材320に固定される封止部334と、本体棒部331に径方向から嵌め込まれると共に本体棒部331の外径を拡大する作用を有するEリング335と、封止部334と土台部材320との間においてEリング335の下側に配置されEリング335を介して本体棒部331を上方へ移動させる付勢力を発生させるスプリングSP2と、を主に備える。   The clutch member 330 is a member that is fitted in the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and moves up and down along the recessed direction, and is formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 322. A main body bar portion 331 in which a lower portion is fitted in the recessed portion 322, and extends from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331 coaxially with the main body bar portion 331 and has a smaller diameter than the main body bar portion 331. A contact portion 332, an extended portion 333 that extends in the radial direction from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331, and a sealing portion that supports the main body portion 331 on the upper end side and is fixed to the base member 320 on the lower end side. 334, an E ring 335 that is fitted into the main body bar portion 331 from the radial direction and has an action of expanding the outer diameter of the main body bar portion 331, and a lower side of the E ring 335 between the sealing portion 334 and the base member 320 Placed in E A spring SP2 for generating biasing force for moving the main rod portion 331 upwardly through the grayed 335 mainly comprises a.

当接部332は、操作部材310の凸設部312と当接する部分であって、当接され押し下げられることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。ここで、クラッチ部材330が操作部材310の反対側においてスプリングSP2で付勢されることにより、操作部材310が激しく(高速で)操作された場合でも、弾性力の干渉作用により、凸設部312と当接部332との間に生じる負荷が過大となることを防止することができる。   The abutting portion 332 is a portion that abuts against the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 is lowered by being abutted and pushed down. Here, when the clutch member 330 is biased by the spring SP2 on the opposite side of the operation member 310, even if the operation member 310 is operated violently (at high speed), the protruding portion 312 is caused by the interference action of the elastic force. And the contact portion 332 can be prevented from being excessively loaded.

延設部333は、その上面から下方へ向けてドーナツ状に凹設される円環凹部333aを備える。円環凹部333aは、図9に示す開閉部材340の第1位置状態において、開閉部材330の姿勢変化を防止するように作用する。   The extending portion 333 includes an annular recess 333a that is recessed in a donut shape from the upper surface downward. The annular recess 333a acts to prevent a change in the posture of the opening / closing member 330 in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 shown in FIG.

封止部334は、開口の上端部内孔334bの内径が本体棒部331の外径よりも若干大きな径で形成されると共に、本体棒部331の中心軸を通る直線で分割されるハーフパイプ形状の一対の半部材334aを合体させた後に、土台部材320に固定される。   The sealing portion 334 is formed in a half pipe shape in which the inner diameter of the upper end portion inner hole 334 b of the opening is formed with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body rod portion 331 and is divided by a straight line passing through the central axis of the main body rod portion 331. After the pair of half members 334 a are combined, the base member 320 is fixed.

封止部334を土台部材320に組み立てる方法を詳述すると、まず、本体棒部331にEリング335を径方向から嵌め込み、その後、Eリング335を筒の内側に収容するように一対の半部材334aを合体させる。その後、本体棒部331の下端側からスプリングSP2を封止部334の内部へ入れ込み、その状態で、本体棒部331の下端部を土台部材320の凹設部322に挿入しながら、封止部334の下端部を土台部材320に嵌合させることにより、封止部334を土台部材320に固定する。   The method of assembling the sealing portion 334 to the base member 320 will be described in detail. First, the E-ring 335 is fitted into the main body rod portion 331 from the radial direction, and then the pair of half members are accommodated inside the cylinder. Combine 334a. Thereafter, the spring SP2 is inserted into the sealing portion 334 from the lower end side of the main body bar portion 331, and in this state, the lower end portion of the main body bar portion 331 is inserted into the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320, while the sealing portion The sealing portion 334 is fixed to the base member 320 by fitting the lower end portion of 334 to the base member 320.

このように組み立てることにより、本体棒部331に一対の半部材334aを合体させた中間部材から、封止部334が抜け落ちることを防止することができる。そのため、前もって本体棒部331と封止部334とを連結しておくことができるので、生産ラインにおいて、製造の効率化を図ることができる。   By assembling in this way, it is possible to prevent the sealing portion 334 from falling off from the intermediate member obtained by combining the pair of half members 334a with the main body bar portion 331. Therefore, the main body bar portion 331 and the sealing portion 334 can be connected in advance, so that the production efficiency can be improved in the production line.

図9に示すように、本体棒部331は、土台部材320の凹設部322と、封止部334の上端部内孔334bとの2点で支持されるので、クラッチ部材330の本体棒部331が傾倒することを抑制することができると共に、クラッチ部材330が上下方向に移動する際の移動幅を無駄なく確保することができる。   As shown in FIG. 9, the main body bar portion 331 is supported at two points, that is, the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and the upper end inner hole 334 b of the sealing portion 334, and thus the main body bar portion 331 of the clutch member 330. Can be suppressed, and the movement width when the clutch member 330 moves in the vertical direction can be ensured without waste.

開閉部材340は、土台部材320の軸部323に軸支される長尺部材であって、軸方向視で長尺板状に形成される本体板部341と、その本体板部341の下端部において軸部323の外径よりも若干大きな内径で円形に貫通形成される支持孔342と、本体板部341の上端部においてクラッチ部材330と対向する側に凸設される係合爪343と、本体板部341の支持孔342と交差する側面から凸設される凸設受け部344と、本体板部341の下端部においてクラッチ部材330と対向する側の反対側の側面から凸設される調整腕部345と、本体板部341の封止部334と対向する面から膨出される膨出部346と、軸部323の周りに巻き付けられると共に凸設受け部344に係止され開閉部材340を外方側の位置へ回動させる付勢力を発生するねじりバネNB1と、を主に備える。   The opening / closing member 340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 323 of the base member 320, and a main body plate portion 341 that is formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction, and a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. A support hole 342 formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 323, an engagement claw 343 projecting from the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341 on the side facing the clutch member 330, An adjustment receiving portion 344 that protrudes from a side surface that intersects with the support hole 342 of the main body plate portion 341, and an adjustment that protrudes from the side surface opposite to the side facing the clutch member 330 at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. The arm portion 345, the bulging portion 346 bulging from the surface of the main body plate portion 341 facing the sealing portion 334, and the shaft portion 323 are wound around and locked by the convex receiving portion 344, thereby opening and closing the opening / closing member 340. Turn to outside position Mainly includes a torsion spring NB1, the generating a biasing force for.

本実施形態では、開閉部材340の動作態様により、大当たりの期待度が把握できるように制御される。従って、遊技者に開閉部材340の動作態様を視認させることで、遊技者を一喜一憂させることができる。   In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the expected degree of jackpot can be grasped by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, by making the player visually recognize the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, the player can be relieved.

本体板部341は、軸支される下半部が板状に形成され、それに連設される上半部は、板厚方向に拡大された立体的な形状(略長方形形状)から形成される。   The main body plate portion 341 is formed such that the lower half portion to be pivotally supported is formed in a plate shape, and the upper half portion connected thereto is formed from a three-dimensional shape (substantially rectangular shape) enlarged in the plate thickness direction. .

係合爪343は、先端から下方へ凸設される(軸部323側へ凸設される)鉤状に形成され、開閉部材340がクラッチ部材330へ最も近接した状態(第1位置状態)において、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと係合する(図9参照)。係合爪343が、円環凹部333aと係合することにより、開閉部材340が軸部323を中心に回転することが防止される。即ち、開閉部材340が第1位置状態から、クラッチ部材330から離間した状態(第2位置状態等)へ向けて移動することが防止される。   The engaging claw 343 is formed in a bowl shape protruding downward from the tip (projecting toward the shaft portion 323 side), and in a state where the opening / closing member 340 is closest to the clutch member 330 (first position state). Then, it engages with the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 (see FIG. 9). The engagement claw 343 engages with the annular recess 333 a, thereby preventing the opening / closing member 340 from rotating around the shaft portion 323. That is, the opening / closing member 340 is prevented from moving from the first position state to a state (second position state or the like) separated from the clutch member 330.

調整腕部345は、後述する切替装置400の上面と当接することで、開閉部材340の回動終端を規定する部材である。なお、後述するように、本実施形態では、開閉部材340の回動終端が、主に3種類から選択可能に形成される。   The adjustment arm portion 345 is a member that defines the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting an upper surface of the switching device 400 described later. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is mainly selectable from three types.

膨出部346は、封止部334と当接することで、開閉部材340の回動終端を規定する部分である。なお、本実施形態では封止部334と対向する面が平面形状から構成されるが、封止部334の外周面の曲率に合わせた曲面形状から構成するようにしても良い。   The bulging portion 346 is a portion that defines the rotation end of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting the sealing portion 334. In this embodiment, the surface facing the sealing portion 334 is configured in a planar shape, but may be configured in a curved surface shape that matches the curvature of the outer peripheral surface of the sealing portion 334.

切替装置400は、土台部材320の本体部321の外径よりも若干大きな内径から形成されることにより土台部材320の周りを相対回転可能に構成される上面視ドーナツ形状の本体円環部410と、その本体円環部410の上面に形成されると共に調整腕部345との当接により開閉部材340の回転動作を止める調整段部420と、本体円環部410の外周面に周方向に亘って刻設されるギア歯430と、そのギア歯430に歯合される駆動ギア491を駆動させる駆動モータ490と、を主に備える。   The switching device 400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 410 viewed from above An adjustment step portion 420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 410 and stops the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345; Gear teeth 430 engraved in this manner, and a drive motor 490 that drives a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430.

切替装置400は、開閉部材340の動作態様を変化可能に構成される装置であって、遊技者から見て、開閉部材340よりも操作デバイス300の下方(奥側)に配置される。これにより、遊技者が開閉部材340を視認し易くする一方で、切替装置400を視認し難くすることができる。   The switching device 400 is a device configured to be able to change the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, and is disposed below (on the back side) of the operation device 300 from the opening / closing member 340 when viewed from the player. Thereby, while making it easy for a player to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the switching device 400.

調整段部420は、本体円環部410の回転軸方向視において、軸中心とした角度位置(位相)ごとに、上側面の高さが変化する態様で構成される。そのため、調整腕部345が調整段部420のどの面と当たるかによって、開閉部材340の回転が停止する位置が変化する。   The adjustment step portion 420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step 420 the adjustment arm 345 contacts.

ギア歯430は、駆動ギア491から駆動力が伝達されることにより回転する。ギア歯が回転する事により、同様に本体円環部410及びその上面に形成される調整段部420が回転する。   The gear teeth 430 rotate when driving force is transmitted from the driving gear 491. As the gear teeth rotate, the main body annular portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 formed on the upper surface thereof similarly rotate.

図8に示すように、調整段部420は、その上側面が、最も高い高段h0とされる第1面421と、その第1面421よりも一段低い中段h1とされる第2面422と、最も低い低段h2とされる第3面423と、それら各面の周方向端部同士を連結する各連結面と、を主に備える(高段h0、中段h1及び低段h2については図10参照)。なお、後述する切断面θL0と、第3面423とは、本体円環部410の中心軸を基準として略110度ずれて配置される。   As shown in FIG. 8, the adjustment stepped portion 420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h0 and a second surface 422 that is one step lower than the first surface 421 and the middle step h1. And the third surface 423, which is the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface that connects the circumferential ends of the respective surfaces (for the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step h2). (See FIG. 10). Note that a cut surface θL0 and a third surface 423, which will be described later, are arranged with a difference of approximately 110 degrees with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410.

なお、各連結面は、本体円環部410の円環形状と、本体円環部410の回転軸から放射上に延設される立体(ブロック形状の部材)とが重なる体積部分を、本体円環部410から抜き取る形で凹設される態様から形成される。従って、各連結面は、本体円環部410の軸に直角な平面上において、連結面から延設される直線が本体円環部410の中心軸と交差する態様となる。   In addition, each connecting surface has a volume portion in which the annular shape of the main body ring portion 410 and a solid body (block-shaped member) extending radially from the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 410 overlap each other. It is formed from a mode in which it is recessed in the form of being extracted from the ring portion 410. Therefore, each connection surface is in a mode in which a straight line extending from the connection surface intersects the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 on a plane perpendicular to the axis of the main body ring portion 410.

図9に示すように、操作部材310は、押し込み操作の方向で、外壁部材301の上面および開閉部材340の上面と、対向配置され、操作部材310のストローク量は、操作部材310が、外壁部材301の上面または開閉部材340の上面と当接するまでの長さとされる。本実施形態では、操作部材310が移動範囲の上端位置(図9参照)に配置された状態において、操作部材310の外側延設部313の下面から外壁部材301の上面までの距離が、操作部材310の本体部311の上底下面から開閉部材340の上面までの距離よりも短い距離とされる。これにより、操作部材310を移動範囲の下端まで押し込み操作したとしても、操作部材310と開閉部材340とが上下方向に衝突することを防止することができる。   As shown in FIG. 9, the operation member 310 is disposed so as to face the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 and the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 in the direction of the push-in operation. A length until the top surface of 301 or the top surface of the opening / closing member 340 comes into contact is set. In the present embodiment, in a state where the operation member 310 is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 9) of the movement range, the distance from the lower surface of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 to the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 is The distance from the upper bottom surface of the main body 311 of 310 to the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 is shorter. Thereby, even if the operation member 310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, it is possible to prevent the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 from colliding in the vertical direction.

図10を参照して、調整段部420と開閉部材340との関係の詳細について、説明する。なお、図10の説明においては、図8を適宜参照する。   With reference to FIG. 10, the detail of the relationship between the adjustment step part 420 and the opening-and-closing member 340 is demonstrated. In the description of FIG. 10, FIG. 8 is appropriately referred to.

図10は、切替装置400の外周面の展開図である。なお、図10の上側の図は、本体円環部410の側面を所定の切断線θL0から、上面視反時計回りの中心角度180度分だけ移動した位置に配置される切断線θL2まで展開した展開図であり、図10の下側の図は、本体円環部410の側面を切断線θL2から、上面視反時計回りの中心角度180度分だけ移動した位置に配置される切断線θL0まで展開した展開図である(切断線θL0,θL2については、図8参照)。   FIG. 10 is a development view of the outer peripheral surface of the switching device 400. 10 is developed from the predetermined cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL2 arranged at a position moved by a center angle of 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 10 is a developed view, and the lower side of FIG. 10 shows the side surface of the main body ring portion 410 from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL0 arranged at a position shifted by a center angle 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 8 is a developed view (see FIG. 8 for the cutting lines θL0 and θL2).

ここで、図8において、上下に引いた直線と交差する位置が、本体円環部410の中心軸を挟んで正反対の位置(一対の開閉部材340の凸設受け部344が同時に当接可能となる位置)に対応する。   Here, in FIG. 8, the position intersecting with the straight line drawn up and down is the opposite position across the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 (the protruding receiving portions 344 of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can simultaneously contact each other). Corresponding position).

本体円環部410は、側面を展開する際の便宜上の基準線として、切断線θL0〜θL3が、側面上に鉛直方向に引かれる。ここで、切断線θL0から、本体円環部410の中心軸を中心に上面視反時計回りに90度回転した位置に切断線θL1が配置され、上面視反時計回りに180度回転した位置(切断線θL0の正反対の位置)に切断線θL2が配置され、上面視反時計回りに270度回転した位置(切断線θL1の正反対の位置)に切断線θL3が配置される(図8参照)。   As for the main body ring portion 410, cutting lines θL0 to θL3 are drawn vertically on the side surface as a reference line for convenience when the side surface is expanded. Here, from the cutting line θL0, the cutting line θL1 is arranged at a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in top view around the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and is positioned 180 degrees counterclockwise in top view (see FIG. The cutting line θL2 is disposed at a position (opposite to the cutting line θL0), and the cutting line θL3 is disposed at a position rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above (a position opposite to the cutting line θL1) (see FIG. 8).

上述したように、調整段部420は開閉部材340の調整腕部345と当接する部分であり、調整腕部345と調整段部420のどの位置が当接するかによって、開閉部材340が外方へ向けて回転した場合の開き方(動作態様)が変化する。   As described above, the adjustment step portion 420 is a portion that contacts the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and the opening / closing member 340 moves outward depending on which position of the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420 abuts. The way of opening (operation mode) when rotated toward the direction changes.

例えば、切断線θL1から切断線θL2までの調整段部420の形状と、切断線θL3から切断線θL0までの調整段部の形状とは、図10の上下の図の関係において、同様である。即ち、調整腕部345が、調整段部420の切断線θL1から切断線θL2までの区間および切断線θL3から切断線θL0までの区間と、対向配置される場合、外方へ回転動作する開閉部材340は、一対の開閉部材340で同様の位置まで回転動作する。   For example, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 are the same in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. That is, when the adjustment arm 345 is disposed opposite to the section from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the section from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 of the adjustment step section 420, the opening / closing member that rotates outwardly. 340 rotates to a similar position with a pair of opening and closing members 340.

一方で、切断線θL0から切断線θL1までの調整段部420の形状と、切断線θL2から切断線θL3までの調整段部の形状とは、図10の上下の図の関係において、異なっている。詳述すると、切断線θL0から切断線θL1までの区間では、第2面422が切断線θL0側に近接配置(第2面422の周方向の中心位置が仮想線BK2から11.25度だけ切断線θL0側に寄って配置)され、切断線θL2から切断線θL3までの区間では、切断線θL0から切断線θL1までの区間において第2面422が切断線θL0側に近接する程度と同程度に、第2面422が切断線θL3側に近接配置される。そのため、開閉部材340の動作態様を、互いに異ならせることができる。続いて、このことについて詳述する。   On the other hand, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1 is different from the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3 in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. . Specifically, in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1, the second surface 422 is arranged close to the cutting line θL0 (the center position in the circumferential direction of the second surface 422 is cut by 11.25 degrees from the virtual line BK2). In the section from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3, the second surface 422 is close to the cutting line θL0 side in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1. The second surface 422 is disposed close to the cutting line θL3 side. Therefore, the operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from each other. Next, this will be described in detail.

図10の上側の図に示すように、切断線θL0から切断線θL1までの間に、等間隔に3本の仮想的な鉛直線を引いて説明する。なお、図10において、切断線θL0に近い側から順に仮想線BK1,BK2,BK3と定義する。この仮想線BK1,BK2,BK3は、本体円環部410の中心軸から放射上に延設される直線および本体円環部410の中心軸で形成される平面と、本体円環部410の周面とが交差する線に対応する。   As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 10, a description will be given by drawing three virtual vertical lines at equal intervals between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. In FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are defined in order from the side close to the cutting line θL0. The virtual lines BK 1, BK 2, and BK 3 are a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 and a plane formed by the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and the circumference of the main body ring portion 410. Corresponds to the line where the plane intersects.

図10の左右方向の長さは、本体円環部410の中心軸を基準とした角度の大きさに対応するので、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間は、各仮想線BK1,BK2,BK3により、22.5度間隔に等間隔で分割される。また、図10の下側の図においても、同様に、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に、仮想線BK1,BK2,BK3が引かれる。   Since the length in the left-right direction in FIG. 10 corresponds to the size of the angle with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, the virtual lines BK1, BK2, between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 By BK3, it is divided at equal intervals of 22.5 degrees. Similarly, in the lower diagram of FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are drawn between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3.

次いで、調整腕部345が切断線θL0の引かれる点に当接する場合を筆頭に、調整腕部345が各仮想線BK1,BK2,BK3の引かれる点に当接する場合について、順に説明する。   Next, the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where each of the virtual lines BK1, BK2, BK3 is drawn will be described in order, starting with the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn.

調整腕部345が切断線θL0の引かれる点に当接する状態では(本体円環部410の初期状態、図6参照)、開閉部材340の第1位置状態において、調整腕部345は調整段部420の第1面421に既に当接している。従って、開閉部材340は、それ以上、第2位置状態へ向けて移動することは不可能となっているので、仮にクラッチ部材330と開閉部材340との係合が解除されても、開閉部材340は第1位置状態で維持される。なお、図10において、調整腕部345が切断線θL0の引かれる点に当接可能となる状態が、本体円環部410の初期状態(指示待ち状態)に相当する。   When the adjustment arm 345 is in contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, see FIG. 6), the adjustment arm 345 is the adjustment step portion in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340. It is already in contact with the first surface 421 of 420. Accordingly, since the opening / closing member 340 cannot move further toward the second position state, even if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the opening / closing member 340 is not provided. Is maintained in the first position state. In FIG. 10, the state in which the adjustment arm 345 can come into contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn corresponds to the initial state (waiting for instruction) of the main body ring portion 410.

次いで、調整腕部345が、仮想線BK1の引かれる点に当接する場合について説明する。この状態は、図6に示す状態から切替装置400の本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに22.5度回転した状態に対応する。   Next, a case where the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

調整腕部345が、仮想線BK1の引かれる点に当接可能な状態(第1演出状態)では、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345(以下、調整腕部345bとも称す)は、依然、調整段部420の第1面421に既に当接される一方、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345(以下、調整腕部345aとも称す)は、第2面422と対向する関係となり、第2面422との間に空間が形成される。   In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn (first effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm) disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3. Part 345b) is still in contact with the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 420, while the adjustment arm part 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm part) disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. 345a) is opposed to the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the second surface 422 and the second surface 422.

従って、仮にクラッチ部材330と開閉部材340との係合が解除されると、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345bは、第1位置状態で維持される一方で、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345aは、第1位置状態から第2面422との間の空間が埋まるまで(調整腕部345と第2面422とが当接されるまで)回転する。   Accordingly, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is maintained in the first position state. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is maintained until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 are disposed). Rotate until contacted.

なお、回転後の調整腕部345aが配設される開閉部材340は、本体円環部410の回転に伴って、調整腕部345が調整段部420の上を滑り、第1面421まで持ち上げられることにより、第1位置状態へ復帰する。例えば、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに回転させることにより、切断線θL0が引かれる位置に他方の調整腕部345を到達させることができ(図10において調整腕部345を左方へ移動させることができ)、調整腕部345aを第1面421まで持ち上げることができる。また、第1面421と第2面422との間の連結面が斜めに傾斜して形成されるので、調整腕部345に過負荷が生じることを防止することができる。   The opening / closing member 340 on which the adjustment arm portion 345a after rotation is disposed is lifted up to the first surface 421 by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. As a result, the first position state is restored. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the other adjustment arm portion 345 can reach the position where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10). The adjusting arm 345a can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

なお、以下では、調整腕部345aが配設される開閉部材340を開閉部材340aとも称し、調整腕部345bが配設される開閉部材340を開閉部材340bとも称す。   Hereinafter, the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345a is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340a, and the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345b is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340b.

次いで、調整腕部345が、仮想線BK2の引かれる点に当接する場合について説明する。この状態は、図6に示す状態から切替装置400の本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに45度回転した状態に対応する。   Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to the state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

調整腕部345が、仮想線BK2の引かれる点に当接可能な状態(第2演出状態)では、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345bも、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345aも、第2面422と対向する関係となり、第2面422との間に空間が形成される。   In a state where the adjustment arm part 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn (second effect state), the adjustment arm part 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also the cutting line θL0. And the adjustment arm portion 345a arranged between the cutting line θL1 and the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345a and the second surface 422.

従って、仮にクラッチ部材330と開閉部材340との係合が解除されると、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345bも、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345aも、第1位置状態から第2面422との間の空間が埋まるまで(調整腕部345と第2面422とが当接されるまで)回転する。なお、回転後の開閉部材340は、本体円環部410の回転に伴って、調整腕部345が調整段部420の上を滑り、第1面421まで持ち上げられることにより、第1位置状態へ復帰する。また、第1面421と第2面422との間の連結面が斜めに傾斜して形成されるので、調整腕部345に過負荷が生じることを防止することができる。   Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed in the position also rotates until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (until the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 come into contact with each other). In addition, the opening / closing member 340 after the rotation is moved to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

ここで、第2演出状態からは、本体円環部410の回転方向を正逆切り替えることにより、一対の開閉部材340の復帰態様を変化させることができる。例えば、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに回転させる場合(図10において調整腕部345を左方へ移動させる場合)、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配設される開閉部材340bの方が開閉部材340aに比較して早く第1位置状態に復帰する一方、本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに回転させる場合(図10において調整腕部345を右方へ移動させる場合)、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配設される開閉部材340bの方が開閉部材340aに比較して遅れて第1位置状態に復帰する。   Here, from the second effect state, the return mode of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can be changed by switching the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410 forward and backward. For example, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above (when the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10), the opening / closing disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 When the member 340b returns to the first position state earlier than the opening / closing member 340a, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). ), The opening / closing member 340b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 returns to the first position state later than the opening / closing member 340a.

従って、操作部材310が遊技者から操作された後に本体円環部410を回転させる向きを、その時に生じている変動の期待度に関連して変化させることにより、開閉部材340の復帰態様の違いを大当たりの期待度に関連して変化させることができるので、開閉部材340に対する注目度を向上させることができる。   Accordingly, by changing the direction in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the operation member 310 is operated by the player in relation to the expected degree of variation occurring at that time, the difference in the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 Therefore, the degree of attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

次いで、調整腕部345が、仮想線BK3の引かれる点に当接する場合について説明する。この状態は、図6に示す状態から切替装置400の本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに67.5度回転した状態に対応する。   Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 67.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

調整腕部345が、仮想線BK3の引かれる点に当接可能な状態(第3演出状態)では、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345bは、第2面422と対向する関係となり、第2面422との間に空間が形成される一方、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345aは、調整段部420の第1面421に当接される。   In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn (third effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is the second surface. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is formed on the first surface of the adjustment step portion 420 while facing the 422 and forming a space between the second surface 422. 421 abuts.

従って、仮にクラッチ部材330と開閉部材340との係合が解除されると、切断線θL2と切断線θL3との間に配置される調整腕部345bは、第1位置状態から第2面422との間の空間が埋まるまで(調整腕部345と第2面422とが当接されるまで)回転する一方で、切断線θL0と切断線θL1との間に配置される調整腕部345aは、第1位置状態で維持される。   Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is moved from the first position to the second surface 422. The adjustment arm 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is rotated until the space between the adjustment arm 345 and the second surface 422 comes into contact with each other. Maintained in the first position state.

なお、回転後の開閉部材340aは、本体円環部410の回転に伴って、調整腕部345が調整段部420の上を滑り、第1面421まで持ち上げられることにより、第1位置状態へ復帰する。例えば、本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに回転させることにより、切断線θL3が引かれる位置に調整腕部345bを到達させることができ(図10において調整腕部345を右方へ移動させることができ)、調整腕部345bを第1面421まで持ち上げることができる。また、第1面421と第2面422との間の連結面が斜めに傾斜して形成されるので、調整腕部345に過負荷が生じることを防止することができる。   In addition, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotation moves to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted up to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise as viewed from above, the adjustment arm portion 345b can reach the position where the cutting line θL3 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). The adjustment arm 345b can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

なお、上述したように、本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに回転させることは、調整腕部345を図10において右方に移動させることに対応する(図10において、矢印CWで図示)。逆に、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに回転させることは、調整腕部345を図10において左方に移動させることに対応する(図10において、矢印CCWで図示)。   As described above, rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 rightward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CW in FIG. 10). . Conversely, rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise when viewed from above corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 leftward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CCW in FIG. 10).

なお、調整腕部345が調整段部420の第3段423と当接可能な状態(第4演出状態)において、開閉部材340は、第1位置状態から最大の回転角度で回転する。この場合、開閉部材340の操作部材310と対向する面が、操作部材310と当接する態様で構成されるが、詳細については後述する。   Note that, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the third step 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 (fourth effect state), the opening / closing member 340 rotates at the maximum rotation angle from the first position state. In this case, the surface of the opening / closing member 340 facing the operation member 310 is configured to come into contact with the operation member 310, and details will be described later.

次いで、図11及び図12を参照して、本体円環部410が初期状態とされる場合において、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作した状態について説明する。図11は、図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図12は、図11の矢印XII方向視における操作デバイス300の上面図である。   Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a state in which the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the initial state will be described. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG.

なお、図11では、押し込み操作される前の操作部材310が想像線で図示され、図12では、理解を容易とするために、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図12では、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図12上下方向に延びる線)が切断線θL0を通るように、本体円環部410が姿勢決めされている。   In FIG. 11, the operation member 310 before being pushed in is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 12, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The In FIG. 12, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the cutting line θL0 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 12) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

図11に示すように、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、凸設部312に当接され押し込まれることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。これにより、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと、開閉部材340の係合爪343との係合は解除されるが、調整腕部345が調整段部420により回転を規制されるので、開閉部材340の動作が規制される。   As shown in FIG. 11, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the protruding portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, but the rotation of the adjustment arm portion 345 is regulated by the adjustment step portion 420. The operation of 340 is restricted.

従って、遊技者が操作部材310を操作する前も、操作した後も、開閉部材340の状態が第1位置状態に維持される(図12参照)。このように、初期状態において、操作部材310の操作の有無に関わらず開閉部材340を第1位置状態に維持するようにしているので、操作部材310を押し込むことを指示する演出(第3図柄表示装置81、他の液晶画面、音声、ランプによる演出)が発生していないにも関わらず、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作した場合に、開閉部材340が開閉動作することを防止することができる。   Therefore, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state before and after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 12). In this way, in the initial state, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state regardless of whether or not the operation member 310 is operated. Therefore, an effect of instructing to push the operation member 310 (third symbol display) The opening / closing member 340 can be prevented from opening / closing when the player pushes the operating member 310 even though the device 81, other liquid crystal screen, sound, and lamp effects are not generated. it can.

次いで、図13及び図14を参照して、本体円環部410が第2演出状態とされる場合において、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作した状態について説明する。図13は、図6のIX−IX線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図14は、図13の矢印XIV方向視における操作デバイス300の上面図である。   Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a state where the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state will be described. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XIV in FIG.

なお、図13では、押し込み操作される前の操作部材310が想像線で図示され、図14では、理解を容易とするために、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図14に示すように、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図14上下方向に延びる線)が仮想線BK2を通るように、本体円環部410が姿勢決めされている。即ち、図14では、図12に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに45度回転した状態が図示されている。   In FIG. 13, the operation member 310 before being pushed is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 14, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the main body annular ring so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 14) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes through the virtual line BK2. The portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 14 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

図13に示すように、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、凸設部312に当接され押し込まれることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。これにより、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと、開閉部材340の係合爪343との係合は解除され、一対の開閉部材340が互いに離反する方向へ回転動作する。調整腕部345が調整段部420の第2面422に当接する姿勢で開閉部材340の回転は停止する。   As shown in FIG. 13, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is stopped in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

従って、遊技者が操作部材310を操作する前と、操作した後とでは、開閉部材340の状態が第1位置状態から第2位置状態に変化する(図14参照)。そのため、遊技者に与える情報として、操作デバイス300の中身の変化を加える事ができるので、操作デバイス300の注目力を向上させることができる。例えば、開閉部材340の状態が変化するか否かにより大当たりの期待度の違いが識別できるように駆動モータ490の制御を行うことにより、開閉部材340の状態変化で、先読み演出を行うことができる。   Therefore, before and after the player operates the operation member 310, the state of the opening and closing member 340 changes from the first position state to the second position state (see FIG. 14). Therefore, since the content of the operation device 300 can be added as information to be given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation degree of jackpot can be identified depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes, a pre-reading effect can be performed by changing the state of the opening / closing member 340. .

第1位置状態に配置された開閉部材340の係合爪343が移動する方向(左右方向、図13において軸部323を中心とする円と軸部323を通り上下に引かれる線との交点において円に引いた接線の方向)と、クラッチ部材330の移動方向(上下方向)とが、直角に交わることから、操作部材310を押し込み操作してクラッチ部材330の延設部333を下降させる際に、開閉部材340とクラッチ部材330との間で生じる負荷を低減することができる。これにより、開閉部材340が第1位置状態(図13参照、想像線で図示)に配置される場合と、開閉部材340が第2位置状態(図13参照、実線で図示)に配置される場合とで、操作部材310を介して遊技者に与えられる反力を同等とすることができる。   The direction in which the engaging claws 343 of the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state move (left and right, at the intersection of a circle centered on the shaft portion 323 in FIG. 13 and a line drawn vertically through the shaft portion 323. The direction of the tangent drawn to the circle) and the moving direction (vertical direction) of the clutch member 330 intersect at right angles. Therefore, when the operating member 310 is pushed in and the extending portion 333 of the clutch member 330 is lowered. The load generated between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 can be reduced. Thereby, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the first position state (see FIG. 13, illustrated by an imaginary line) and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state (see FIG. 13, shown by a solid line). Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 can be made equal.

即ち、遊技者が操作部材310を操作する際に操作部材310を介して遊技者に与えられる反力は、主に、スプリングSP1と、クラッチ部材330が有するスプリングSP2の付勢力により構成され、この反力は、開閉部材340が第1位置状態であるか、第2位置状態であるかにより大きくは変化しない。   That is, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 when the player operates the operation member 310 is mainly constituted by the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 included in the clutch member 330. The reaction force does not change greatly depending on whether the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state or the second position state.

これにより、操作部材310からの反力が変化することにより、遊技者に与えられる違和感を低減することができる。また、反力からは開閉部材340の状態の変化を把握し難いので、開閉部材340の状態に注目するように仕向けることができ、開閉部材340の注目力を向上させることができる。   Thereby, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by changing the reaction force from the operation member 310. In addition, since it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the opening / closing member 340 from the reaction force, it can be directed to pay attention to the state of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

また、操作デバイス300の内部の状態変化により演出を行うので、LEDなどの照明装置が必ずしも必要無く、LEDの個数を削減することによるコストダウンや、LED配線を省くことによる省スペース化を図ることができる。   In addition, since an effect is produced by a change in the state of the operation device 300, a lighting device such as an LED is not necessarily required, and cost reduction by reducing the number of LEDs and space saving by omitting LED wiring are achieved. Can do.

また、本実施形態では、操作部材310の操作が行われていないにも関わらず、開閉部材340に与えられる負荷が増大する等して、開閉部材340が回転動作することを防止し易く形成される。以下、このことについて説明する。   In the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is easily prevented from rotating due to an increase in the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 even though the operation member 310 is not operated. The This will be described below.

操作部材310が操作されていない状態において、遊技者からパチンコ機10に与えられる衝撃や、他の動作部材から伝わる振動などにより、開閉部材340が意図せず激しく揺れることが起こりえる。この場合、開閉部材340からクラッチ部材330に与えられる負荷が大きくなり、開閉部材340からの負荷により延設部333が押し下げられてしまうと、延設部333と係合爪343との係合が解除され、開閉部材340が第1位置状態から誤って回転動作し得る。   In a state where the operation member 310 is not operated, the opening / closing member 340 may unintentionally shake violently due to an impact given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player, vibrations transmitted from other operation members, or the like. In this case, when the load applied to the clutch member 330 from the opening / closing member 340 increases and the extension portion 333 is pushed down by the load from the opening / closing member 340, the engagement between the extension portion 333 and the engaging claw 343 is engaged. The opening / closing member 340 may be erroneously rotated from the first position state.

ここで、本実施形態では、係合爪343が開閉部材340の回転軸である軸部323側へ凸設されるので、クラッチ部材330と開閉部材340が係合する状態(図9参照)から開閉部材340が回転動作を開始しようとすると、係合爪343の凸設先端との干渉により延設部333が下方(軸部323側)に押し込まれる。この場合、同時にEリング335も下方に移動することで、スプリングSP2が縮められることから、開閉部材340を第1位置状態で維持するための力(Eリング335を押し上げようとするスプリングSP2の付勢力)が増大する。従って、クラッチ部材330が開閉部材340により押し下げられ、開閉部材340が回転動作する誤動作を防止し易くできる。   Here, in the present embodiment, since the engaging claw 343 is protruded toward the shaft portion 323 which is the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 340, the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 are engaged (see FIG. 9). When the opening / closing member 340 starts to rotate, the extension portion 333 is pushed downward (on the shaft portion 323 side) due to interference with the protruding tip of the engagement claw 343. In this case, since the E-ring 335 is also moved downward at the same time, the spring SP2 is contracted. Therefore, a force for maintaining the opening / closing member 340 in the first position (the attachment of the spring SP2 that pushes up the E-ring 335) is applied. (Power) increases. Therefore, the clutch member 330 is pushed down by the opening / closing member 340, and it is possible to easily prevent a malfunction in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates.

この誤動作防止の仕組みは、ソレノイド等を制御することによるものでは無く、クラッチ部材330と開閉部材340との機械的な係合関係により構成される。従って、不意な衝撃や、振動に確実に対応することができ、操作部材300の動作の信頼度を向上させる(誤動作を抑制する)ことができる。   This mechanism for preventing malfunction is not based on controlling a solenoid or the like, but is constituted by a mechanical engagement relationship between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with an unexpected impact or vibration, and to improve the reliability of the operation of the operation member 300 (suppressing malfunction).

次いで図15及び図16を参照して、開閉部材340の復帰動作について説明する。図15及び図16は、操作デバイス300の上面図である。なお、図15では、図14に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに22.5度回転された状態が図示され、図16では、図14に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視反時計回りに22.5度回転された状態が図示される。   Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the return operation of the opening and closing member 340 will be described. 15 and 16 are top views of the operation device 300. FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 illustrates the main body ring portion 410 from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

図15に示すように、図14に示す状態から本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに22.5度回転させた場合、調整部材345aが調整段部420の第1面421まで移動することにより、開閉部材340a(図15上側の部材、背面側に配置される部材)が第1位置状態まで回転動作する一方、開閉部材340bは第2位置状態で維持される。なお、後述する図22及び図23において、図15に示す復帰態様を後先復帰態様と称す。   As shown in FIG. 15, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 a moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340a (the member on the upper side of FIG. 15, the member disposed on the back side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340b is maintained in the second position state. In FIGS. 22 and 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

図16に示すように、図14に示す状態から本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに22.5度回転させた場合、調整部材345bが調整段部420の第1面421まで移動することにより、開閉部材340b(図16下側の部材、正面側に配置される部材)が第1位置状態まで回転動作する一方、開閉部材340aは第2位置状態で維持される。即ち、本体円環部410を回転させた後の開閉部材340の状態が、図15と対比して上下逆となる。なお、後述する図22及び図23において、図16に示す復帰態様を前先復帰態様と称す。   As shown in FIG. 16, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 b moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340b (the lower member in FIG. 16, a member disposed on the front side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340a is maintained in the second position state. That is, the state of the opening / closing member 340 after rotating the main body ring portion 410 is upside down as compared with FIG. In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

従って、遊技者が操作部材310を操作することにより図14に示す状態となった後の開閉部材340の復帰態様を、本体円環部410の回転方向により変化させることができるので、この復帰態様の違いを大当たり遊技状態等の特別遊技状態の発生に対する期待感(以下において、「大当たり期待度」と称す)に関わる演出として構成することにより、操作後の操作デバイス300に対する注目力を向上させることができる。   Therefore, the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 after the player has operated the operation member 310 to reach the state shown in FIG. 14 can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410. To increase attention to the operation device 300 after the operation by configuring the difference as an effect related to a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state such as a jackpot game state (hereinafter referred to as “a jackpot expectation”). Can do.

従来、大当たり期待度の違いは、例えば、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226(図4参照)から出力される音声の違いや、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227(図1及び図4参照)における点灯および消灯の出力態様の違い、発光色の違い等により、遊技者に報知されていた。   Conventionally, the difference in jackpot expectation is, for example, a difference in sound output from a sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (see FIG. 4), a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, or the like). ) 227 (see FIG. 1 and FIG. 4), the player was informed by the difference in the output mode of turning on and off, the difference in emission color, and the like.

しかし、音声による報知では、他の遊技機等から大音量で発せられる音声にかき消される恐れがあるし、光による報知では、容易に判別可能な色の違いや出力態様の変化には限度があり、大当たり期待度の区分けの数が少数(例えば、4種類)に限定されてしまうことで、遊技が単調になり易いという問題点があった。また、光による報知では、点灯または消灯させる部分を期待度により変更するようにしても良いが、この場合も、スペースが必要となるし、遊技者が光を追って視線を動かす必要が生じるので、結局遊技者に注目されなくなるという問題点があった。   However, there is a risk that the voice notification may be drowned out by a loud sound emitted from other gaming machines, etc., and there is a limit to the easily distinguishable color difference and output mode change in the light notification. There is a problem that the game tends to be monotonous because the number of jackpot expectations is limited to a small number (for example, four types). In addition, in the light notification, the part to be turned on or off may be changed depending on the degree of expectation, but also in this case, a space is required and the player needs to move the line of sight following the light. Eventually, there was a problem that players were not attracting attention.

これに対し、本実施形態では、後述するように、操作部材310の操作に伴う開閉部材340の操作態様を、少なくとも8種類形成することができる。従って、少なくとも8種類に区分けされた大当たり期待度を開閉部材340の動作態様により報知することができる。また、遊技者は、開閉部材340に注目すればよいので、視線を複数箇所に動かす必要が無いので、開閉部材340に対する注目力を維持することができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, as will be described later, at least eight types of operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the operation of the operation member 310 can be formed. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree classified into at least eight types can be notified by the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. Further, since the player only needs to pay attention to the opening / closing member 340, it is not necessary to move the line of sight to a plurality of locations, so that attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained.

なお、図10に示すように、図15に示す状態から、更に上面視時計回り(同一方向)に22.5度回転させることにより、調整腕部345bを調整段部420の第1面421まで移動させることができるので、一対の開閉部材340を第1位置状態に復帰させた状態を形成することができる。   As shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345 b is moved to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420 by further rotating 22.5 degrees clockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. 15. Since it can be moved, the state which returned a pair of opening-and-closing member 340 to the 1st position state can be formed.

また、図10に示すように、図16に示す状態から、更に上面視反時計回り(同一方向)に22.5度回転させることにより、調整腕部345aを調整段部420の第1面421まで移動させることができるので、一対の開閉部材340を第1位置状態に復帰させた状態を形成することができる。   Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345a is further rotated by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which the pair of opening / closing members 340 are returned to the first position state.

次いで、図17から図19を参照して、本体円環部410が第1演出状態とされる場合について説明する。図17は、操作デバイス300の上面図であり、図18は、操作デバイス300の上面図であり、図19は、図18のXIX−XIX線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。   Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the first effect state will be described. 17 is a top view of the operation device 300, FIG. 18 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG.

なお、図17及び図18では、理解を容易とするために、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略され、図19では、回転動作後の開閉部材340aが想像線で図示される。   In FIGS. 17 and 18, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 19, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotating operation is shown by an imaginary line. Is done.

図17では、図12に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに45度回転した状態が図示され、図18及び図19では、図17に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視反時計回りに22.5度回転した状態が図示される。即ち、図18では、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図18上下方向に延びる線)が仮想線BK1を通るように、本体円環部410が姿勢決めされている。   17 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 12, and FIGS. 18 and 19 show the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise is shown. That is, in FIG. 18, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK1 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 18) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

図19に示す状態において、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、凸設部312に当接され押し込まれることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。これにより、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと、開閉部材340の係合爪343との係合は解除され、一対の開閉部材340の内、開閉部材340a(図19右側)のみが回転動作し、調整腕部345aが調整段部420の第2面422に当接する姿勢で開閉部材340aの回転は停止する。なお、操作部材310の操作後に、更に本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに22.5度回転させることにより、本体円環部410の状態を図12の状態に復帰させることができ、開閉部材340aを第1位置状態に復帰させることができる。   In the state shown in FIG. 19, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being brought into contact with and pushed into the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340a (right side in FIG. 19) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340a stops when the adjustment arm 345a is in contact with the second surface 422 of the adjustment step 420. After the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, so that the main body ring portion 410 can be returned to the state shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 340a can be returned to the first position state.

次いで、図20及び図21を参照して、本体円環部410が第3演出状態とされる場合について説明する。図20は、操作デバイス300の上面図であり、図21は、図20のXXI−XXI線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図20及び図21の説明においては、図17を適宜参照する。   Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the third effect state will be described. 20 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS.

なお、図20では、理解を容易とするために、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略され、図21では、回転動作後の開閉部材340bが想像線で図示される。   In FIG. 20, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 21, the opening / closing member 340b after the rotating operation is illustrated by an imaginary line.

図20及び図21では、図17に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに22.5度回転した状態が図示される。即ち、図20では、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図20上下方向に延びる線)が仮想線BK3を通るように、本体円環部410が姿勢決めされている。   20 and FIG. 21, a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above is illustrated from the state shown in FIG. That is, in FIG. 20, the main body ring portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK3 so that a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) passes through the virtual line BK3. The posture is determined.

図21に示す状態において、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、凸設部312に当接され押し込まれることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。これにより、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと、開閉部材340の係合爪343との係合は解除され、一対の開閉部材340の内、開閉部材340b(図21左側)のみが回転動作し、調整腕部345bが調整段部420の第2面422に当接する姿勢で開閉部材340bの回転は停止する。   In the state shown in FIG. 21, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340b (left side in FIG. 21) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340b stops in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345b contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

なお、操作部材310の操作後に、更に本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに22.5度回転させることにより、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図20上下方向に延びる線)が切断線θL1を通るようにすることができるので、調整腕部345bを第1面421に到達させることができ(図10参照)、開閉部材340bを第1位置状態に復帰させることができる。   In addition, after the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above, so that a straight line passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 is connected. (A line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) can pass through the cutting line θL1, so that the adjustment arm 345b can reach the first surface 421 (see FIG. 10), and the opening / closing member 340b is moved to the first position. It can be returned to the position state.

従って、遊技者が操作部材310を操作することにより、開閉部材340に生じる変化を、本体円環部410の状態を予め変化させることで、複数種類(少なくとも、図14に示す態様と、図18及び図19に示す態様と、図20及び図21に示す態様との3種類)形成することができる。   Therefore, when the player operates the operation member 310, a change occurring in the opening / closing member 340 is changed in advance by changing the state of the main body ring portion 410, so that a plurality of types (at least the mode shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 19 and the embodiment shown in FIGS. 20 and 21).

そのため、遊技者に与える情報として、操作デバイス300の中身の変化の種類の違いを加える事ができるので、操作デバイス300の注目力を向上させることができる。例えば、開閉部材340の状態変化の種類によって、大当たりの期待度の違いが識別できるように駆動モータ490の制御を行うことにより、開閉部材340の状態変化の種類で、先読み演出を行うことができる。   Therefore, since the difference in the type of change in the contents of the operation device 300 can be added as information given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation level of jackpots can be identified according to the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340, a pre-reading effect can be performed with the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340. .

ここで、例えば、図18において、開閉部材340aの回転動作後に、本体円環部410を回転させたとしても、開閉部材340bの状態は変化しない。それを利用して、図18に示す状態から、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに22.5度回転させることにより、本体円環部410の回転中は開閉部材340a,340bの状態を維持しながら、操作部材310を再び押し込み操作された場合に開閉部材340bを回転動作させることができ、結果的に一対の開閉部材340を第2位置状態とすることができる。なお、同様のことを、図20に示す状態から本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに22.5度回転させることにより、行うことができる。   Here, for example, in FIG. 18, even if the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the opening / closing member 340a is rotated, the state of the opening / closing member 340b does not change. By utilizing this, the state of the opening / closing members 340a and 340b is rotated while the main body ring portion 410 is rotated by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. When the operation member 310 is pushed in again, the opening / closing member 340b can be rotated, and as a result, the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be brought into the second position state. The same thing can be performed by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top in the state shown in FIG.

従って、操作部材310を押し込み操作した後の再度の押し込み操作により開閉部材340が状態変化するか否かの違いを、大当たりの期待度の違いと関連付ける態様で本体円環部410を制御することにより、操作部材310を一度操作した後における操作デバイス300の注目力を向上させることができる。また、再度の押し込み操作により開閉部材340の状態が変化するか否かにより大当たりの期待度が変化するので、再度の押し込み操作後においても、操作デバイス300に注目させることができる。   Therefore, by controlling the main body ring portion 410 in a manner that associates the difference in whether the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 with the difference in the jackpot expectation. The attention of the operation device 300 after operating the operation member 310 once can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation of jackpot changes depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation, the operation device 300 can be focused even after the re-pushing operation.

なお、回転角度が22.5度で同じなので、図17に示す状態から図18に示す状態へ本体円環部410を動作させるために駆動モータ490を所定の第1速度で回転させる期間と、図17に示す状態から図20に示す状態へ本体円環部410を動作させるために駆動モータ490を所定の第1速度で回転させる期間とが同じとなる。これにより、駆動モータ490の動作音や振動から、本体円環部410の状態を遊技者に把握されることを防止することができる。   Since the rotation angle is the same at 22.5 degrees, a period for rotating the drive motor 490 at a predetermined first speed in order to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. The period during which the drive motor 490 is rotated at a predetermined first speed to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. 20 is the same. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the state of the main body ring portion 410 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

また、一対の開閉部材340が回転動作した後は、図15及び図16で上述したように、一対の開閉部材340の内、どちらの開閉部材340a,340bから復帰させるかを、本体円環部410の回転方向により変化させることができる。従って、開閉部材340が回転動作する態様と、開閉部材340が復帰動作する態様とを様々に組み合わせることにより、複数種類の大当たり期待度に対応した動きを行わせることができる。これにより、操作デバイス300の注目力を向上させることができる。   After the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate, as described above with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, which of the pair of opening / closing members 340 is to be returned from which opening / closing member 340 a, 340 b is determined. It can be changed according to the rotation direction of 410. Accordingly, by combining the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates and the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 returns, it is possible to perform movements corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot expectations. Thereby, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

図22(a)から図22(d)及び図23(a)から図23(d)は、開閉部材340のモデル図である。なお、図22(a)から図22(d)及び図23(a)から図23(d)では、開閉部材340の回転動作の異なったパターンが、時系列で図示される。ここで、図22及び図23において、左側に開閉部材340bが、右側に開閉部材340aが、それぞれ図示される。   FIG. 22A to FIG. 22D and FIG. 23A to FIG. 23D are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. In FIGS. 22A to 22D and FIGS. 23A to 23D, different patterns of the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 are illustrated in time series. Here, in FIGS. 22 and 23, the opening / closing member 340b is illustrated on the left side, and the opening / closing member 340a is illustrated on the right side.

なお、第3図柄表示装置81などに表示されることにより、遊技者に操作部材310の押し込み操作を促すタイミングが、「押せ」で図示される。また、切替装置400の状態の時系列の変化が、横長のバーとして図示される。ここで、「BK1準備」の表示は、その枠の右端のタイミングで仮想線BK1と調整腕部345とが対向配置されることを意味する。なお、「BK2準備」の表示は、仮想線BK2と調整腕部345とが、「BK3準備」の表示は、仮想線BK3と調整腕部345とが、それぞれ対向配置されることを意味する。これは、図24、図25において同様である。   The timing for prompting the player to push in the operation member 310 by being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like is indicated by “push”. In addition, a time-series change in the state of the switching device 400 is illustrated as a horizontally long bar. Here, the display of “preparation of BK1” means that the virtual line BK1 and the adjustment arm portion 345 are arranged to face each other at the timing of the right end of the frame. The display “BK2 preparation” means that the virtual line BK2 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged, and the display “BK3 preparation” means that the virtual line BK3 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged opposite to each other. This is the same in FIGS. 24 and 25.

図22及び図23に示すように、開閉部材340の回転動作の態様は、少なくとも8種類形成可能とされる。例えば、図22(a)に示すように、本体円環部410が第2演出状態(図13参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、前先復帰態様(図16参照)で開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第1動作パターンが形成可能である。   As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, at least eight types of rotation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be formed. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). ), A first operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

また、例えば、図22(b)に示すように、本体円環部410が第2演出状態(図13参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、後先復帰態様(図15参照)で、開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第2動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). 15), the second operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

この第1動作パターンとなるか、第2動作パターンとなるかによって、大当たり期待度が異なるように本体円環部410の姿勢を制御することにより、操作部材310を押し込み操作することにより一対の開閉部材340が両方とも回転動作したあとの、開閉部材340の復帰動作に対する注目力を向上させることができる。   By controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on whether it is the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a pair of opening and closing is performed by pushing the operation member 310 It is possible to improve attention to the returning operation of the opening / closing member 340 after both the members 340 are rotated.

また、例えば、図22(c)に示すように、本体円環部410が第1演出状態(図18参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第3動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A third operation pattern can be formed.

また、例えば、図22(d)に示すように、本体円環部410が第3演出状態(図20参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第4動作パターンが形成可能である。   Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A fourth operation pattern can be formed.

この第3動作パターンとなるか、第4動作パターンとなるかによって、大当たり期待度が異なるように本体円環部410の姿勢を制御することにより、操作部材310を押し込み操作した時の開閉部材340の回転動作に対する注目力を向上させることができる。   The opening / closing member 340 when the operation member 310 is pushed in is controlled by controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of expectation of jackpot depends on whether it is the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern. It is possible to improve attention to the rotational movement of the.

なお、切替装置400が初期位置に配置される場合、切替装置400を第1演出状態とする場合に必要な本体円環部410の回転角度に比較して、第3演出状態とする場合に必要な回転角度の方が大きくなる。従って、遊技者に、敢えて駆動モータ490の動作音や振動を把握しやすい構造とすることで、遊技者に本体円環部410の状態を予想可能にするようにしても良い。   When the switching device 400 is arranged at the initial position, it is necessary when the switching device 400 is in the third effect state as compared with the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 required when the switching device 400 is in the first effect state. The angle of rotation becomes larger. Accordingly, the player may be able to predict the state of the main body ring portion 410 by making the player easily grasp the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

この場合、駆動モータ490の動作速度が一定であるという前提のもとで、駆動モータ490の動作音が長く続く場合に、第4動作パターンで動作するのではないかと、遊技者に予想させることができる。従って、第4動作パターンで動作する場合の大当たり期待度が高く設定されていれば、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。   In this case, on the assumption that the operation speed of the drive motor 490 is constant, if the operation sound of the drive motor 490 continues for a long time, the player is expected to operate in the fourth operation pattern. Can do. Therefore, if the jackpot expectation level when operating in the fourth motion pattern is set high, the player's interest can be improved.

ここで、敢えて初期位置ではなく、切替装置400を初期位置から上面視反時計回りに90度回転させた位置(調整腕部345aが切断線θL1と一致する位置)で調整腕部345を支持する第2初期状態も可能に設定しても良い。この場合、第2初期状態からであれば、動作音が短くても(22.5度回転すれば)、切替装置400を第3演出状態とすることができるし、動作音が長くても、切替装置400を第1演出状態とすることができる。従って、駆動モータ490の動作音や振動と、大当たり期待度との関連を、把握し難くすることができる。   Here, the adjustment arm 345 is supported not at the initial position but at a position where the switching device 400 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position (position where the adjustment arm 345a coincides with the cutting line θL1). The second initial state may also be set to be possible. In this case, from the second initial state, even if the operation sound is short (when rotated by 22.5 degrees), the switching device 400 can be in the third effect state, and even if the operation sound is long, The switching device 400 can be set to the first effect state. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the relationship between the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490 and the big hit expectation.

なお、本体円環部410の動作タイミングは、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81でリーチ演出を行っている時が例示される。本実施形態では、駆動モータ490の回転速度は一定速度とされる。そのため、本体円環部410の回転角度が大きくなる場合に十分な期間を用意できるように、回転角度が大きい動作はロングリーチ中に行われ、回転角度が小さい動作はショートリーチ中におこなわれる。例えば、第3動作パターンは、ショートリーチで採用され、第1、第2及び第4動作パターンはロングリーチで採用される。   The operation timing of the main body ring portion 410 is exemplified when, for example, a reach effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the drive motor 490 is a constant speed. Therefore, an operation with a large rotation angle is performed during the long reach, and an operation with a small rotation angle is performed during the short reach so that a sufficient period can be prepared when the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 increases. For example, the third operation pattern is used for short reach, and the first, second, and fourth operation patterns are used for long reach.

切替装置400が第2初期状態となった後で、初期状態に復帰させる場合には、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに回転動作させる。これにより、復帰動作中に遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作したとしても、上述した第1から第8動作パターンで開閉部材340が動作し遊技者を混乱させることを防止することができる。また、調整段部420の第1面421が周方向に長く維持される範囲を利用することにより、復帰動作中のほとんどを、調整腕部345を移動範囲の上端位置で維持した状態(開閉部材340を第1位置状態で維持した状態)で維持することができる。また、この復帰動作は、リーチ演出が行われている期間外で行われる。これにより、遊技者の注目が逸れている状態で、本体円環部410を初期位置復帰させることが可能になる。   When returning to the initial state after the switching device 400 is in the second initial state, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above. Thereby, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 during the return operation, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 340 from operating in the first to eighth operation patterns and confusing the player. Further, by utilizing a range in which the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420 is maintained long in the circumferential direction, the state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 is maintained at the upper end position of the movement range (opening / closing member) during most of the return operation. 340 can be maintained in the first position state). Further, this return operation is performed outside the period during which the reach effect is performed. Thereby, it is possible to return the main body ring portion 410 to the initial position in a state where the player's attention is diverted.

また、例えば、図23(a)に示すように、本体円環部410が第1演出状態(図18参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、本体円環部410を第2演出状態(図13参照)の姿勢まで回転動作させた後に、遊技者に操作部材310を再度押し込み操作させ、その後、前先復帰態様(図16参照)で開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第5動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Five operation patterns can be formed.

また、例えば、図23(b)に示すように、本体円環部410が第1演出状態(図18参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、本体円環部410を第2演出状態(図13参照)の姿勢まで回転動作させた後に、遊技者に操作部材310を再度押し込み操作させ、その後、後先復帰態様(図15参照)で開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第6動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Six operation patterns can be formed.

また、例えば、図23(c)に示すように、本体円環部410が第3演出状態(図20参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、本体円環部410を第2演出状態(図13参照)の姿勢まで回転動作させた後に、遊技者に操作部材310を再度押し込み操作させ、その後、前先復帰態様(図16参照)で開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第7動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Seven operation patterns can be formed.

また、例えば、図23(d)に示すように、本体円環部410が第3演出状態(図20参照)の時に遊技者に操作部材310を押し込み操作させ、その後、本体円環部410を第2演出状態(図13参照)の姿勢まで回転動作させた後に、遊技者に操作部材310を再度押し込み操作させ、その後、後先復帰態様(図15参照)で開閉部材340を復帰動作させる第8動作パターンが形成可能である。   Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Eight operation patterns can be formed.

図23に示すように、第5動作パターンから第8動作パターンでは、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作する(2回目の操作をする)前後において一対の開閉部材340の片側の部材が動作する。この片側の部材の動作態様同士の組み合わせにより、大当たり期待度の違いを表現するようにしても良い。   As shown in FIG. 23, in the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the members on one side of the pair of opening / closing members 340 operate before and after the player pushes the operation member 310 (performs the second operation). . You may make it express the difference in jackpot expectation degree by the combination of the operation modes of this one side member.

この場合、例えば、「1回目の押し込み操作により回転動作する側の開閉部材340が、2回目の操作後に反対側の開閉部材340よりも長く回転状態(第2位置状態)を維持している場合、大当たり期待度が高い」ように制御される場合、第6動作パターンや第7動作パターンに比較して、第5動作パターンや第8動作パターンの方が大当たり期待度は高いことになる。   In this case, for example, “when the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pushing operation is maintained in the rotating state (second position state) longer than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation. When the control is performed such that the expectation level for jackpot is high, the expectation degree for jackpot is higher in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

このように制御すると、開閉部材340のある一時点における状態(動作態様)から大当たりの期待度を知る遊技性に、一定期間の開閉部材340の動作態様により大当たりの期待度を知る遊技性を追加することができる。   If controlled in this way, the gameability for knowing the jackpot expectation degree by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 for a certain period is added to the gameability for knowing the expectation degree of the jackpot from the state (operation mode) of the opening / closing member 340 at a certain point. can do.

従って、1回目の操作部材310の押し込み操作により大当たり期待度についての全情報が得られる場合に比較して、2回目の押し込み操作時および、2回目の押し込み操作後に開閉部材340が第2位置状態となるまでの間に亘って、開閉部材340に対する遊技者の注目力を向上させることができる。   Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state at the time of the second push operation and after the second push operation, as compared with the case where all the information about the jackpot expectation is obtained by the push operation of the first operation member 310. In the meantime, the player's attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

なお、片側の部材の動作態様同士の組み合わせは上述したものに限られるものでは無く、様々な態様が例示される。例えば、「1回目の押し込み操作により回転動作する側の開閉部材340が、2回目の操作後に反対側の開閉部材340よりも早く初期状態(第1位置状態)に復帰した場合、大当たり期待度が高い」ように制御するようにしても良い。この場合、第6動作パターンや第7動作パターンに比較して、第5動作パターンや第8動作パターンの方が大当たり期待度は低いことになる。   In addition, the combination of the operation modes of the members on one side is not limited to those described above, and various modes are exemplified. For example, if the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pressing operation returns to the initial state (first position state) earlier than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation, the jackpot expectation is You may make it control so that it is high. In this case, the big hit expectation is lower in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

また、例えば、「1回目の押し込み操作により背面側の開閉部材340aが回転動作する方が、正面側の開閉部材340bが回転動作する場合に比較して大当たり期待度が高く、2回目の押し込み操作からの復帰順序は正面側の開閉部材340bから復帰動作する方が、背面側の開閉部材340aから復帰動作する場合に比較して大当たり期待度が高い」ように制御するようにしても良い。この場合、第5動作パターンから第8動作パターンの内で、第5動作パターンが最も大当たり期待度が高く、第6、第7、第8となるにつれて順に大当たり期待度が低くなる。   In addition, for example, “the first opening operation causes the opening / closing member 340a on the back side to rotate, and the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than the case where the opening / closing member 340b on the front side rotates,” the second pressing operation. The return order from the front opening / closing member 340b may be controlled such that the return operation from the front side opening / closing member 340b has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the return operation from the rear side opening / closing member 340a. In this case, among the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the fifth operation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation decreases in order as the sixth, seventh, and eighth.

なお、動作の段階数からして、図22に示す動作パターン(第1動作パターン〜第4動作パターン)に比較して、図23に示す動作パターン(第5動作パターン〜第8動作パターン)の方が長い期間の動作となるが、動作の長さに対する期待度の高低の対応は、限定されるものでは無い。例えば、図22に示す動作パターンの方が図23に示す動作パターンよりも大当たり期待度が高くなるように制御しても良いし、その逆となるように制御しても良い。また、例えば、第1動作パターンから第8動作パターンを無作為に順序付けして、その順に大当たり期待度が高くなるように制御しても良い。   In addition, from the number of operation stages, the operation patterns (fifth operation pattern to eighth operation pattern) shown in FIG. 23 are compared with the operation patterns (first operation pattern to fourth operation pattern) shown in FIG. Although the operation is longer, the correspondence of the expectation level to the operation length is not limited. For example, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 22 may be controlled to have a higher jackpot expectation than the operation pattern shown in FIG. 23, or vice versa. Further, for example, the first operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern may be randomly ordered, and control may be performed so that the jackpot expectation is increased in that order.

なお、演出に係る制御方法としては、第3動作パターンまたは第4動作パターンにおいて、開閉部材340が復帰動作する前に再度の押し込み指示をするようにしても良い。この場合、押し込み指示に従って操作部材310を押し込んでも、第1位置状態に配置される開閉部材340は回転動作せず、姿勢を維持する演出(所謂「ガセ演出」)を行うことができる。従って、2回目の押し込み指示があったからといって、第5〜第8動作パターンのいずれかで本体円環部410が動作していることが確定しているわけでは無いようにすることができ、操作部材310を押し込み操作する際の遊技者の緊張感を高めることができる。   Note that, as a control method related to the effect, in the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern, before the opening / closing member 340 performs the return operation, a re-pushing instruction may be issued. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state does not rotate, and an effect of maintaining the posture (so-called “gase effect”) can be performed. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even when the second pressing instruction is issued. It is possible to increase the player's feeling of tension when the operation member 310 is pushed in.

また、演出に係る制御方法としては、第1動作パターンまたは第2動作パターンにおいて、開閉部材340が復帰動作する前に再度の押し込み指示をするようにしても良い。この場合、押し込み指示に従って操作部材310を押し込んでも、開閉部材340が第2位置状態に配置される場合には姿勢を維持するのみであり、1回目の操作指示を遊技者が無視していた場合には一対の開閉部材340が第2位置状態となる。従って、2回目の押し込み指示があったからといって、第5〜第8動作パターンのいずれかで本体円環部410が動作していることが確定しているわけでは無いようにすることができる。   In addition, as a control method related to the effect, in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a re-pushing instruction may be issued before the opening / closing member 340 returns. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, when the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state, only the posture is maintained, and the player ignores the first operation instruction. The pair of opening / closing members 340 is in the second position state. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even if the second push instruction is issued. .

これにより、操作部材310を押し込み操作する際の遊技者の緊張感を高めることができると共に、1回目の操作指示は期待度が低いと決め付けて無視し、期待度が高いと考えられる2回目の操作指示に対してだけ押し込み操作するような操作方法に対して、独特の動作態様を形成することができる。以下、このことについて説明する。   As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension when pushing the operating member 310, and at the same time, the first operation instruction is determined to have a low expectation level and is ignored, and the second time is expected to have a high expectation level. A unique mode of operation can be formed for an operation method in which a push-in operation is performed only in response to the operation instruction. This will be described below.

図24(a)及び図24(b)は、開閉部材340のモデル図である。なお、図24(a)では、開閉部材340が第1動作パターンで動作可能となるように本体円環部410が動作する場合の開閉部材340の動作パターンが、図24(a)では、開閉部材340が第5動作パターン(又は第7動作パターン)で動作可能となるように本体円環部410が動作する場合の開閉部材340の動作パターンが、それぞれ時系列で図示される。また、図24(a)に示す第1動作パターンでは、2回目の操作指示が生じる態様で演出制御される。また、図24(a)及び図24(b)では、1回目の操作指示を遊技者が無視して、操作部材310を押し込み操作しない場合が図示される。   24A and 24B are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. FIG. In FIG. 24A, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is shown in FIG. The operation patterns of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the member 340 can operate in the fifth operation pattern (or the seventh operation pattern) are illustrated in time series. In addition, in the first operation pattern shown in FIG. 24A, the effect control is performed in such a manner that a second operation instruction is generated. 24A and 24B illustrate a case where the player ignores the first operation instruction and does not push the operation member 310.

図24(a)及び図24(b)に示すように、1回目の操作指示を無視して2回目の操作指示にのみ従うと、本体円環部410の姿勢変化の態様は開閉部材340が行う予定の動作パターンに対応して異なっているにも関わらず、開閉部材340の動作態様が同じになるので、遊技者は、開閉部材340がいずれの動作パターンで回転動作しているのか判断することができず、開閉部材340の動作態様から大当たり期待度を読み取ることができなくなる。   As shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, when the first operation instruction is ignored and only the second operation instruction is followed, the opening / closing member 340 changes the posture of the main body ring portion 410. Although the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is the same regardless of the operation pattern to be performed, the player determines in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is rotating. It is impossible to read the jackpot expectation degree from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340.

そのため、開閉部材340を複数の動作パターンで動作可能とする本体円環部410と、開閉部材340の回転動作の契機となる操作部材310の操作指示を入れるタイミング(時期および回数)とを組み合わせた演出を行うことにより、遊技者が操作部材310の操作指示の一部を無視して残りの一部の操作指示にのみ従い操作部材310を操作する場合に、開閉部材340が、どの動作パターンで動作しているのかを把握できなくすることで、遊技者の想像力をかき立てる演出を行うことができる。これにより、操作手段310の操作は行いたいが、操作手段310の状態から大当たり期待度は把握したくないという遊技者からの要求(所謂、「一発告知」を好む要求)を満足させることができる。   Therefore, the main body ring portion 410 that enables the opening / closing member 340 to operate in a plurality of operation patterns is combined with the timing (time and number of times) at which an operation instruction for the operation member 310 that triggers the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is input. When the player ignores a part of the operation instructions of the operation member 310 and operates the operation member 310 only according to the remaining part of the operation instructions by performing the production, in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is operated. By making it impossible to grasp whether it is operating, it is possible to produce an effect that stirs up the player's imagination. Thus, it is possible to satisfy a request from a player who wants to operate the operation unit 310 but does not want to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot from the state of the operation unit 310 (a request to prefer a so-called “one-shot notification”). it can.

また、例えば、操作指示が無いタイミングで操作部材310を押すことにより、予期していた動作パターンが崩れ、開閉部材340の動作態様から大当たり期待度を読み取ることができなくなる恐れが生じるように本体円環部410を構成することにより、遊技者が操作指示の無いタイミングで操作部材310を操作することを抑制することができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材310を不要なタイミングで連打操作することを防止することができ、操作デバイス300の耐久性を向上させることができる。以下、そのことについて、図25を参照して説明する。   Further, for example, when the operation member 310 is pushed at a timing when there is no operation instruction, the expected operation pattern is destroyed, and the big hit expectation degree may not be read from the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. By configuring the ring portion 410, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the operation member 310 at a timing when there is no operation instruction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation member 310 at unnecessary timing, and the durability of the operation device 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

図25は、開閉部材340のモデル図である。なお、図25では、開閉部材340が第1動作パターンで動作可能となるように本体円環部410が動作する場合の開閉部材340の動作パターンが時系列で図示される。また、図25では、1回目の操作指示が生じる前に、遊技者が不要な操作を行った場合が図示される。   FIG. 25 is a model diagram of the opening / closing member 340. In FIG. 25, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is illustrated in time series. FIG. 25 illustrates a case where the player performs an unnecessary operation before the first operation instruction is generated.

図25に示すように、本実施形態における本体円環部410の構造上、開閉部材340の第1動作パターンを形成するために本体円環部410を初期状態から第2演出状態まで姿勢変化させる途中で、第1演出状態を経由する場合がある。   As shown in FIG. 25, due to the structure of the main body ring portion 410 in this embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 410 is changed from the initial state to the second effect state in order to form the first operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340. On the way, there is a case of going through the first effect state.

本体円環部410が第1演出状態とされた時に操作部材310が不要にも押し込み操作されると、開閉部材340aが回転動作する。その後、本体円環部410が第2演出状態となり、第3図柄表示装置81等により押し込み指示がされ、遊技者がそれに従い押し込み操作すると、一対の開閉部材340が回転動作する。   If the operation member 310 is pushed unnecessarily when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state, the opening / closing member 340a rotates. Thereafter, the main body ring portion 410 enters the second effect state, and when a push-in instruction is given by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the player pushes in accordingly, the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate.

この動作態様は、図23(a)で上述した第5動作パターンと同様の動作順序となるが、本体円環部410は、あくまで開閉部材340を第1動作パターンで動作可能とする態様で動作制御されているので、開閉部材340の動作により読み取ることができる大当たり期待度は、第1動作パターンに対応した大当たり期待度である。   This operation mode is the same operation sequence as the fifth operation pattern described above with reference to FIG. 23A, but the main body annular portion 410 operates in a mode that allows the opening / closing member 340 to operate according to the first operation pattern. Since it is controlled, the jackpot expectation that can be read by the operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first operation pattern.

従って、押し込み指示が無いタイミングにおける不要な押し込み操作が生じたことにより、演出で表現される大当たり期待度と、実際に遊技者が認識する大当たり期待度との間に差異を生じさせることができる。   Therefore, the occurrence of an unnecessary pushing operation at a timing when there is no pushing instruction can cause a difference between the jackpot expectation expressed in the performance and the jackpot expectation actually recognized by the player.

これにより、遊技者が不要な押し込み操作をすることで、大当たり期待度を正しく知ることができなくなるようにすることができ、遊技者の不要な押し込み操作(例えば、連打操作)を抑制することができる。これにより、操作デバイス300の耐久性を向上させることができる。   Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot expectation correctly by performing an unnecessary push-in operation, and to suppress the player's unnecessary push-in operation (for example, repeated hitting operation). it can. Thereby, durability of the operation device 300 can be improved.

次いで、図26及び図27を参照して、本体円環部410が第4演出状態とされる場合において、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作した後の状態について説明する。図26は、操作デバイス300の上面図であり、図27は、図26のXXVII−XXVII線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。   Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, a state after the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the fourth effect state will be described. 26 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG.

なお、図26では、理解を容易とするために、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略され、図27では、押し込み操作される前の操作部材310及び開閉部材340が想像線で図示される。   In FIG. 26, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 before being pushed in are imagined. Illustrated with lines.

また、図26に示すように、本体円環部410の中心を通り一対の開閉部材340の中心同士を結ぶ直線(図26上下方向に延びる線)が第3面423を通るように、本体円環部410が姿勢決めされている。即ち、図26では、図12に示す状態から本体円環部410が上面視時計回りに約110度回転した状態が図示されている。   Also, as shown in FIG. 26, the main body circle is such that a straight line (line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 26) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes through the third surface 423. The ring portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 26 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated about 110 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

図27に示すように、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、凸設部312に当接され押し込まれることにより、クラッチ部材330が下降動作する。これにより、クラッチ部材330の円環凹部333aと、開閉部材340の係合爪343との係合は解除され、一対の開閉部材340が互いに離反する方向へ回転動作する。調整腕部345が調整段部420の第3面423に当接する姿勢で開閉部材340の回転は停止する。   As shown in FIG. 27, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops with the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420.

開閉部材340は、回転後の状態において、操作部材310の内面と当接する。そのため、操作部材310は開閉部材340から負荷を受けることになり、本実施形態では、その負荷により操作部材310の上下動作が停止するように、スプリングSP1の弾性係数が選定される。従って、図27に示す状態において、操作部材310が上昇せずに維持される。   The opening / closing member 340 comes into contact with the inner surface of the operation member 310 in the rotated state. Therefore, the operating member 310 receives a load from the opening / closing member 340, and in this embodiment, the elastic coefficient of the spring SP1 is selected so that the vertical movement of the operating member 310 is stopped by the load. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised.

これにより、例えば、操作部材310が上昇せずに維持される状態を、大当たり期待度が大きい状態として駆動モータ490を制御することにより、操作部材310の操作に対する遊技者の興味を向上させることができる。   Thereby, for example, the player's interest in the operation of the operation member 310 can be improved by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the state in which the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised is a state in which the degree of big hit expectation is high. it can.

例えば、遊技者が操作部材310を連打している場合、遊技者はスプリングSP1の弾性力により上昇動作する操作部材310に押し込み負荷をかけているところ、そこに突然図27に示す第4演出状態を挿入することにより、操作部材310を介して遊技者に与えられる上方向の負荷を減少させることができ、遊技者に違和感を与えることができる。遊技者に違和感を与えることにより、その原因(対象)である操作デバイス300に対する注目力を向上させることができる。   For example, when the player is hitting the operation member 310 repeatedly, the player is pushing and applying a load to the operation member 310 that is moved upward by the elastic force of the spring SP1, and suddenly the fourth effect state shown in FIG. By inserting, the upward load applied to the player through the operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can feel uncomfortable. By giving the player a sense of incongruity, attention to the operation device 300 that is the cause (target) can be improved.

また、違和感を与えた状態において、開閉部材340が第2位置状態に変化しているので、違和感を与えられたら、操作部材310の奥側の開閉部材340の状態を視認して、大当たり期待度を把握するという新たな遊技の態様を、遊技者に提供することができる。   In addition, since the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the second position state in the state of giving a sense of incongruity, if the feeling of incongruity is given, the state of the opening / closing member 340 on the back side of the operation member 310 is visually recognized, and the big hit expectation It is possible to provide the player with a new game mode of grasping the game.

なお、第4演出状態において、操作部材310を押し込み動作することで一対の開閉部材340が回転動作することは第2演出状態と変わらないが、本実施形態では、その違いが遊技者にとって判別し難い態様(第2演出状態における開閉部材340の回転角度と、第4演出状態における開閉部材340の回転角度が近似している態様、図14及び図26参照)から形成される。   In the fourth effect state, the operation of pushing the operation member 310 to rotate the pair of opening / closing members 340 is not different from the second effect state, but in the present embodiment, the difference is determined for the player. It is formed from a difficult mode (a mode in which the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the second effect state is similar to the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the fourth effect state, see FIGS. 14 and 26).

これにより、操作部材310から遊技者が手を離し、操作部材310が上昇動作するか否かにより第2演出状態か第4演出状態かを把握することができるという遊技性を構成することができる。従って、操作部材310を押し込むタイミングだけでなく、操作部材310から手を離すタイミングにおいても、操作デバイス300への注目力を維持することができる。   Accordingly, it is possible to configure a game property in which the player can release his hand from the operation member 310 and can recognize whether the operation state is the second effect state or the fourth effect state depending on whether the operation member 310 is raised. . Therefore, attention to the operation device 300 can be maintained not only when the operation member 310 is pushed in but also when the hand is released from the operation member 310.

図26及び図27に示す状態から、本体円環部410を上面視時計回りに回転させることにより(図10において、本体円環部410を開閉部材340に対して左方へ移動させることにより)、調整腕部345を調整段部420の第1面421まで到達させることができ、開閉部材340を第1位置状態に復帰させることができる。開閉部材340が復帰動作することにより、開閉部材340から操作部材310へ与えられる負荷が解除され、操作部材310を初期位置(図27において想像線で図示)へ復帰させることができる。なお、本実施形態では、図10で上述したように、切断線θL1から切断線θL2までの調整段部420の形状と、切断線θL3から切断線θL0までの調整段部420の形状とが同一に形成されるので、一対の開閉部材340が同様の動作態様で復帰する。   26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (in FIG. 10, the main body ring portion 410 is moved to the left with respect to the opening / closing member 340). The adjustment arm 345 can reach the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position. When the opening / closing member 340 returns, the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 to the operation member 310 is released, and the operation member 310 can be returned to the initial position (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 27). In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 10, the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 is the same as the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0. Therefore, the pair of opening / closing members 340 return in the same operation mode.

なお、本実施形態では、図26及び図27に示す状態から、本体円環部410を上面視反時計回りに回転することは、禁止されるように制御される。これにより、図10に示すように、第3面423の左側(本体円環部410の上面視時計回り側)の連結面が鉛直方向に沿って形成されていても、その連結面との係合により調整腕部345が破損することを防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is controlled to be prohibited from rotating counterclockwise as viewed from above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, even if the connecting surface on the left side of the third surface 423 (clockwise in the top view of the main body ring portion 410) is formed along the vertical direction, It is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being damaged.

なお、本実施形態では、操作部材310の変位を検出する検出センサ(図示せず)が外壁部材301の内周の内側であって、操作部材310の外周の外側の領域に配設される。操作部材310の内側延設部315よりも下方から操作部材310の径方向外方へ突出される部分(図示せず)が検出センサの検出溝に挿通されることで、操作部材310の変位が検出され、遊技者による操作があったと判定される。   In the present embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the displacement of the operation member 310 is disposed inside the outer periphery of the outer wall member 301 and outside the outer periphery of the operation member 310. A portion (not shown) that protrudes radially outward of the operating member 310 from below the inner extending portion 315 of the operating member 310 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor, so that the displacement of the operating member 310 is reduced. It is detected and it is determined that there is an operation by the player.

次いで、図28から図33を参照して、第2実施形態について説明する。第1実施形態では、操作デバイス300が一対の開閉部材340を備える場合について説明したが、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300は、開閉部材2340を2対(4個)備え、それらが、第2位置状態から第1位置状態へ順番に変位する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the operation device 300 includes a pair of opening / closing members 340. However, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment includes two pairs (four) of opening / closing members 2340, which are the second It shifts in order from the position state to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図28は、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300の正面斜視図であり、図29は、土台部材2320、クラッチ部材330、開閉部材2340及び切替装置2400の分解斜視図である。なお、図28では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。   FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 2320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 2340, and the switching device 2400. In FIG. 28, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

土台部材2320は、第1実施形態の土台部材320に、一対の軸部323が追加される態様から形成される。即ち、凹設部322の四方(前後左右)に、等間隔に軸部323が配設される。   The base member 2320 is formed from a mode in which a pair of shaft portions 323 is added to the base member 320 of the first embodiment. That is, the shaft portions 323 are arranged at equal intervals on four sides (front and rear, left and right) of the recessed portion 322.

開閉部材2340は、第1実施形態の開閉部材340に、一対の開閉部材340が追加される態様から形成される。本実施形態では、便宜上、切替装置2400の駆動モータ490側に配置される部材から、上面視時計回りに、順に、第1開閉部材2340a、第2開閉部材2340b、第3開閉部材2340c、第4開閉部材2340dとする。   The opening / closing member 2340 is formed from a mode in which a pair of opening / closing members 340 is added to the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the first opening / closing member 2340a, the second opening / closing member 2340b, the third opening / closing member 2340c, the fourth, in order from the member arranged on the drive motor 490 side of the switching device 2400, clockwise from the top. The opening / closing member 2340d is used.

切替装置2400は、調整段部2420が、最も高い高段h0とされる第1面2421と、その第1面2421よりも一段低い中段h1とされる第2面2422と、それら各面の周方向端部同士を連結する各連結面とのみから形成され、第1実施形態の調整段部420と各面の切替間隔が違っている。以下、このことについて、図30を参照して説明する。   In the switching device 2400, the adjustment step portion 2420 has a first surface 2421 in which the highest step h0 is the highest, a second surface 2422 in which the adjustment step portion 2420 is an intermediate step h1 that is one step lower than the first surface 2421, and the circumference of each of these surfaces. It is formed only from each connecting surface that connects the direction end portions, and the switching interval between each surface is different from that of the adjustment stepped portion 420 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

図30は、操作デバイス2300の上面図である。なお、図30では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図30では、全ての開閉部材2340の調整腕部345が第1面2421と対向する本体円環部2410の初期状態(指示待ち状態)が図示される。また、図30では、理解を容易とするために、調整段部2420の高さの変化を示す模式図が想像線で円環状に図示される。   FIG. 30 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 30, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. FIG. 30 illustrates an initial state (waiting for instructions) of the main body ring portion 2410 in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the first surface 2421. Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

その模式図では、調整段部2420の側面図が模式的に円環状に図示される。中心(当接部332の位置)に近いほど、段が高いことを意味する。   In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

図30に示すように、調整段部2420の第1面2421は、唯一左右幅の短い(本実施形態において中心角度約6度分)幅短面2421aと、その幅短面2421aを基準として上面視時計回りに順に配置される第1幅長面2421b、第2幅長面2421c、第3幅長面2421dと、を主に備える。なお、幅短面2421aは、初期状態において、対向する開閉部材2340(図30における第1開閉部材2340a)の中心と、幅長さの中心とが一致する態様となる。   As shown in FIG. 30, the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 has only a short surface 2421a having a short left-right width (in this embodiment, a center angle of about 6 degrees), and an upper surface based on the short surface 2421a. It mainly includes a first width-long surface 2421b, a second width-long surface 2421c, and a third width-long surface 2421d that are sequentially arranged in a clockwise direction. Note that, in the initial state, the width short surface 2421a has a mode in which the center of the opposing opening / closing member 2340 (first opening / closing member 2340a in FIG. 30) coincides with the center of the width length.

第1幅長面2421b、第2幅長面2421c及び第3幅長面2421dは、それぞれ中心角度約50度の幅で形成される面であり、初期状態において、対向する開閉部材2340との位置関係が異なる。   The first width-long surface 2421b, the second width-long surface 2421c, and the third width-long surface 2421d are surfaces formed with a width of a center angle of about 50 degrees, respectively, and in the initial state, the positions with the opposing opening / closing member 2340 The relationship is different.

即ち、第1幅長面2421bと対向配置される開閉部材2340(図30における第2開閉部材2340b)は、第1幅長面2421bの幅長さを均等な均等幅Hfで分ける第1幅長面2421bの中心から、上面視時計回りに第1ずれ角度θ21だけずれた位置に配置される。なお、本実施形態では、第1ずれ角度θ21が、約11度とされる(θ21=11度)。   That is, the opening / closing member 2340 (the second opening / closing member 2340b in FIG. 30) arranged to face the first width-long surface 2421b has a first width length that divides the width of the first width-long surface 2421b by an equal uniform width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421b by the first shift angle θ21 in the clockwise direction when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

また、第2幅長面2421cと対向配置される開閉部材2340(図30における第3開閉部材2340c)は、第2幅長面2421cの幅長さを均等な均等幅Hfで分ける第2幅長面2421cの中心位置と同等の位置に配置される。   In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the third opening / closing member 2340c in FIG. 30) disposed to face the second width-long surface 2421c is a second width length that divides the width length of the second width-long surface 2421c by an equal uniform width Hf. It is disposed at a position equivalent to the center position of the surface 2421c.

また、第3幅長面2421dと対向配置される開閉部材2340(図30における第4開閉部材2340d)は、第3幅長面2421dの幅長さを均等な均等幅Hfで分ける第3幅長面2421dの中心から、上面視反時計回りに第1ずれ角度θ21だけずれた位置に配置される。なお、本実施形態では、第1ずれ角度θ21が、約11度とされる(θ21=11度)。   In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the fourth opening / closing member 2340d in FIG. 30) disposed to face the third width long surface 2421d is a third width length that divides the width of the third width long surface 2421d by the uniform equal width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421d by the first shift angle θ21 counterclockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

第1面2421を形成する各面2421a〜2421dが上述したように、円を4等分する線(各開閉部材2340)に対して、異なった態様で配置されることにより、各開閉部材2340の開閉の態様を異ならせることができる。以下、このことについて説明する。   As described above, each of the surfaces 2421a to 2421d forming the first surface 2421 is arranged in a different manner with respect to a line (each opening and closing member 2340) that divides the circle into four equal parts. The mode of opening and closing can be varied. This will be described below.

図31は、操作デバイス2300の上面図である。なお、図31では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図31では、全ての開閉部材2340の調整腕部345が第2面2422と対向される姿勢が図示され、その状態において全ての開閉部材2340が第2位置状態とされた様子が図示される。また、図30では、理解を容易とするために、調整段部2420の高さの変化を示す模式図が想像線で円環状に図示される。   FIG. 31 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 31, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. Further, FIG. 31 illustrates a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the second surface 2422, and illustrates a state in which all the opening / closing members 2340 are in the second position state. The Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

その模式図では、調整段部2420の側面図が模式的に円環状に図示される。中心(当接部332の位置)に近いほど、段が高いことを意味する。   In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

図31では、図30に示す本体円環部2410の初期状態から、本体円環部2410が、上面視反時計回りに45度回転した状態(姿勢A)が図示される。なお、本実施形態では、図31に示す姿勢Aにおいて、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dと第2面2422との位置関係がそれぞれ異なる。   FIG. 31 illustrates a state (posture A) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above, from the initial state of the main body ring portion 2410 illustrated in FIG. 30. In the present embodiment, in the posture A shown in FIG. 31, the positional relationship between the open / close members 2340a to 2340d and the second surface 2422 is different.

即ち、図31に示すように、第1開閉部材2340aは、幅短面2421aの端から上面視時計回りに角度J24だけ角度ずれした位置(第1幅長面2421bの端から上面視反時計回りに角度J21だけ角度ずれした位置)で第2面2422と対向配置される。   That is, as shown in FIG. 31, the first opening / closing member 2340a is shifted from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (counterclockwise when viewed from the end of the first long surface 2421b). At a position shifted by an angle J21) from the second surface 2422.

また、第2開閉部材2340bは、第1幅長面2421bの端から上面視時計回りに角度J23だけ角度ずれした位置(第2幅長面2421cの端から上面視反時計回りに角度J22だけ角度ずれした位置)で第2面2422と対向配置される。   Further, the second opening / closing member 2340b is shifted by an angle J23 from the end of the first width-long surface 2421b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (angle J22 from the end of the second width-long surface 2421c counterclockwise as viewed from the top). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

また、第3開閉部材2340cは、第2幅長面2421cの端から上面視時計回りに角度J22だけ角度ずれした位置(第3幅長面2421dの端から上面視反時計回りに角度J23だけ角度ずれした位置)で第2面2422と対向配置される。   Further, the third opening / closing member 2340c is shifted from the end of the second width long surface 2421c by an angle J22 clockwise as viewed from above (angle from the end of the third width long surface 2421d by angle J23 counterclockwise as viewed from above). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

また、第4開閉部材2340dは、第3幅長面2421dの端から上面視時計回りに角度J21だけ角度ずれした位置(幅短面2421aの端から上面視反時計回りに角度J24だけ角度ずれした位置)で第2面2422と対向配置される。   Further, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is shifted by an angle J21 clockwise from the end of the third width long surface 2421d (viewed from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 counterclockwise from the top). The second surface 2422 is disposed at a position).

なお、本実施形態では、角度J21が9度、角度J22が20度、角度J23が31度、角度J24が42度で設定される(角度J21<角度J22<角度J23<角度J24、(角度J22−角度J21)=(角度J23−角度J22)=(角度J24−角度J23)=11度)。   In this embodiment, the angle J21 is set to 9 degrees, the angle J22 is set to 20 degrees, the angle J23 is set to 31 degrees, and the angle J24 is set to 42 degrees (angle J21 <angle J22 <angle J23 <angle J24, (angle J22 -Angle J21) = (Angle J23-Angle J22) = (Angle J24-Angle J23) = 11 degrees).

従って、図31に示す状態から、本体円環部2410を回転させることにより、各開閉部材2340の調整腕部345が調整段部2420の第1面2421まで持ち上げられ、第1位置状態となる(図30参照)までの期間が、各開閉部材2340で異なる。このことについて、図31に示す状態から、本体円環部2410が上面視時計回りに45度回転する場合と、本体円環部2410が上面視反時計回りに45度回転する場合とに分けて、以下で説明する。   Therefore, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 from the state shown in FIG. 31, the adjustment arm portion 345 of each opening / closing member 2340 is lifted to the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 to be in the first position state ( The period until (see FIG. 30) is different for each opening / closing member 2340. In this regard, the state shown in FIG. 31 is divided into a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees clockwise when viewed from above and a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. This will be described below.

図32(a)は、各開閉部材2340の状態の計時変化を示した図である。なお、図32(a)では、図31に示した状態(姿勢A)から本体円環部2410を上面視反時計回りに回転させた場合の各開閉部材2340の姿勢の計時変化が、下段の線を開閉部材2340の第2位置状態(図32(a)で「倒」と図示される)とし、上段の線を開閉部材2340の第1位置状態(図32(a)で「起」と図示される)として示す4個の折れ線グラフとして図示される。   FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 32 (a), the time change of the posture of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state (posture A) shown in FIG. The line is set to the second position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (shown as “inverted” in FIG. 32A), and the upper line is set to the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (“rise” in FIG. 32A). It is shown as four line graphs shown as).

図32(a)では、上から順に、第1開閉部材2340a〜第4開閉部材2340dの姿勢変化の態様が図示されると共に、各グラフの横軸が切替装置2400の動作開始からの時間を示す時間軸として図示され、切替装置2400を秒速10度で回転駆動する場合の数値が記載される。また、理解を容易とするために、各グラフの付近に、対象となる第1開閉部材2340a〜第4開閉部材2340dが図示される。   In FIG. 32A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340 a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340 d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. It is shown as a time axis, and a numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

図32(a)に示した通り、本体円環部2410が上面視反時計回りに回転開始すると、開始から0.9秒後に回転角度が9度(角度J21)になったところで第1開閉部材2340aが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から2.0秒経過)し回転角度が20度(角度J22)となったところで第2開閉部材2340bが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から3.1秒経過)し回転角度が31度(角度J23)となったところで第3開閉部材2340cが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から4.2秒経過)し回転角度が42度(角度J24)となったところで第4開閉部材2340dが第1位置状態とされる。   As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from above, the first opening / closing member is turned when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. 2340a is in the first position state, and when the second opening / closing member 2340b is in the first position state after 1.1 seconds (2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle reaches 20 degrees (angle J22). Then, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has reached 31 degrees (angle J23), the third opening / closing member 2340c is brought into the first position state, and further 1.1 seconds. After a lapse of time (4.2 seconds from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle becomes 42 degrees (angle J24), the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is brought into the first position state.

即ち、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dが、第1開閉部材2340aから上面視時計回りに順に起き上がる態様で動作する。また、その動作タイミングは、本体円環部2410が11度((角度J22−角度J21)=(角度J23−角度J22)=(角度J24−角度J23)=11度)回転するごとに生じるので、本体円環部2410を等速回転動作させることにより、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dの動作タイミングを等間隔にすることができる。   That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the first opening / closing member 2340a in a clockwise direction as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

図33(a)は、各開閉部材2340の状態の計時変化を示した図である。なお、図33(a)では、図31に示した状態(姿勢A)から本体円環部2410を上面視時計回りに回転させた場合の各開閉部材2340の計時変化が、下段の線を開閉部材2340の第2位置状態(図33(a)で「倒」と図示される)とし、上段の線を開閉部材2340の第1位置状態(図33(a)で「起」と図示される)として示す4個の折れ線グラフとして図示される。   FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 33A, the change in time of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (posture A) opens and closes the lower line. The member 2340 is in the second position state (shown as “falling” in FIG. 33A), and the upper line is shown in the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (in FIG. 33A, “starting”). ) As four line graphs.

また、図33(a)では、上から順に、第1開閉部材2340a〜第4開閉部材2340dの姿勢変化の態様が図示されると共に、各グラフの横軸が切替装置2400の動作開始からの時間を示す時間軸として図示され、切替装置2400を秒速10度で回転駆動する場合の数値が記載される。また、理解を容易とするために、各グラフの付近に、対象となる第1開閉部材2340a〜第4開閉部材2340dが図示される。   In FIG. 33A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. A numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

図33(a)に示した通り、本体円環部2410が上面視時計回りに回転開始すると、開始から0.9秒後に回転角度が9度(角度J21)になったところで第4開閉部材2340dが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から2.0秒経過)し回転角度が20度(角度J22)となったところで第3開閉部材2340cが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から3.1秒経過)し回転角度が31度(角度J23)となったところで第2開閉部材2340bが第1位置状態とされ、更に1.1秒経過(回転開始から4.2秒経過)し回転角度が42度(角度J24)となったところで第1開閉部材2340aが第1位置状態とされる。   As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d becomes a position when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. Is in the first position state, and when 1.1 seconds have passed (2.0 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 20 degrees (angle J22), the third opening / closing member 2340c is placed in the first position state. Furthermore, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 31 degrees (angle J23), the second opening / closing member 2340b is set to the first position state, and 1.1 seconds have passed. The first opening / closing member 2340a is set to the first position when the rotation angle reaches 42 degrees (angle J24) after 4.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation.

即ち、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dが、第4開閉部材2340dから上面視反時計回りに順に起き上がる態様で動作する。また、その動作タイミングは、本体円環部2410が11度((角度J22−角度J21)=(角度J23−角度J22)=(角度J24−角度J23)=11度)回転するごとに生じるので、本体円環部2410を等速回転動作させることにより、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dの動作タイミングを等間隔にすることができる。   That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the fourth opening / closing member 2340d counterclockwise as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

本実施形態では、図32(a)及び図33(a)で各開閉部材2340の動作順序が上面視で逆となる一例を示した通り、本体円環部2410の動作態様を変化させることにより、各開閉部材2340の動作態様を変化させることができる。   In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A, by changing the operation mode of the main body ring portion 2410 as shown in the example in which the operation order of the opening and closing members 2340 is reversed in top view. The operation mode of each opening / closing member 2340 can be changed.

本実施形態では、一例として、幅短面2421aと第1開閉部材2340aとが対向する位置関係から、本体円環部2410を上面視反時計回りに45度回転させた状態で開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とし、その状態からの第1位置状態への復帰を説明したが、開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とできる本体円環部2410の姿勢はこれに限るものではなく、少なくとも、この姿勢(図31に示す姿勢)から本体円環部2410を上面視で90度ずつ回転させる姿勢(後述する姿勢B、姿勢C及び姿勢D)でも可能である。   In the present embodiment, as an example, the opening / closing member 2340 is moved in the state in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, based on the positional relationship between the short width surface 2421a and the first opening / closing member 2340a. Although the two-position state and the return to the first position state from the state have been described, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 that can set the opening / closing member 2340 to the second position state is not limited to this, and at least this posture A posture (posture B, posture C, and posture D, which will be described later) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated by 90 degrees in a top view from the posture shown in FIG. 31 is also possible.

そのため、開閉部材2340の動作タイミングの順序も、図32(a)及び図33(a)で説明したものに限られるものでは無く、例えば、第2開閉部材2340bが最初に第1位置状態へ復帰する態様や、第3開閉部材2340cが最初に第1状態へ復帰する態様など、様々な態様(少なくとも、別個の6通りの態様)を、本実施形態で形成可能となる。   Therefore, the order of the operation timing of the opening / closing member 2340 is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 32A and 33A. For example, the second opening / closing member 2340b first returns to the first position state. Various aspects (at least six different aspects) can be formed in the present embodiment, such as the aspect of the third opening / closing member 2340c first returning to the first state.

なお、各態様の変化は、図32(b)及び図33(b)に示す表関係で、構成を読み替えることで容易に理解できる。図32(b)及び図33(b)は、各開閉部材2340a〜2340dの構成の置き換え方を図示する表である。なお、図32(a)及び図33(b)では、本体円環部2410の停止姿勢に対応して図32(a)及び図33(b)を活用するための開閉部材2340の置き換え方が図示される。   In addition, the change of each aspect can be easily understood by rereading a structure by the table | surface relationship shown in FIG.32 (b) and FIG.33 (b). FIGS. 32B and 33B are tables illustrating how to replace the configuration of the open / close members 2340a to 2340d. 32 (a) and 33 (b), there is a way to replace the opening / closing member 2340 in order to utilize FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (b) corresponding to the stop posture of the main body ring portion 2410. Illustrated.

図32(b)及び図33(b)によれば、図31に示す状態から本体円環部2410を上面視時計回りに90度回転させた状態である姿勢Bで本体円環部2410を停止させた後、開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とした場合には、本体円環部2410を、例えば、上面視反時計回りに回転させることにより、図32(b)に示す表の左端の列の上から下へ記載される順に開閉部材2340が状態変化する(図32(a)に対応)一方、本体円環部2410を、例えば、上面視時計回りに回転させることにより、図33(b)に示す表の左端の列の下から上へ記載される順に、開閉部材2340が状態変化する(図33(a)に対応)。なお、図32(b)及び図33(b)では、第1開閉部材2340a〜第4開閉部材2340dが、a〜dと略して記載される。   32 (b) and 33 (b), the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture B in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position after the rotation, the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above, for example, so that the leftmost column in the table shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 2340 changes its state in the order described from the top to the bottom (corresponding to FIG. 32A). On the other hand, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 clockwise, for example, as viewed from above, FIG. The state of the opening / closing member 2340 changes in the order described from the bottom to the top of the leftmost column of the table (corresponding to FIG. 33A). In FIGS. 32B and 33B, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are abbreviated as a to d.

なお、図31に示す状態から本体円環部2410を上面視時計回りに180度回転させた状態である姿勢Cで本体円環部2410を停止させた後、開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とした場合には、図32(b)及び図33(b)に示す表の中心の列を対応させ、図31に示す状態から本体円環部2410を上面視時計回りに270度回転させた状態である姿勢Dで本体円環部2410を停止させた後、開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とした場合には、図32(b)及び図33(b)に示す表の右端の列を対応させることで、姿勢Aから切替装置2400を回転させる場合を図示した図32(a)及び図33(a)を、各姿勢B〜Dから切替装置2400を回転させる場合に容易に変換することができる。   In addition, after stopping the main body ring part 2410 in the posture C that is the state in which the main body ring part 2410 is rotated clockwise by 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31, the opening / closing member 2340 is set to the second position state. In this case, the center column of the table shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) is associated, and the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 270 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is brought into the second position state after the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture D, the rightmost columns in the tables shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) correspond. Thus, FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A illustrating the case where the switching device 2400 is rotated from the posture A can be easily converted when the switching device 2400 is rotated from each posture B to D. it can.

従って、本実施形態では、開閉部材2340を第2位置状態とする時の本体円環部2410の姿勢を少なくとも4通りから選択可能であり、また、第2位置状態となった開閉部材2340の第1位置状態への復帰の態様を、本体円環部2410を正逆どちらに回転させるかの2通りを選択可能であるので、少なくとも、8通りの態様から開閉部材2340の復帰態様を選択して制御することができる。   Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 when the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position state can be selected from at least four ways, and the opening / closing member 2340 in the second position state can be selected. Since the return mode to the 1-position state can be selected from two ways of rotating the main body ring portion 2410 forward or reverse, the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is selected from at least eight ways. Can be controlled.

これにより、例えば、開閉部材2340の復帰態様を大当たり期待度と対応させて制御する場合に、開閉部材2340の復帰動作について、大当たり期待度を8段階に分けて示すことができる。大当たり期待度は、遊技者にとって注目度の高い情報である。開閉部材2340の復帰動作は、操作デバイス2300の操作部材310(図5参照)を遊技者が操作した後に遊技者が視認可能な動作であるので、操作部材310を押し込んだ後における操作デバイス2300への注目力を向上させることができる。   Thereby, for example, when the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is controlled in correspondence with the jackpot expectation level, the jackpot expectation level can be shown in eight stages for the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340. The jackpot expectation is information that is highly noticeable to the player. Since the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340 is an operation that can be visually recognized by the player after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 5) of the operation device 2300, the operation device 2300 after the operation member 310 is pushed into the operation device 2300. You can improve your attention.

また、操作部材310に遊技者が手を乗せたままであると、その手が邪魔となり、開閉部材2340の動作態様を見難くなる構成(操作部材310の押し込み部分である上面が透光性材料から形成され、遊技者は、その上面を通して開閉部材2340を視認する構成)であることから、操作部材310の押し込み指示の後に、無意味に操作部材310を連打操作する遊技や、操作部材310の上に手を置いたままとする遊技がされることを、抑制することができる。従って、指示通りの適切な動作を行わせることができ、操作デバイス2300の耐久性を向上させることができる。   In addition, when the player keeps his / her hand on the operation member 310, the hand is in the way, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is difficult to see (the upper surface which is the push-in portion of the operation member 310 is made of a translucent material. And the player can visually recognize the opening / closing member 2340 through its upper surface). It is possible to suppress a game in which a hand is left on. Therefore, an appropriate operation as instructed can be performed, and the durability of the operation device 2300 can be improved.

次いで、図34から図46を参照して、第3実施形態について説明する。第1実施形態では、調整腕部345と調整段部420との間に隙間が空く場合には、操作部材310を押しさえすれば開閉部材340が回転動作する場合を説明したが、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、操作部材310の押し込みの態様により、開閉部材340が回転動作する場合と、回転動作しない場合とを形成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, in the case where there is a gap between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the operation member 310 is pressed has been described. The operation device 3300 according to the embodiment can form a case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates and a case where the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate depending on the manner in which the operation member 310 is pushed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図34は、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300の正面斜視図であり、図35は、土台部材320、クラッチ部材330、開閉部材340及び切替装置3400の分解斜視図であり、図36は、本体円環部3410及び調整段部3420の上面図である。なお、図34では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。   FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 3400, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a top view of an annular part 3410 and an adjustment step part 3420. In FIG. 34, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

切替装置3400は、土台部材320に回転可能に支持される本体円環部3410と、その本体円環部3410の上面に形成される調整段部3420と、本体円環部3410の周囲に亘って形成されるギア歯430と、そのギア歯430を介して本体円環部3410に伝達される駆動力を発生する駆動モータ490と、本体円環部3410に配設され動作可能に形成される第1動作装置3440と、その第1動作装置3440と同様に本体円環部3410に配設され第1動作装置3440の逆の態様で動作可能とされる第2動作装置3450と、を主に備える。   The switching device 3400 includes a main body ring part 3410 that is rotatably supported by the base member 320, an adjustment step part 3420 formed on the upper surface of the main body ring part 3410, and a periphery of the main body ring part 3410. Gear teeth 430 that are formed, a drive motor 490 that generates a driving force transmitted to the main body ring portion 3410 via the gear teeth 430, and a first ring that is disposed on the main body ring portion 3410 and is operatively formed. The first operating device 3440 and the second operating device 3450 that is disposed in the main body ring portion 3410 and can be operated in the reverse mode of the first operating device 3440 like the first operating device 3440 are mainly provided. .

本体円環部3410は、切断線θL0,θL2の上面視時計回り側に配設される一対の第1収容部3411と、その第1収容部3411から切断線θL0,θL2側に逆戻りした位置に配設される一対の第2収容部3412と、を主に備える。なお、一対の第1収容部3411同士、及び一対の第2収容部3412同士は、一対の開閉部材340と同様に、本体円環部3410の中心軸を挟んで正反対の位置(180度角度ずれした位置)に配置される。   The main body ring portion 3410 is a pair of first housing portions 3411 disposed on the cutting line θL0, θL2 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top, and a position back from the first housing portion 3411 to the cutting lines θL0, θL2 side. It mainly includes a pair of second accommodating portions 3412 to be disposed. It should be noted that the pair of first housing parts 3411 and the pair of second housing parts 3412 are located at opposite positions (180 ° angular deviation) across the central axis of the main body ring part 3410, like the pair of opening / closing members 340. Arranged).

また、本体円環部3410及び調整段部3420の形状は、第1収容部3411及び第2収容部3412を除いて、第1実施形態における本体円環部410及び調整段部420の形状と略同等の形状とされる。   The shapes of the main body ring portion 3410 and the adjustment step portion 3420 are substantially the same as the shapes of the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 in the first embodiment except for the first storage portion 3411 and the second storage portion 3412. The shape is equivalent.

第1収容部3411は、開閉部材340の調整腕部345と対向可能に配置される第1動作装置3440を収容する部分であって、本体円環部3410の環状部分の幅の内側において上面から下方へ凹設される収容凹部3411aと、その収容凹部3411aから外径側に向けて上下に長い矩形状であって水平方向の長さが収容凹部3411aの外周長さよりも短い形状で貫通形成される連通孔3411bと、その連通孔3411bの側面に沿って本体円環部3410の外径方向に延設されると共に延設先端で連通孔3411bを囲う側に上面視L字形状に屈曲形成される延設壁部3411cと、その延設壁部3411cから延設壁部3411cの屈曲方向に沿った方向に凸設される支持凸部3411dと、延設壁部3411cの屈曲側に蓋として配設される蓋部材3411eと、その蓋部材3411eを組み付けた状態において上面視で延設壁部3411cの延設方向と直交する両方向に凹設形成される一対の支持凹部3411fと、を主に備える。   The first accommodating portion 3411 is a portion that accommodates the first operating device 3440 that is disposed so as to be able to face the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and from the upper surface inside the width of the annular portion of the main body annular portion 3410. A receiving recess 3411a that is recessed downward, and a rectangular shape that is vertically long from the receiving recess 3411a toward the outer diameter side, and has a horizontal length shorter than the outer peripheral length of the receiving recess 3411a. The communication hole 3411b is extended in the outer diameter direction of the main body annular portion 3410 along the side surface of the communication hole 3411b, and is bent and formed in an L-shape when viewed from above on the side surrounding the communication hole 3411b at the extended tip. An extended wall portion 3411c, a support convex portion 3411d protruding from the extended wall portion 3411c in a direction along the bending direction of the extended wall portion 3411c, and a lid on the bent side of the extended wall portion 3411c. And a pair of support recesses 3411f formed to be recessed in both directions orthogonal to the extending direction of the extending wall portion 3411c in a top view when the cover member 3411e is assembled. Prepare mainly.

収容凹部3411aは、上面視において、本体円環部3410の中心軸を中心とした一対の円弧と、本体円環部3410の中心軸から放射上に延設される一対の直線とで囲まれる形状から形成される。これにより、本体円環部3410の幅長さの内側の限られた領域を有効活用して、収容凹部3411aの断面積を大きく確保することができるので、収容する対象である第1動作部材3440の断面積を大きくすることができ、耐久性を向上させることができる。   The housing recess 3411a has a shape surrounded by a pair of arcs around the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 and a pair of straight lines extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 in a top view. Formed from. Thereby, since the limited area inside the width of the main body ring portion 3410 can be effectively used to secure a large cross-sectional area of the housing recess 3411a, the first motion member 3440 that is the object to be housed can be secured. The cross-sectional area can be increased, and the durability can be improved.

収容凹部3411aは、上面視反時計回り側(第2収容部3412側)の側面に、上向きに傾斜する傾斜面3411a1を備える。本実施形態では、収容凹設3411aに開閉部材340の調整腕部345が収容された場合(図41参照)、その後、本体円環部3410が上面視時計回りに回転動作するように制御される。これにより、調整腕部345が傾斜面3411a1に沿って上昇動作し、開閉部材340を第1位置状態に復帰させることができる。   The housing recess 3411a includes an inclined surface 3411a1 that slopes upward on the side surface on the counterclockwise side when viewed from above (the second housing portion 3412 side). In the present embodiment, when the adjustment arm 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3411a (see FIG. 41), thereafter, the main body ring portion 3410 is controlled to rotate clockwise as viewed from above. . As a result, the adjustment arm 345 moves upward along the inclined surface 3411a1, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state.

なお、本実施形態では、本体円環部3410が初期位置から回転動作し、調整腕部345と第1収容部3411とが対向配置される姿勢に到達した後は、専ら、本体円環部3410を上面視時計回りに回転動作させ、初期位置に復帰させる態様で制御される。これにより、本体円環部3410が上面視反時計回りに回転動作し、調整腕部345が収容凹部3411aの傾斜面3411a1と対向配置される側面(鉛直方向に延びる面)に当接し、破損することを防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, after the main body ring portion 3410 rotates from the initial position and reaches the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 and the first housing portion 3411 are arranged to face each other, the main body ring portion 3410 is exclusively used. Is controlled to rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from above and return to the initial position. As a result, the main body ring portion 3410 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above, and the adjustment arm portion 345 comes into contact with and breaks the side surface (surface extending in the vertical direction) opposed to the inclined surface 3411a1 of the housing recess 3411a. This can be prevented.

第2収容部3412は、開閉部材340の調整腕部345と対向可能に配置される第2動作装置3450を収容する部分であって、第1収容部3411の収容凹部3411aと略同一の断面形状から形成される収容凹部3412aと、その収容凹部3412aに対して連通孔3411bと同様に貫通形成される連通孔3412bと、を主に備える。   The second accommodating portion 3412 is a portion that accommodates the second operating device 3450 that is disposed so as to face the adjusting arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the accommodating concave portion 3411 a of the first accommodating portion 3411. And a communication hole 3412b that is formed to penetrate the storage recess 3412a in the same manner as the communication hole 3411b.

第1動作装置3440は、第1収容部3411の支持凸部3411dに軸支される中間歯車3441と、その中間歯車3441に歯合されるギア歯3442aを有すると共に第1収容部3411の収容凹部3411aに本体部3442bが収容される係合部材3442と、支持凸部3411dを挟んで係合部材3442の反対側に配設され中間歯車3441に歯合されるギア歯3443aを有すると共に支持凹部3411fに収容される当接部材3443と、を主に備える。   The first operating device 3440 includes an intermediate gear 3441 that is pivotally supported by the support convex portion 3411d of the first housing portion 3411 and gear teeth 3442a that are meshed with the intermediate gear 3441, and a housing recess portion of the first housing portion 3411. 3411a has an engaging member 3442 in which the main body portion 3442b is accommodated and a gear tooth 3443a which is disposed on the opposite side of the engaging member 3442 with the support convex portion 3411d interposed therebetween and meshed with the intermediate gear 3441 and has a support recess 3411f. And a contact member 3443 housed in the main body.

係合部材3442は、上述したギア歯3442aと、本体部3442bと、それらを連結すると共に連通孔3411bに連通される連結部3442cと、を主に備える。ここで、収容凹部3411aに対する連通孔3411bの関係にならって、上面視において、係合部材3442の本体部3442bの外周長さ及び、ギア歯3442aの同方向の長さに比較して、連結部3442cの同方向の長さ(厚さ)が短くされる。   The engaging member 3442 mainly includes the gear teeth 3442a, the main body portion 3442b, and a connecting portion 3442c that connects the gear teeth 3442a and the communication hole 3411b. Here, in accordance with the relationship of the communication hole 3411b with respect to the housing recess 3411a, in comparison with the outer peripheral length of the main body portion 3442b of the engagement member 3442 and the length of the gear teeth 3442a in the same direction in the top view. The length (thickness) in the same direction of 3442c is shortened.

これにより、係合部材3442の本体部3442b及びギア歯3442aが、連通孔3411bを貫通することが防止されるので、連通孔3411bを基準として、係合部材3442を本体円環部3410の径方向に対して位置決めすることができる。   This prevents the main body portion 3442b and the gear teeth 3442a of the engagement member 3442 from penetrating the communication hole 3411b, so that the engagement member 3442 is positioned in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 with respect to the communication hole 3411b. Can be positioned.

当接部材3443は、ギア歯3443aを中間歯車3441に歯合させると共に、歯厚方向に延設される矩形部分が支持凹部3411fに内嵌されることで、当接部材3443を精度よく上下方向にスライド動作可能に配置することができる。   The contact member 3443 meshes the gear teeth 3443a with the intermediate gear 3441, and a rectangular portion extending in the tooth thickness direction is fitted in the support recess 3411f, so that the contact member 3443 is accurately moved in the vertical direction. It can be arranged to be slidable.

なお、係合部材3442と、当接部材3443とは、中間歯車3441を間に挟む位置関係で配置されるので、一方が上昇動作すると、他方が下降動作する関係となる。また、後述するように、当接部材3443が、操作部材310と当接可能な位置に配設される。また、係合部材3442の方が当接部材3443に比較して大重量で構成されることにより、操作部材310を操作していない初期状態において、係合部材3442が移動範囲の下端に配置され、当接部材3443が移動範囲の上端に配置される(図40参照)。   Note that the engaging member 3442 and the abutting member 3443 are arranged in a positional relationship with the intermediate gear 3441 interposed therebetween, so that when one moves up, the other moves down. Further, as will be described later, the contact member 3443 is disposed at a position where it can contact the operation member 310. Further, since the engaging member 3442 is configured to be heavier than the abutting member 3443, the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range in the initial state where the operating member 310 is not operated. The abutting member 3443 is disposed at the upper end of the moving range (see FIG. 40).

また、係合部材3442が移動範囲の上端に配置された状態において、係合部材3442の上面位置は、第1位置状態における開閉部材340の調整腕部345の下端位置と一致する態様で形成される。従って、係合部材3442の上面で調整腕部345を押し上げる場合、係合部材3442が移動範囲の上端まで移動することで開閉部材340が第1位置状態まで状態変化する。   Further, in a state where the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, the upper surface position of the engaging member 3442 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state. The Therefore, when the adjustment arm 345 is pushed up on the upper surface of the engagement member 3442, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the first position state by the engagement member 3442 moving to the upper end of the movement range.

第2動作装置3450は、第1動作部材3440の本体部3442bと略同形状に形成されると共に本体円環部3410の収容凹部3412aに収容される本体部3451と、その本体部3451の外周面に第1動作部材3440の連結部3442cと同様の態様で連接されると共に本体円環部3410の連通孔3411bに挿通される連結部3452と、その連結部3452を介して本体部3451の反対側に連接される部分であって本体円環部3410の径方向に沿って延設される当接部3453と、本体部3451の下方において本体円環部3410との間に配置されるスプリングSP31と、を主に備える。   The second motion device 3450 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 3442b of the first motion member 3440 and is housed in the housing recess 3412a of the main body ring portion 3410, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3451 Are connected in the same manner as the connecting portion 3442c of the first operating member 3440 and are connected to the connecting hole 3411b of the main body ring portion 3410, and the opposite side of the main body portion 3451 through the connecting portion 3452. A contact portion 3453 extending along the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 and a spring SP31 disposed between the main body ring portion 3410 below the main body portion 3451 Is mainly provided.

なお、当接部3453が、操作部材310と当接可能な位置に配設される。また、操作部材310により当接部3453が押し込まれていない状態において、本体部3451の上面は、第1位置状態における開閉部材340の調整腕部345の下端位置と一致する態様で形成される。   Note that the abutting portion 3453 is disposed at a position where it can abut on the operation member 310. Further, in a state where the abutting portion 3453 is not pushed in by the operation member 310, the upper surface of the main body portion 3451 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state.

また、本実施形態では、スプリングSP31が、ねじりバネNB1により回転動作する開閉部材340を第1位置状態まで押し戻すことが可能な程に大きな付勢力(弾性力)を発生するように、スプリングSP31及びねじりばねNB1のバネ係数が設定される。   In the present embodiment, the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 so as to generate an urging force (elastic force) large enough to push back the opening / closing member 340 to the first position. The spring coefficient of the torsion spring NB1 is set.

切替装置3400の作用について説明する。図37は、操作デバイス3300の上面図であり、図38は、図37のXXXVIII−XXXVIII線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図37では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。   The operation of the switching device 3400 will be described. 37 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 37, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

本実施形態では、本体円環部3410の初期状態において、一対の開閉部材340の調整腕部345が調整段部3420の第1面421と対向する姿勢に本体円環部3410が維持される。   In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410, the main body ring portion 3410 is maintained in a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of the pair of opening / closing members 340 face the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420.

図37及び図38では、本体円環部3410の初期状態から、調整段部3420の第2面422が開閉部材340の調整腕部345と対向する状態に至るまで本体円環部3410が回転された状態が図示される。   37 and 38, the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 until the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 3420 faces the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340. The state is shown.

図37及び図38に示す状態において、第1位置状態とされた開閉部材340の調整腕部345と調整段部3420との間に空間が空けられるので、操作部材310を押し込み操作することにより、開閉部材340が回転動作する。このとき、操作部材310の押し込み態様は制限されるものでは無く、クラッチ部材330が下降しさえすれば開閉部材340は回転動作する。   In the state shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, since a space is made between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state, by pushing the operation member 310, The opening / closing member 340 rotates. At this time, the pushing mode of the operation member 310 is not limited, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the clutch member 330 is lowered.

図39は、操作デバイス3300の上面図であり、図40、図41及び図42は、図39のXL−XL線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図39では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。   39 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 40, 41, and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the line XL-XL in FIG. In FIG. 39, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

図39から図42では、本体円環部3410の初期状態から、切替装置3400に収容される第1動作装置3440の周方向中心位置が開閉部材340の調整腕部345と対向する(調整腕部345の中心軸と上下方向で合致する)状態に至るまで本体円環部3410が回転された状態が図示される。   39 to 42, the center position in the circumferential direction of the first operating device 3440 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

また、図40では、操作部材310が押し込まれる前の状態が、図41では、操作部材310が弱く(クラッチ部材330を下降動作させる一方で操作部材310の下端が当接部材3443や第1収容部3411に当接することは無い程度)押し込まれた状態が、図42では、操作部材310が強く(移動可能幅の下端まで)押し込まれた状態が、それぞれ図示される。   In FIG. 40, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 41. The operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing. FIG. 42 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

図40に示すように、操作部材310を押し込む前の状態では、開閉部材340の調整腕部345と調整段部3420との間に空間が形成されているので、操作部材310を押し込み操作してクラッチ部材330を下降動作させることにより開閉部材340とクラッチ部材330との係合を解除すると、ねじりバネNB1(図35参照)の付勢力により開閉部材340が回転動作する。   As shown in FIG. 40, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340. When the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 is released by lowering the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35).

図41に示すように、操作部材310を弱く押す場合には、開閉部材340の回転動作後の姿勢が維持される。   As shown in FIG. 41, when the operation member 310 is pressed weakly, the posture of the opening / closing member 340 after the rotating operation is maintained.

一方、図42に示すように、操作部材310を強く押す場合、操作部材310の内側延設部315と当接部材3443とが当接し、当接部材3443が下降動作することと連動して、係合部材3442が上昇動作する。係合部材3442の上昇動作の過程で、係合部材3442の上面と調整腕部345とが当接し、開閉部材340が回転動作し、開閉部材340は第1位置状態に変化する。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, when the operation member 310 is strongly pressed, the inner extending portion 315 of the operation member 310 and the contact member 3443 come into contact with each other, and the contact member 3443 moves downward. The engaging member 3442 moves up. In the process of the ascending operation of the engaging member 3442, the upper surface of the engaging member 3442 and the adjustment arm 345 come into contact with each other, the opening / closing member 340 rotates, and the opening / closing member 340 changes to the first position state.

即ち、本体円環部3410を図39に示す姿勢とした場合、操作部材310を弱く押すか、強く押すかによって、その後の開閉部材340の動作態様を変化させることができる。この動作態様の変化を活用することにより、遊技者が適切な操作態様で操作部材310を操作し易くすることができる。   That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 39, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

例えば、操作部材310の押し込み操作により開閉部材340が回転動作すると大当たり期待度が高い、という演出を行う遊技機において、操作部材310を指示通りの押し方をすることで開閉部材340を回転動作させることができるという遊技性を追加することができる。   For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

即ち、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)などの表示装置に、「弱押し」と表示をすることで、遊技者に操作部材310の押し方を指示する演出方法が例示される。この場合、指示通りに操作部材310を弱く押せば、開閉部材340が回転動作し(図41参照)、指示に背いて操作部材310を強く押せば、開閉部材340の開閉動作は第1動作装置3440により抑制される(第1位置状態に戻る)。従って、大当たり期待度が高いか否かを知りたい遊技者に、操作部材310を弱く押させるように仕向けることができる。   That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “weakly pressed” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed weakly as instructed, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 41), and if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the first operating device. 3440 (returns to the first position state). Therefore, it is possible to direct a player who wants to know whether or not the expectation degree of jackpot is high to push the operation member 310 weakly.

図43は、操作デバイス3300の上面図であり、図44、図45及び図46は、図43のXLIV−XLIV線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図43では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。   43 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 44, 45, and 46 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 43, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

図43から図46では、本体円環部3410の初期状態から、切替装置3400に収容される第2動作装置3450の周方向中心位置が開閉部材340の調整腕部345と対向する(調整腕部345の中心軸と上下方向で合致する)状態に至るまで本体円環部3410が回転された状態が図示される。   43 to 46, the center position in the circumferential direction of the second motion device 3450 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

また、図44では、操作部材310が押し込まれる前の状態が、図45では、操作部材310が弱く(クラッチ部材330を下降動作させる一方で操作部材310の下端が当接部材3443や第1収容部3411に当接することは無い程度)押し込まれた状態が、図46では、操作部材310が強く(移動可能幅の下端まで)押し込まれた状態が、それぞれ図示される。   44, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 45, and the operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing). FIG. 46 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

図44に示すように、操作部材310を押し込む前の状態では、開閉部材340の調整腕部345と調整段部3420(第2動作装置3450の上面)とが当接しており、操作部材310を押し込み操作してクラッチ部材330を下降動作させることにより開閉部材340とクラッチ部材330との係合を解除し、ねじりバネNB1(図35参照)の付勢力により開閉部材340が回転動作しようとしても、操作部材310を弱く操作する限りにおいては、スプリングSP31の付勢力により開閉部材340が第1位置状態で維持される(図45参照)。   As shown in FIG. 44, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 3420 (the upper surface of the second operation device 3450) are in contact with each other. Even if the opening / closing member 340 is moved downward by the pushing operation to release the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 and the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35), As long as the operation member 310 is operated weakly, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by the biasing force of the spring SP31 (see FIG. 45).

一方、図46に示すように、操作部材310を強く押す場合、操作部材310の内側延設部315と当接部3453とが当接した後、スプリングSP31の付勢力に対向して遊技者の力が負荷されることで、当接部3453及び本体部3451が下降動作する。これにより、調整腕部345と当接部3453との間に隙間が形成され、その隙間を埋める態様で開閉部材340が回転動作する。なお、操作部材310に対する負荷を解除すると、スプリングSP31の付勢力で第2動作装置3450が上昇動作し、その第2動作装置3450の本体部3451に押し上げられる態様で開閉部材340が第1位置状態へと変化する。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the operation member 310 is pressed strongly, the inner extension portion 315 and the contact portion 3453 of the operation member 310 are in contact with each other, and then facing the biasing force of the spring SP31. When the force is applied, the abutting portion 3453 and the main body portion 3451 are moved downward. Thereby, a clearance gap is formed between the adjustment arm part 345 and the contact part 3453, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates in a manner to fill the clearance. When the load on the operation member 310 is released, the second operation device 3450 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring SP31, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the main body portion 3451 of the second operation device 3450 in the first position state. To change.

即ち、本体円環部3410を図43に示す姿勢とした場合、操作部材310を弱く押すか、強く押すかによって、その後の開閉部材340の動作態様を変化させることができる。この動作態様の変化を活用することにより、遊技者が適切な操作態様で操作部材310を操作し易くすることができる。   That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 43, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

例えば、操作部材310の押し込み操作により開閉部材340が回転動作すると大当たり期待度が高い、という演出を行う遊技機において、操作部材310を指示通りの押し方をすることで開閉部材340を回転動作させることができるという遊技性を追加することができる。   For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

即ち、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)などの表示装置に、「強押し」と表示をすることで、遊技者に操作部材310の押し方を指示する演出方法が例示される。この場合、指示通りに操作部材310を強く押せば、開閉部材340が回転動作し(図46参照)、指示に背いて操作部材310を弱く押せば、開閉部材340の開閉動作は第2動作装置3450により抑制される(第1位置状態に維持される)。従って、大当たり期待度が高いか否かを知りたい遊技者に、操作部材310を強く押させるように仕向けることができる。   That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “strong press” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly according to the instruction, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 46). If the operating member 310 is pressed weakly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is performed by the second operating device. 3450 is suppressed (maintained in the first position state). Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the jackpot expectation is high can be directed to push the operation member 310 strongly.

本実施形態では、上述したように、弱く押したら開閉部材340が回転動作する一方で強く押したら開閉部材340が回転動作しない状態と、弱く押したら開閉部材340が回転動作しない一方で強く押したら開閉部材340が回転動作する状態とを、本体円環部3410の姿勢を駆動モータ490で予め変化させておくことで形成することができる。   In the present embodiment, as described above, the opening / closing member 340 rotates when pressed weakly while the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed hard, and the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed weakly when pressed hard. The state in which the opening / closing member 340 is rotated can be formed by changing the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 in advance by the drive motor 490.

これにより、遊技者に指示する操作態様が固定化されることにより、遊技者の操作がマンネリ化することを防止できると共に、その操作態様のバリエーションの変化を単一の駆動モータ490で生じさせることができる。   Thereby, by fixing the operation mode instructed to the player, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from becoming ruined, and to change the variation of the operation mode by the single drive motor 490. it can.

また、操作部材310の操作態様を検出し、開閉部材340の動作態様を変化させる場合(例えば、開閉部材340を動作させる駆動モータを設け、駆動および停止を、操作部材310の操作態様の違いにより切り替える場合)に比較して、操作部材310の押し込みの有無を操作部材310の位置で検出するセンサの個数を削減(単数化)することができ、開閉部材340と各動作装置3440,3450との当接により開閉部材340の動作態様を切り替えることから操作部材310と開閉部材340との動作の一体感を増大させると共に、開閉部材340の動作の確実性を増大させることができる。   Further, when the operation mode of the operation member 310 is detected and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed (for example, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and driving and stopping are performed depending on a difference in the operation mode of the operation member 310. The number of sensors that detect whether or not the operation member 310 is pushed in at the position of the operation member 310 can be reduced (single) compared to the case of switching), and the opening / closing member 340 and each of the operating devices 3440 and 3450 can be reduced. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is switched by contact, the sense of unity of the operation of the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 can be increased, and the reliability of the operation of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

更に、本実施形態では、切替装置3400が所定の姿勢とされる場合に、操作部材310を「弱押し」で操作するか、「強押し」で操作するかにより開閉部材340の動作態様を変化可能に構成されるものであり、操作部材310が「弱押し」で操作されたか、「強押し」で操作されたかを検出することは不要である。従って、開閉部材340を動作させる駆動モータを設け、駆動および停止を、操作部材310の操作態様の違いにより切り替える場合に比較して、操作部材310の位置を検出するセンサの配設個数を低減することができる。   Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the switching device 3400 is in a predetermined posture, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”. It is configured to be possible, and it is not necessary to detect whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly press” or “strongly press”. Therefore, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and the number of sensors for detecting the position of the operation member 310 is reduced as compared with a case where driving and stopping are switched depending on the operation mode of the operation member 310. be able to.

なお、本実施形態では、「弱押し」と「強押し」との境界を、遊技者が感じる負荷の変化として判別することができる。即ち、上述した「弱押し」の範囲は、操作部材310と第1動作装置3440及び第2動作装置3450とが当接しない範囲であって、操作部材310は第1動作装置3440及び第2動作装置3450から負荷を受けない。   In the present embodiment, the boundary between “weak press” and “strong press” can be determined as a change in the load felt by the player. That is, the range of “weak press” described above is a range in which the operation member 310 does not contact the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 has the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450. No load from device 3450.

一方で、上述した「強押し」の範囲は、操作部材310と第1動作装置3440及び第2動作装置3450とが当接する範囲であって、操作部材310が第1動作装置3440及び第2動作装置3450から上向きの負荷を受ける。従って、遊技者は操作部材310に与えられる上向きの負荷が増加し始める位置(増加幅が変化し始める位置)を「弱押し」と「強押し」との境界として判別することができる。   On the other hand, the range of “strong pressing” described above is a range where the operation member 310 is in contact with the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 is in the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device. An upward load is received from device 3450. Therefore, the player can determine the position where the upward load applied to the operation member 310 starts to increase (position where the increase width starts to change) as the boundary between “weakly pressed” and “strongly pressed”.

これにより、遊技者が操作部材310を「弱押し」又は「強押し」で操作していることを、音声、照明または画像等で報知する場合に比較して、遊技者は、直感的な操作をおこなうことができる。   Thereby, compared with the case where the player is operating the operation member 310 by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”, the player is able to perform an intuitive operation. Can be done.

操作部材310に負荷を与える部分である第1動作装置3440の当接部材3443及び第2動作装置3450の当接部3453の移動軌跡は、本体円環部3410の回転軸を中心とする円形状を構成する。そのため、本体円環部3410の回転軸と、操作部材310の凸設部312の中心とが一致する場合において(図38参照)、本体円環部3410の姿勢により操作部材310の内側延設部315と、当接部材3443及び当接部3453との当接の態様(当接するか、否か)が変化することは無い。   The movement trajectories of the contact member 3443 of the first motion device 3440 and the contact portion 3453 of the second motion device 3450, which are parts that apply a load to the operation member 310, are circular with the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 as the center. Configure. Therefore, when the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 coincides with the center of the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 (see FIG. 38), the inner extension portion of the operation member 310 depends on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410. There is no change in the manner of contact between 315 and the contact member 3443 and the contact portion 3453 (whether contact is made or not).

従って、第1動作部材3440及び第2動作部材3450から操作部材310へ与えられる上向きの負荷(遊技者の感じる反力)は、本体円環部3410の姿勢に寄らず、操作部材310の押し込み深さに応じて変化することになるので、遊技者は、操作部材310に加えられる上向きの負荷の違いにより本体円環部3410の姿勢を判別することはできない。   Therefore, the upward load (reaction force felt by the player) applied to the operation member 310 from the first operation member 3440 and the second operation member 3450 does not depend on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410, and the push-in depth of the operation member 310 is increased. Therefore, the player cannot determine the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 due to the difference in the upward load applied to the operation member 310.

これにより、操作部材310を操作する際の感触により本体円環部3410の姿勢を判別することを防止でき、遊技者が開閉部材340を視認するように仕向けることができる。従って、操作デバイス3300の内部(に配置される開閉部材340)の状態に対する遊技者の注目力を向上させることができる。   Thereby, it is possible to prevent the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 from being determined based on the feeling when operating the operation member 310, and the player can be directed to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the state inside (opening / closing member 340 disposed in) the operation device 3300.

本実施形態では、開閉部材340の復帰動作(第1位置状態に戻る動作)を、切替装置3400の駆動により行うことで、遊技者の操作とは独立させている。例えば、本体円環部3410を最大でも1回転させることにより、開閉部材340を第1位置状態に復帰させることができる。これにより、図39又は図43に示す状態において遊技者が操作部材310を操作するか否かに関わらず、操作デバイス3300の内部にある開閉部材340を第1位置状態(図34参照)に復帰(維持)させることができる。   In the present embodiment, the return operation of the opening / closing member 340 (the operation of returning to the first position state) is performed by driving the switching device 3400 so that it is independent of the player's operation. For example, the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 3410 at most once. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the player operates the operation member 310 in the state shown in FIG. 39 or FIG. 43, the opening / closing member 340 inside the operation device 3300 is returned to the first position state (see FIG. 34). (Maintain).

図39に示す状態と図43に示す状態との中間の姿勢に本体円環部3410がされる場合、調整段部3420の第1面421が調整腕部345と対向配置されるので、開閉部材340の回転は抑制される。そのため、図39に示す状態または図43に示す状態の予備配置として、本体円環部3410を図39に示す状態と図43に示す状態との中間の姿勢とすることで、その後の動作で本体円環部3410が図39に示す状態となったのか、図43に示す状態となったのかを、駆動モータ490の動作音から把握される(気付かれる)ことを防止することができる。これにより、操作デバイス3300への注目力を維持することができる。   When the main body ring portion 3410 is in an intermediate position between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. 43, the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420 is disposed to face the adjustment arm portion 345, so that the opening / closing member The rotation of 340 is suppressed. Therefore, as a preliminary arrangement of the state shown in FIG. 39 or the state shown in FIG. 43, the main body ring portion 3410 is set to an intermediate posture between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. It can be prevented that the annular portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 or is in the state shown in FIG. 43 from the operating sound of the drive motor 490. Thereby, attention to the operation device 3300 can be maintained.

本実施形態では、第1収容部3411の傾斜面3411a1が、第2収容部3412に近接する側に配置されることから、本体円環部3410を図39に示す状態と図43に示す状態との中間の姿勢に向けて動作させる場合に、第1収容部3411と開閉部材340の調整腕部345とが対向配置される姿勢からも動作させることができるので(上面視反時計回りに回転動作させることができるので)、本体円環部3410の回転方向が制限されることを防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 3411a1 of the first housing portion 3411 is disposed on the side close to the second housing portion 3412, the main body ring portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. Can be operated from a posture in which the first housing portion 3411 and the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 are arranged to face each other (rotating operation counterclockwise when viewed from above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation direction of the main body ring part 3410 from being limited.

次いで、図47から図59を参照して、第4実施形態について説明する。第1実施形態では、操作デバイス300の開閉部材340に負荷される付勢力が開閉部材340を傾倒させる方向に向く場合について説明したが、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300は、開閉部材4340が起き上がる方向に付勢される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the biasing force applied to the opening / closing member 340 of the operation device 300 is directed in the direction in which the opening / closing member 340 is tilted is described. However, in the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing member 4340 is raised. Biased in the direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図47は、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300の上面図であり、図48は図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図47では、外壁部材4301、重ね部材302及び操作部材4310が想像線で図示される。また、図47では、切替装置4500の第1状態が図示され、図48では、開閉部材4340の第1位置状態が図示される。また、図48では、第2復帰部材4540の(第1復帰部材4530からはみ出す部分の)図示が省略される。   47 is a top view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along the line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 47, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated, and in FIG. 48, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. In FIG. 48, the second return member 4540 (the portion protruding from the first return member 4530) is not shown.

なお、切替装置4500の第1状態との記載で、スライド部材4520の開閉部材4340に対する一の配置を表現する。ここで、第1状態において、スライド部材4520は、開閉部材4340と第1復帰部材4530とが対向配置される。   Note that the description of the first state of the switching device 4500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the first state, the slide member 4520 is configured such that the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 are opposed to each other.

操作デバイス4300は、内部機構を一部視認させることで操作デバイス4300自体に演出効果を持たせる機能を有しており、逆カップ形状の底中心部に開口301aを有して形成されると共に正面枠14(図5参照)との間に切替装置4500等の動作装置を収容する態様で正面枠14に固定される外壁部材4301と、その外壁部材4301の高さ方向幅を短縮した形状から形成され底中心部に開口301aと同軸で若干直径が大きく形成される開口302aを有すると共に外壁部材4301との間に内部空間を形成する態様で重ねて固定される重ね部材302と、開口301a,302aに挿通され外壁部材4301と重ね部材302とで形成される内部空間により移動を制限される部材であって光透過性材料から構成される皿形状の操作部材4310と、外壁部材4301に支持されると共に操作部材4310の操作量と連動して傾倒動作可能に構成される一対の開閉部材4340と、その開閉部材4340の下方に配置され、開閉部材4340と当接することで開閉部材4340を付勢する状態と、開閉部材4340と当接しない状態とを直進動作により切替可能に構成される切替装置4500と、その切替装置4500を動作させる駆動ギア4591の駆動力を発生する駆動モータ4590と、を主に備える。   The operation device 4300 has a function of giving an effect to the operation device 4300 itself by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism. The operation device 4300 is formed with an opening 301a at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup and is also a front surface. Formed from an outer wall member 4301 fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operating device such as the switching device 4500 is accommodated between the frame 14 (see FIG. 5) and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 4301 is shortened. And an opening 302a that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter at the center of the bottom, and is overlapped and fixed in such a manner that an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 4301 and the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped member made of a light-transmitting material, the member of which movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302. An operation member 4310, a pair of opening / closing members 4340 supported by the outer wall member 4301 and configured to be tiltable in conjunction with the operation amount of the operation member 4310, and disposed below the opening / closing member 4340, and the opening / closing member 4340 A switching device 4500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is urged by abutting and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340, and a drive gear 4591 for operating the switching device 4500. And a drive motor 4590 for generating a drive force.

外壁部材4301は、開口301aと、凹設部301bと、開口301aの内側面の内、開口301aの中心を通り前後方向に延びる直線と交差する位置から、開口301aの中心へ向けて前後方向に延設される一対の支持腕部4301cと、開口301aの内側面の内、開口301aの中心を通り左右方向に延びる直線と交差する位置から、開口301aの中心へ向けて左右方向に延設される傾倒防止腕部4301dと、を主に備える。   The outer wall member 4301 extends in the front-rear direction from the position that intersects the straight line extending in the front-rear direction passing through the center of the opening 301 a in the inner surface of the opening 301 a, the recessed portion 301 b, and the opening 301 a toward the center of the opening 301 a. A pair of extending support arms 4301c and an inner surface of the opening 301a, extending from the position intersecting with a straight line passing through the center of the opening 301a and extending in the left-right direction toward the center of the opening 301a. And an anti-tilt arm portion 4301d.

凹設部301bは、操作部材4310の外側延設部313と上下方向で重なる配置とされ、操作部材4310を上方に復帰させるスプリングSP1の下側端部を収容する(図48参照)。   The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 4310 upward (see FIG. 48).

支持腕部4301cは、開口301aの側面から下方傾斜方向に延設され、その延設先端部で開閉部材4340を左右から挟む二股形状に形成されると共に、延設先端部において開閉部材4340を軸支する円柱形状の軸部4301c1を支持する態様で構成される。   The support arm portion 4301c extends downward from the side surface of the opening 301a, and is formed in a bifurcated shape that sandwiches the opening / closing member 4340 from the left and right at the extending tip, and the opening / closing member 4340 is pivoted at the extending tip. It is comprised in the aspect which supports the column-shaped axial part 4301c1 to support.

傾倒防止腕部4301dは、第1位置状態(図48参照)において一対の開閉部材4340の内側面と当接する。そのため、傾倒防止腕部4301dにより開閉部材4340の回転が規制されるので、開閉部材4340の復帰動作後の姿勢を安定化させることができる。   The tilt prevention arm portion 4301d contacts the inner side surfaces of the pair of opening / closing members 4340 in the first position state (see FIG. 48). Therefore, since the rotation of the opening / closing member 4340 is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d, the posture of the opening / closing member 4340 after the return operation can be stabilized.

操作部材4310は、第1実施形態の操作部材310と比較して、上底部の下面形状と、本体部311の下端形状のみが異なる。即ち、操作部材4310は、本体部311と、外側延設部313と、操作部材4310が押し込み操作されることで開閉部材4340と当接可能に操作部材4310の上底部の下面に膨出される膨出部4312と、を主に備える。   The operation member 4310 differs from the operation member 310 of the first embodiment only in the lower surface shape of the upper bottom portion and the lower end shape of the main body portion 311. That is, the operation member 4310 is swelled on the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 so that the operation member 4310 can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 when the operation member 4310 is pushed in. And an output part 4312.

膨出部4312は、その下面が、本体部311の中心軸上に配置される部分を下端として、中心軸から離れるほど上昇傾斜する略円錐形状とされる。なお、図48に示すように、中心軸から遠ざかるほど上昇傾斜の度合いが低くなる態様とされる。   The bulging portion 4312 has a substantially conical shape whose lower surface is inclined upward with increasing distance from the central axis, with the lower end being a portion disposed on the central axis of the main body 311. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, it is set as the aspect which the degree of a raise inclination becomes low, so that it distances from a central axis.

開閉部材4340は、支持腕部4301cの軸部4301c1に軸支される長尺部材であって、第1実施形態の開閉部材340と一部の構成を同じくする。即ち、開閉部材4340は、軸方向視(図48参照)で長尺板状に形成される本体板部341と、支持孔342と、凸設受け部344(図8参照)と、を備えると共に、本体板部341の上端部において相手側の開閉部材4340へ向けて前後方向に沿って延設される延設部4343と、本体板部341の下端部において傾倒防止腕部4301dと対向する側の反対側の側面から延設される調整腕部4345と、軸部4301c1の周りに巻き付けられると共に凸設受け部344に係止され開閉部材4340を内方側の位置へ回動させる付勢力を発生するねじりバネNB1(図8参照)と、を主に備える。   The opening / closing member 4340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 4301c1 of the support arm portion 4301c, and has the same configuration as the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. That is, the opening / closing member 4340 includes a main body plate portion 341 formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 48), a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8). The extension part 4343 extending along the front-rear direction toward the other opening / closing member 4340 at the upper end part of the main body plate part 341, and the side facing the tilt prevention arm part 4301d at the lower end part of the main body plate part 341 And an urging force that is wound around the shaft portion 4301c1 and is locked by the convex receiving portion 344 to rotate the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward side position. And a generated torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8).

なお、本実施形態におけるねじりバネNB1の付勢力の方向は、第1実施形態におけるねじりバネNB1の付勢力の逆方向である。即ち、図48の状態において、開閉部材4340はバネNB1の付勢力により傾倒防止腕部4301dに押し付けられており、傾倒防止腕部4301dにより回転を規制される。   Note that the direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the present embodiment is the opposite direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the first embodiment. That is, in the state of FIG. 48, the opening / closing member 4340 is pressed against the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d by the biasing force of the spring NB1, and the rotation is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d.

延設部4343は、操作部材4310の上底部の下面と当接する部分であって、延設先端上部(膨出部4312の中心部と当接する部分)に面取り加工された面取り部4343aを備える。面取り部4343aにより、膨出部4312の先端と延設部4343とが点で接触することを防止することができ、膨出部4312の先端を鋭利に構成した場合であっても、膨出部4312の先端の破損を抑制することができる。   The extended portion 4343 includes a chamfered portion 4343a that is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 and is chamfered at an upper portion of the extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the central portion of the bulging portion 4312). The chamfered portion 4343a can prevent the tip of the bulging portion 4312 from contacting the extended portion 4343 at a point, and even if the tip of the bulging portion 4312 is sharply configured, the bulging portion Damage to the tip of 4312 can be suppressed.

調整腕部4345は、延設先端部下面に配置される当接面4345aと、延設方向と交差する回転規制面4345bと、を主に備える。   The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

当接面4345aは、切替装置4500の各復帰部材4530,4540と当接し、開閉部材4340の回転動作により各復帰部材4530,4540を押圧する面である。   The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation of the opening and closing member 4340.

回転規制面4345bは、軸部4301c1側へ向けて凹む湾曲形状から構成される面である。図54に示す第2位置状態において、切替装置4500の第1復帰部材4530の軸支中心J41を中心とする円弧形状と一致する形状とされる。   The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 of the switching device 4500 has a shape that matches the arc shape centered on the pivot center J41.

次いで、図49から図51を参照して、切替装置4500について説明する。なお、切替装置4500の説明において、適宜図47及び図48を参照する。図49(a)は、切替装置4500の側面図であり、図49(b)は、図49(a)の矢印XLIXb方向視における切替装置4500の上面図である。なお、図49では、駆動モータ4590、駆動ギア4591及び土台部材4510の図示が省略される。   Next, the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. In the description of the switching device 4500, FIGS. 47 and 48 are referred to as appropriate. 49A is a side view of the switching device 4500, and FIG. 49B is a top view of the switching device 4500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49A. In FIG. 49, illustration of the drive motor 4590, the drive gear 4591, and the base member 4510 is omitted.

図50(a)は、一方の第1復帰部材4530の正面図であり、図50(b)は、図50(a)の矢印Lb方向視における第1復帰部材4530の上面図であり、図50(c)は、図50(a)の矢印Lc方向視における第1復帰部材4530の側面図である。また、図51(a)は、一方の第2復帰部材4540の正面図であり、図51(b)は、図51(a)の矢印LIb方向視における第2復帰部材4540の上面図であり、図51(c)は、図51(a)の矢印LIc方向視における第2復帰部材4540の側面図である。   50 (a) is a front view of one first return member 4530, and FIG. 50 (b) is a top view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a). 50 (c) is a side view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Lc in FIG. 50 (a). 51 (a) is a front view of one second return member 4540, and FIG. 51 (b) is a top view of the second return member 4540 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51C is a side view of the second return member 4540 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIc in FIG.

切替装置4500は、左右に延設されるスライドレール4511を有する土台部材4510と、スライドレール4511に沿って動作可能な状態で土台部材4510に配設されるスライド部材4520と、そのスライド部材4520の上面に配置される支持部材4523に軸支される複数の復帰部材4530,4540と、駆動モータ4590と、駆動ギア4591と、を主に備える。   The switching device 4500 includes a base member 4510 having a slide rail 4511 extending to the left and right, a slide member 4520 disposed on the base member 4510 in a state operable along the slide rail 4511, and the slide member 4520. A plurality of return members 4530 and 4540 that are pivotally supported by a support member 4523 disposed on the upper surface, a drive motor 4590, and a drive gear 4591 are mainly provided.

スライドレール4511は、左右方向に亘って同一断面形状から形成される。そのため、スライド部材4520をスライドレール4511に左右方向から挿入することで、スライド部材4520をスライド移動可能な状態でスライドレール4511に連結することができる。   The slide rail 4511 is formed from the same cross-sectional shape in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the slide member 4520 into the slide rail 4511 from the left and right directions, the slide member 4520 can be coupled to the slide rail 4511 in a slidable state.

スライド部材4520は、上面視矩形の板状部材から形成される本体板部4521と、その本体板部4521の前側面に刻設されるギア歯4522と、本体板部4521の上面の各角付近の位置に一対ずつ並設される支持部材4523と、を主に備える。   The slide member 4520 includes a main body plate portion 4521 formed from a plate-like member having a rectangular shape when viewed from above, gear teeth 4522 engraved on the front side surface of the main body plate portion 4521, and each corner near the upper surface of the main body plate portion 4521. And a support member 4523 provided in parallel at a position.

本体板部4521は、前後側面から内側向けた凹みが左右方向に亘って凹設され、その凹設される部分がスライドレール4511と嵌合する。ギア歯4522は、駆動ギア4591と歯合されており(図47参照)、駆動モータ4590の動作と連動してスライド部材4520が左右方向(図47左右方向)に動作する。   As for the main body plate part 4521, a dent directed inward from the front and rear side surfaces is provided in the left-right direction, and the recessed part is fitted to the slide rail 4511. The gear teeth 4522 mesh with the drive gear 4591 (see FIG. 47), and the slide member 4520 operates in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47) in conjunction with the operation of the drive motor 4590.

各一対の支持部材4523は、左右方向に同軸で貫通形成される支持孔4523aと、その支持孔4523aに挿通固定される軸部材4523bと、を主に備える。   Each pair of support members 4523 mainly includes a support hole 4523a formed coaxially in the left-right direction and a shaft member 4523b inserted and fixed in the support hole 4523a.

図50に示すように、第1復帰部材4530は、長尺矩形の板形状から形成されると共に端部に軸部材4523bに軸支される貫通孔が形成される本体部4531と、その本体部4531の貫通孔が形成される側の端部から貫通孔の径方向に沿って延設される回転規制部4532と、その回転規制部4532が形成される側の反対側の端部において本体部4531に形成される傾斜面部4533と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 50, the first return member 4530 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and a main body portion 4531 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end, and the main body portion. A rotation restricting portion 4532 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole 4531 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4532 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4533 formed at 4531.

本体部4531は、軸支される側の端部とは反対側の端部に、軸支中心J41を中心とした円弧形状の湾曲面4531aを備える。   The main body 4531 is provided with an arc-shaped curved surface 4531a centered on the pivot support center J41 at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end.

回転規制部4532は、本体部4531の長手方向に対して傾斜して延設される。本実施形態では、その傾斜角度が約50度で形成される。   The rotation restricting portion 4532 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4531. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

傾斜面部4533は、スライド部材4520がスライド動作した際に、第1復帰部材4530と、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345とが、動作方向と直交する面同士で衝突し破損することを防止するための傾斜面が形成される部分であり、少なくとも、本体部4531の端部から、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345と当接し得る範囲に亘って形成される。   The inclined surface portion 4533 prevents the first return member 4530 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other on the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end of the main body 4531 so as to contact the adjusting arm 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

図51に示すように、第2復帰部材4540は、長尺矩形の板形状から形成されると共に端部に軸部材4523bに軸支される貫通孔が形成される本体部4541と、その本体部4541の貫通孔が形成される側の端部から貫通孔の径方向に沿って延設される回転規制部4542と、その回転規制部4542が形成される側の反対側の端部において本体部4541に形成される傾斜面部4543と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 51, the second return member 4540 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and has a main body portion 4541 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end portion, and the main body portion. The rotation restricting portion 4542 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole of 4541 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4543 formed on the main surface 4541.

本体部4541は、第1復帰部材4530の本体部4531よりも軸支される側の反対側へ長尺に延びた形状から形成され、端部は長手方向と直交する平面形状から構成される。   The main body portion 4541 is formed in a shape extending in a long direction to the opposite side of the main body portion 4531 of the first return member 4530 and the end portion is formed in a planar shape orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.

回転規制部4542は、本体部4541の長手方向に対して傾斜して延設される。本実施形態では、その傾斜角度が約50度で形成される。   The rotation restricting portion 4542 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4541. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

傾斜面部4543は、スライド部材4520がスライド動作した際に、第2復帰部材4540と、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345とが、動作方向と直交する面同士で衝突し破損することを防止するための傾斜面が形成される部分であり、少なくとも、本体部4541の端部から、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345と当接し得る範囲に亘って形成される。   The inclined surface portion 4543 prevents the second return member 4540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

なお、軸部材4523bには、ねじりバネNB4が巻き付けられており、各復帰部材4530,4540は、本体部4531,4541の先端側が上方に起きる方向に付勢される。即ち、図49に示すように、回転規制部4532,4542は、各復帰部材4530,4540の回り止めとして機能する。   A torsion spring NB4 is wound around the shaft member 4523b, and the return members 4530 and 4540 are urged in the direction in which the distal ends of the main body portions 4531 and 4541 are raised upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the rotation restricting portions 4532 and 4542 function as detents for the return members 4530 and 4540.

次いで、図52から図54を参照して、切替装置4500が第1状態を形成する場合における切替装置4500の機能について説明する。図52から図54は、図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図52では、操作部材4310が途中まで押し下げ動作された状態が図示され、図53では、操作部材4310が移動範囲の下端位置まで押し下げ動作された直後の状態が図示され、図54では、図53の状態から操作部材4310が上昇し、上端位置まで復帰した状態が図示される。   Next, the function of the switching device 4500 when the switching device 4500 forms the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 52 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is pushed down halfway, FIG. 53 illustrates a state immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the moving range, and FIG. The state in which the operating member 4310 is raised from the state of FIG. 53 and returned to the upper end position is illustrated.

図52に示すように、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端位置に到達しない程度に押し下げ動作する場合、膨出部4312により押し広げられる開閉部材4340の当接面4345aの移動軌跡上に、第1復帰部材4530の本体部4531が配置され、開閉部材4340の動作量が大きくなるほど、第1復帰部材4530が、ねじりバネNB4の付勢力に抗して傾倒する態様から形成される。   As shown in FIG. 52, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the extent that it does not reach the lower end position of the movement range, the first on the movement locus of the contact surface 4345a of the opening / closing member 4340 that is pushed and expanded by the bulging portion 4312. The main body portion 4531 of the return member 4530 is disposed, and the first return member 4530 is formed so as to tilt against the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 as the operation amount of the opening / closing member 4340 increases.

そのため、操作部材4310を押し込み操作する遊技者に操作デバイス4300から与えられる反力は、開閉部材4340を付勢するねじりバネNB1(図8参照)の反力と、第1復帰部材4530を付勢するねじりバネNB4の反力と、を合わせた力となる。従って、操作部材4310を下方に押し込む量が大きくなるほど、遊技者が感じる反力は増加する。   Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes in the operation member 4310 is urged by the reaction force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530. This is a combined force of the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4. Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player increases as the amount of pushing the operation member 4310 downward increases.

図53に示すように、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端まで押し下げると、第1復帰部材4530の移動軌跡の外側に開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345が配置される。そのため、開閉部材4340が第1復帰部材4530に与える負荷が無くなるので(湾曲面4531aに与える摩擦力だけとなるので)、第1復帰部材4530が、ねじりバネNB4の付勢力で起き上がり動作する(図54参照)。   As shown in FIG. 53, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed outside the movement locus of the first return member 4530. Therefore, since the load applied to the first return member 4530 by the opening / closing member 4340 is eliminated (because only the frictional force is applied to the curved surface 4531a), the first return member 4530 is raised and operated by the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 (FIG. 54).

そのため、操作部材4310を押し込み操作する遊技者に操作デバイス4300から与えられる反力は、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端まで押し込んだ直後に大きく変化する。即ち、第1復帰部材4530を付勢するねじりバネNB4の付勢力が遊技者に与えられなくなる。   Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes the operation member 4310 is greatly changed immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range. That is, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 that urges the first return member 4530 is not given to the player.

これにより、遊技者が感じる反力は即座に減少する。従って、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端まで操作する過程において、遊技者が感じる反力は、操作量が大きくなるにつれて増加した後、下端に到達した直後に即座に減少する態様で変化する。   Thereby, the reaction force felt by the player is immediately reduced. Therefore, in the process of operating the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, the reaction force felt by the player changes in a manner that decreases immediately after reaching the lower end after increasing as the operation amount increases.

図54に示すように、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345の移動軌跡上に第1復帰部材4530が配置され、開閉部材4340を介して第1復帰部材4530に与えられるねじりバネNB4の付勢力が、第1復帰部材4530の回転規制部4532をスライド部材4520に押し付ける方向(回転が規制される方向)に向けられるので、開閉部材4340の復帰が妨げられる。従って、図53の後で操作部材4310が上昇した後も、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態で維持することができる。   As shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340, and the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 applied to the first return member 4530 via the opening / closing member 4340 is increased. Since the rotation restricting portion 4532 of the first return member 4530 is directed in the direction in which the rotation restricting portion 4532 is pressed against the slide member 4520 (the direction in which the rotation is restricted), the return of the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented. Therefore, even after the operation member 4310 is raised after FIG. 53, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state.

この場合、操作部材4310が上昇動作する際に開閉部材4340と操作部材4310とが当接しないので、開閉部材4340を介して、ねじりバネNB1,NB4の付勢力が操作部材4310に与えられる場合(図58参照)に比較して、操作部材4310の復帰速度を小さくする(復帰を遅くする)ことができる。   In this case, since the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310 do not come into contact with each other when the operation member 4310 moves upward, the biasing force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 is applied to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 ( Compared to FIG. 58), the return speed of the operation member 4310 can be reduced (the return is delayed).

従って、本実施形態によれば、切替装置4500が第1状態であることを3つの異なった手段により遊技者に報知することができる。即ち、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端まで押し込んだ直後に反力が小さくなること(触覚)、操作部材4310から遊技者が手を離した後も開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されること(視覚)、及び操作部材4310の復帰動作が遅いこと(視覚、または触覚(操作待ち時間))により報知することができる。   Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player that the switching device 4500 is in the first state by three different means. That is, the reaction force decreases immediately after the operating member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range (tactile sense), and the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the hand from the operating member 4310. (Visual), and that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow (visual or tactile sense (operation waiting time)).

操作部材4310の復帰動作が遅いことを触覚による報知としたのは、操作部材4310の速度は、遊技者が連打操作する場合の連打速度の目安になるとの理由からである。即ち、連打操作の際、遊技者が行うのは操作部材4310を一方向に押し込む操作のみであるところ、遊技者が操作する前に操作部材4310が初期位置(操作部材4310の移動範囲の上端位置)に配置されることで初めて同様の押し込み操作を連続で行うことが可能となる。   The reason that the tactile notification indicates that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow is that the speed of the operation member 4310 is a measure of the continuous hit speed when the player performs the continuous hit operation. That is, in the continuous hitting operation, the player only performs an operation of pushing the operating member 4310 in one direction. However, before the player operates, the operating member 4310 is moved to the initial position (the upper position of the moving range of the operating member 4310). For the first time, the same pushing operation can be continuously performed.

そのため、仮に、操作部材4310の復帰速度が遅くなると、それまで一定の間隔(操作部材4310が初期位置まで復帰するまでの時間間隔)で連打操作を行っていたとしても、押し込むタイミングで操作部材4310が初期位置に復帰していないことになり、操作部材4310を連打操作しようとする遊技者に触覚的に違和感を与えることができる。   Therefore, if the return speed of the operation member 4310 is slow, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed at a certain interval (time interval until the operation member 4310 returns to the initial position), the operation member 4310 is pushed at the timing of pushing. Is not returned to the initial position, and it is possible to feel a sense of discomfort tactilely to a player who tries to operate the operation member 4310 repeatedly.

このように、異なった複数の報知を行うことにより、いずれかの報知に遊技者が気付かなかった場合であっても、その他の報知で遊技者が気付く可能性を残すことができるので、切替装置4500が第1状態であることを遊技者が見逃す可能性を低減することができる。   In this way, by performing a plurality of different notifications, even if the player is not aware of any of the notifications, it is possible to leave the possibility of the player noticing with other notifications, so the switching device The possibility that the player misses that the 4500 is in the first state can be reduced.

また、これらの報知は、例えば、音響・照明や、振動などによる報知に比較して、操作デバイス4300を操作する遊技者が認識し易い一方で、他の遊技者は認識し難い報知方法である。そのため、例えば、大当たりが確定した状態では切替装置4500を第1状態にするという制御を行う場合、上述した報知に気付くことができれば、大当たり演出が開始される前に大当たりが確定していることを操作した遊技者本人だけが認識できるので、遊技者に操作デバイス4300を操作させるように仕向けることができる。   In addition, these notifications are notification methods that are easy for a player who operates the operation device 4300 to recognize, while other players are difficult to recognize, for example, compared to notification by sound, lighting, vibration, or the like. . Therefore, for example, when control is performed to set the switching device 4500 to the first state in a state where the jackpot is confirmed, if the above-described notification can be noticed, the jackpot is confirmed before the jackpot effect is started. Since only the operated player can recognize it, the player can be directed to operate the operation device 4300.

なお、図54に示す状態において、操作部材4310が押し込み操作されたとしても、操作部材4310の移動範囲は開閉部材4340に当接し始める位置(図53参照)が限界とされる。これにより、操作部材4310から開閉部材4340に与えられる負荷を、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態とされる場合に最小とすることができるので、例え遊技者が報知に気付かず、操作部材4310の操作を継続した場合においても、開閉部材4340と操作部材4310との間に生じる負荷により操作部材4310または開閉部材4340が破損することを防止することができる。   In the state shown in FIG. 54, even if the operation member 4310 is pushed in, the movement range of the operation member 4310 is limited to the position where the operation member 4310 starts to contact the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, since the load given to the opening / closing member 4340 from the operation member 4310 can be minimized when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, for example, the player is not aware of the notification, and the operation member 4310 Even when the operation is continued, the operation member 4310 or the opening / closing member 4340 can be prevented from being damaged by a load generated between the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310.

次いで、図55及び図56を参照して、切替装置4500の状態について説明する。なお、図55及び図56の説明において、図47を適宜参照する。図55及び図56は、操作デバイス4300の上面図である。なお、図55及び図56では、外壁部材4301、重ね部材302が想像線で図示され、操作部材4310の図示が省略される。また、図55では、開閉部材4340がいずれの復帰部材4530,4540とも対向しない位置にスライド部材4520が配置される切替装置4500の第2状態が図示されると共に第2位置状態の開閉部材4340が想像線で図示され、図56では、開閉部材4340が第2復帰部材4540と対向する位置にスライド部材4520が配置される切替装置4500の第3状態が図示される。   Next, the state of the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIG. 47 is referred to as appropriate. 55 and 56 are top views of the operation device 4300. FIG. 55 and 56, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 55, the second state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 does not face any of the return members 4530, 4540 is shown, and the opening / closing member 4340 in the second position state is shown. Illustrated by an imaginary line, FIG. 56 illustrates a third state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 faces the second return member 4540.

図54に示す状態から、図55に示す第2状態まで、スライド部材4520をスライド動作させた場合、第1復帰部材4530の左右方向位置が開閉部材4340の左右方向位置とずれるので、第1復帰部材4530から開閉部材4340に与えられる負荷が解除され、開閉部材4340は第1位置状態に復帰する。   When the slide member 4520 is slid from the state shown in FIG. 54 to the second state shown in FIG. 55, the left-right position of the first return member 4530 is shifted from the left-right direction position of the opening / closing member 4340. The load applied to the opening / closing member 4340 from the member 4530 is released, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

図55に示すように、切替装置4500の第2状態では、切替装置4500から開閉部材4340へ反力が生じない。そのため、切替装置4500の第1状態および第3状態に比較して、操作部材4310を操作する遊技者に操作部材4310を通して与えられる反力が低減される。   As shown in FIG. 55, in the second state of the switching device 4500, no reaction force is generated from the switching device 4500 to the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, compared to the first state and the third state of the switching device 4500, the reaction force applied through the operation member 4310 to the player who operates the operation member 4310 is reduced.

図56に示すように、切替装置4500の第3状態では、開閉部材4340の左右方向位置と、第2復帰部材4540の左右方向位置が一致する。なお、操作部材4310が押し込み操作された状態(開閉部材4340が第1位置状態から移動している場合)でスライド部材4520をスライド動作させた場合であっても、開閉部材4340の側面には第2復帰部材4540の傾斜面部4543が当接し、第2復帰部材4540が開閉部材4340の下方へ押し下げられるので、操作部材4310を操作している最中にスライド部材4520を動作させることで第2復帰部材4540が破損するという不具合を防止することができる。従って、任意のタイミングでスライド部材4520をスライド動作させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 56, in the third state of the switching device 4500, the horizontal position of the opening / closing member 4340 and the horizontal position of the second return member 4540 are the same. Even when the slide member 4520 is slid in a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed in (when the open / close member 4340 is moved from the first position state), the side surface of the open / close member 4340 is not 2 Since the inclined surface portion 4543 of the return member 4540 contacts and the second return member 4540 is pushed down below the opening / closing member 4340, the second return is achieved by operating the slide member 4520 while operating the operation member 4310. The problem that the member 4540 is damaged can be prevented. Accordingly, the slide member 4520 can be slid at an arbitrary timing.

図57及び図58は、図56のLVII−LVII線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図57では、操作部材4310を移動範囲の上端位置に配置した状態が図示され、図58では、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端位置まで押し込んだ状態が図示される。   57 and 58 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 57 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 58 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range.

図57及び図58に示すように、スライド部材4520が第3状態とされても、操作部材4310の押し込み操作によりねじりバネNB4の付勢力が遊技者に与えられる反力に加わることは、スライド部材4520が第1状態とされる場合と変化無い。   As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, even when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 is applied to the reaction force applied to the player by the pushing operation of the operation member 4310. No change occurs when 4520 is in the first state.

一方で、スライド部材4520が第3状態とされる場合、図58に示すように、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端位置まで押し込んでも、第2復帰部材4540の移動軌跡上に開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345が配置される。そのため、第2復帰部材4540を介して開閉部材4340に伝達されるねじりバネNB4の付勢力が、開閉部材4340に与えられ続ける。   On the other hand, when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, as shown in FIG. 58, the adjustment of the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the second return member 4540 is performed even when the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end position of the movement range. An arm portion 4345 is disposed. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 transmitted to the opening / closing member 4340 via the second return member 4540 is continuously applied to the opening / closing member 4340.

図59は、本実施形態において操作部材4310を押し込み操作した遊技者に与えられる反力の計時変化を示した図である。図59では、切替装置4500の第1状態の場合が実線で図示され、切替装置4500の第2状態の場合が破線で図示され、切替装置4500の第3状態の場合が1点鎖線で図示される。また、理解を容易とするために、実線と一点鎖線とが重ねられる範囲において、実線と一点鎖線とを若干の距離を空けて平行に記載する。   FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a time change of reaction force applied to the player who has pushed the operation member 4310 in the present embodiment. 59, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a solid line, the second state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a broken line, and the third state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. The In order to facilitate understanding, the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line are described in parallel with a slight distance as long as the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line overlap each other.

図59に示すように、切替装置4500が第3状態とされる場合には、遊技者に与えられる反力が最後まで増大し、途中で減少することが無い一方で、切替装置4500が第1状態とされる場合には、遊技者に与えられる反力が途中で減少し、その減少したままの反力が維持される。   As shown in FIG. 59, when the switching device 4500 is in the third state, the reaction force applied to the player increases to the end and does not decrease halfway, while the switching device 4500 is in the first state. In the case of the state, the reaction force applied to the player is reduced on the way, and the reduced reaction force is maintained.

また、切替装置4500が第2状態とされる場合には、遊技者に与えられる反力の増大幅が第1状態や第3状態に比較して小さくされるものの、操作部材4310が移動範囲の下端に配置された状態における反力は、第1状態と第2状態とで同様となる。   In addition, when the switching device 4500 is set to the second state, the increase in the reaction force applied to the player is reduced compared to the first state and the third state, but the operation member 4310 is within the movement range. The reaction force in the state arranged at the lower end is the same in the first state and the second state.

従って、例えば、「ボタンを押し込め。反力が途中で下がったら、チャンス!?」という報知を第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で行うことで、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作するように仕向けることができる。即ち、反力の増減という、操作した本人しか把握できない情報から遊技者が大当たり期待度を把握できるようにすることにより、自分だけが結果を知れるという特別感を遊技者に与えることができる。そのため、通常であれば、面倒さから操作部材4310を押し込み操作しない遊技者が、操作部材4310を楽しんで操作できるようにすることができる。また、操作部材4310を叩きつける操作よりも、徐々に押し込む操作の方が、反力の変化を感知し易いことから、遊技者による操作部材4310を叩きつける操作の抑制を図ることができ、操作デバイス4300の耐久性を向上させることができる。   Therefore, for example, the player can operate the operation member 4310 by informing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that the “push button is pressed. Can be directed to. That is, by making it possible for the player to grasp the jackpot expectation degree from information that only the operating person can grasp, such as increase or decrease of reaction force, it is possible to give the player a special feeling that only the player can know the result. Therefore, normally, a player who does not push in and operate the operation member 4310 from troublesomeness can enjoy and operate the operation member 4310. In addition, the operation of gradually pushing the operation member 4310 is more sensitive to the reaction force change than the operation of hitting the operation member 4310. Therefore, the operation of hitting the operation member 4310 by the player can be suppressed, and the operation device 4300 can be suppressed. The durability of can be improved.

また、例えば、「ボタンを押し込め。反力がいつもより小さいと、チャンス!?」という報知を第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で行うことで、上述と同様の理由から、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作するように仕向けることができる。この場合、反力が第3状態よりも低ければ遊技者にとって有利であるという遊技性において、遊技者に与える反力が第3状態よりも最終的に低くなる場合の、反力の変化態様を第1状態と第2状態との2パターン用意することができる。   In addition, for example, the player can notify the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that “push down the button. If the reaction force is always smaller, the chance !?” for the same reason as described above. The operating member 4310 can be directed to operate. In this case, in the gameability in which it is advantageous for the player if the reaction force is lower than that in the third state, the change mode of the reaction force when the reaction force applied to the player is finally lower than that in the third state. Two patterns of the first state and the second state can be prepared.

これにより、操作部材4310を操作している途中では、第3状態と反力が同様であるが、操作部材4310を移動範囲の下端まで操作完了することにより反力が小さくなり、遊技者の興趣を向上させる場合(第1状態)と、操作部材4310の押し込み操作の開始直後から反力が低めであることを遊技者が把握でき、押し込み操作をしている間中、遊技者の興趣を向上させる場合(第2状態)と、で遊技者にとって有利な反力の態様を切り替えることができ、遊技者が操作部材4310の操作に飽きることを防止することができる。   Accordingly, while the operation member 4310 is being operated, the reaction force is the same as in the third state, but the reaction force is reduced by completing the operation of the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, and the player's interest The player can grasp that the reaction force is low immediately after the start of the push-in operation of the operation member 4310, and improve the player's interest during the push-in operation. The mode of the reaction force that is advantageous to the player can be switched between the case (second state) and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the operation of the operation member 4310.

なお、本実施形態では、押し込みを報知する場合において、切替装置4500は、高い確率(99%以上)で、第1状態か第3状態とされ、第2状態となるのはごく稀となるように制御される。これにより、ほとんどの場合で遊技者に操作部材4310を下端位置まで(最後まで)押し込み操作させるように仕向けることができると共に、遊技者を第1状態および第3状態における反力に慣れさせ、操作部材4310を介して遊技者に与えられる反力の変化(第2状態となることによる変化)が僅かであったとしても、その変化に遊技者が気づき易くすることができる。   In the present embodiment, when the push-in is notified, the switching device 4500 is set to the first state or the third state with a high probability (99% or more), and the second state is rarely entered. Controlled. As a result, in most cases, it is possible to direct the player to push the operation member 4310 to the lower end position (to the end) and to make the player accustomed to the reaction force in the first state and the third state. Even if the reaction force applied to the player via the member 4310 changes slightly (change due to the second state), the player can easily notice the change.

次いで、図60から図69を参照して、第5実施形態について説明する。第1実施形態では、本体円環部410の初期状態において操作部材310を押し込み操作しても開閉部材340が第1位置状態で維持され、その後の操作部材310の操作に伴う開閉部材340の動作態様には影響を与えない場合に付いて説明したが、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300は、本体円環部410の初期状態で操作部材310を操作することで開閉部材340の状態が変化し、本体円環部410の初期状態で操作部材310を操作しない場合とは異なった動作態様で開閉部材340が動作する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state even when the operation member 310 is pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, and the operation of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the subsequent operation of the operation member 310 is performed. As described above, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment changes the state of the opening / closing member 340 by operating the operation member 310 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. The opening / closing member 340 operates in an operation mode different from the case where the operation member 310 is not operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図60は、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300の分解正面斜視図であり、図61は、切替装置5400の分解正面斜視図である。なお、図60では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図60では、本体円環部5410が初期状態で図示される。また、図61では、駆動モータ4590の図示が省略される。   FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 61 is an exploded front perspective view of the switching device 5400. In FIG. 60, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 60, the main body ring portion 5410 is shown in an initial state. In FIG. 61, the drive motor 4590 is not shown.

図60に示すように、操作デバイス5300は、第1実施形態における操作デバイス300の切替装置400の代わりに以下で説明する切替装置5400が組み込まれることを除けば、操作デバイス300と同様の構成を備える。   As shown in FIG. 60, the operation device 5300 has the same configuration as the operation device 300 except that a switching device 5400 described below is incorporated instead of the switching device 400 of the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Prepare.

なお、切替装置5400は、外力が与えられていない状態において(図60参照)、調整段部5420の各面421〜423の高さや、各面421〜423同士の切り替わりの位置等は、第1実施形態における調整段部420と同様とされる。従って、第1実施形態で説明した通り、本体円環部5410が第1演出状態(図18参照)などに対応する姿勢で停止した状態で、操作部材310を押し込み操作することで、第1実施形態で説明した動作と同様の動作を、開閉部材340に行わせることができる。   Note that the switching device 5400 is configured so that the height of each surface 421 to 423 of the adjustment step portion 5420, the position of switching between the surfaces 421 to 423, and the like are the first when no external force is applied (see FIG. 60). This is the same as the adjustment step 420 in the embodiment. Accordingly, as described in the first embodiment, the first operation is performed by pushing the operating member 310 in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 is stopped in a posture corresponding to the first effect state (see FIG. 18) or the like. The opening / closing member 340 can be made to perform the same operation as that described in the embodiment.

一方、切替装置5400は、外力が与えられることで本体円環部5410に対して相対動作し、開閉部材340と調整段部5420の第2面422との間に介在するようになる分割円環部材5450,5460を備える。   On the other hand, the switching device 5400 operates relative to the main body ring portion 5410 when an external force is applied, and is divided between the opening / closing member 340 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Members 5450 and 5460 are provided.

切替装置5400は、土台部材320の本体部321の外径よりも若干大きな内径から形成されることにより土台部材320の周りを相対回転可能に構成される上面視ドーナツ形状の本体円環部5410と、その本体円環部5410の上面に形成されると共に調整腕部345との当接により開閉部材340の回転動作を止める調整段部5420と、その調整段部5420の機能と同様の機能を有しつつ本体円環部5410の回転に伴って本体円環部5410に対して相対動作する第1分割円環部材5450と、その第1分割円環部材5450と類似の形状から構成され同様の機能を有する第2分割円環部材5460と、本体円環部5410の外周面に周方向に亘って刻設されるギア歯430と、そのギア歯430に歯合される駆動ギア491を駆動させる駆動モータ490と、を主に備える。   The switching device 5400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 5410 in a top view is formed. And an adjustment step portion 5420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 5410 and stops the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345, and has the same function as the adjustment step portion 5420. However, the first divided ring member 5450 that moves relative to the main body ring portion 5410 in accordance with the rotation of the main body ring portion 5410, and a similar function that is configured in a similar shape to the first divided ring member 5450. A second split ring member 5460 having gears, gear teeth 430 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body ring portion 5410 in the circumferential direction, and a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430. A driving motor 490 to be driven, mainly comprises.

本体円環部5410は、各分割部材5450,5460を収容する目的で第1実施形態における本体円環部410の形状に対して周方向に凹設される凹設部5411と、その凹設部5411を上方から覆う板部分の周方向側面に凹設深度が大きくなる側に近づくほど上昇傾斜する態様で傾斜形成させる傾斜面5412と、本体円環部5410の最外径部付近に径方向外側に張り出し可能に収容される被検出部材5413と、その被検出部材5413の根本位置付近において凹設部5411の下側における本体円環部5410の最外径部から外方へ向けて凸設される係止凸部5414と、を主に備える。   The main body ring portion 5410 includes a recessed portion 5411 that is recessed in the circumferential direction with respect to the shape of the main body ring portion 410 in the first embodiment for the purpose of accommodating the divided members 5450 and 5460, and the recessed portion. An inclined surface 5412 that is formed so as to be inclined to rise toward the side where the recessed depth increases on the circumferential side surface of the plate portion that covers 5411 from above, and a radially outer side in the vicinity of the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 Detected member 5413 that is housed in a projecting manner, and protrudes outwardly from the outermost diameter portion of main body ring portion 5410 below concave portion 5411 in the vicinity of the base position of detected member 5413. The locking projection 5414 is mainly provided.

凹設部5411は、本体円環部5410の径方向厚さの中央位置の凹設深度が小さくされ、両端の凹設深度が大きくされる。また、両端の凹設部分は、径方向の側壁が、本体円環部5410の中心軸を中心とする円弧形状から形成される。   In the recessed portion 5411, the recessed depth at the center of the radial thickness of the main body ring portion 5410 is reduced, and the recessed depth at both ends is increased. Further, the recessed portions at both ends are formed such that the radial side wall has an arc shape centering on the central axis of the main body ring portion 5410.

このように形成される凹設部5411に、分割円環部材5450,5460の本体板部5451及び延設支持部5453が挿入されることで、本体円環部5410の初期状態(図60参照)が形成される。また、分割円環部材5450,5460が本体円環部5410から張り出す状態においても、上面視で、分割円環部材5450,5460は本体円環部5410上に配置される。   By inserting the main body plate portion 5451 and the extended support portion 5453 of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 into the recessed portion 5411 formed in this way, the initial state of the main body annular portion 5410 (see FIG. 60). Is formed. Even when the split ring members 5450 and 5460 protrude from the main body ring portion 5410, the split ring members 5450 and 5460 are disposed on the main body ring portion 5410 in a top view.

被検出部材5413は、各分割円環部材5450,5460の下方において、互いに正反対の位置(180度ずれた位置)に配設される。   The member to be detected 5413 is disposed at a position opposite to each other (a position shifted by 180 degrees) below each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460.

調整段部5420は、本体円環部5410の回転軸方向視において、軸中心とした角度位置(位相)ごとに、上側面の高さが変化する態様で構成される。そのため、調整腕部345が調整段部5420のどの面と当たるかによって、開閉部材340の回転が停止する位置が変化する。なお、後述するように、第1分割円環部材5450と、第2分割円環部材5460の一部の上面が調整段部5420と同様の機能を備える。   The adjustment step portion 5420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 5410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step portion 5420 the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts. As will be described later, the upper surfaces of the first divided annular member 5450 and the second divided annular member 5460 have the same functions as the adjustment step portion 5420.

図60及び図61に示すように、調整段部5420は、その上側面が、最も高い高段h0とされる第1面421と、その第1面421よりも一段低い中段h1とされる第2面422と、最も低い低段h2とされる第3面423と、それら各面の周方向端部同士を連結する各連結面と、を主に備える(高段h0、中段h1及び低段h2については図10参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the adjustment step portion 5420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h <b> 0 and a middle step h <b> 1 that is one step lower than the first surface 421. 2 surface 422, the 3rd surface 423 used as the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface which connects the circumferential direction edge parts of each of these surfaces is mainly provided (the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step). For h2, see FIG.

第1分割円環部材5450は、凹設部5411に収容される本体板部5451と、その本体板部5451の上面から上方へ向けて嵩増し形成される嵩増し部5452と、本体板部5451の根本側の径方向端部から本体板部5451の径方向の側面の曲率半径に沿って湾曲して延設される一対の延設支持部5453と、本体板部5451の根本側における最外径部から下方へ延設される調整部5454と、その調整部5454に一端が固定されると共に他端が本体円環部5410に固定され第1分割円環部材5450を凹設部5411の深部へ向けて付勢するコイルスプリングSP51と、を主に備える。   The first divided annular member 5450 includes a main body plate portion 5451 housed in the recessed portion 5411, a bulky portion 5452 formed to increase from the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451, and a main body plate portion 5451. A pair of extended support portions 5453 that are curved and extended along the radius of curvature of the side surface in the radial direction of the main body plate portion 5451 from the radial end portion of the main plate portion 5451, and the outermost portion on the root side of the main body plate portion 5451 An adjustment portion 5454 extending downward from the diameter portion, and one end of the adjustment portion 5454 is fixed to the adjustment portion 5454 and the other end is fixed to the main body ring portion 5410. And a coil spring SP51 that urges toward the main.

本体板部5451及び嵩増し部5452は、径方向の側面が本体円環部5410の内側面および外側面と面位置となる湾曲めんから形成され、第1分割円環部材5450が凹設部5411の最深部まで収容される収容状態(図60参照)において先端部が調整段部5420の連結部分と同一の傾斜角度で形成されると共に滑らかに連結される傾斜面5451aを備える。   The main body plate portion 5451 and the bulking portion 5252 are formed of curved noodles whose radial side faces are located on the inner side surface and the outer side surface of the main body ring portion 5410, and the first divided annular member 5450 is formed in the recessed portion 5411. In the accommodated state (see FIG. 60), the tip end portion is formed at the same inclination angle as the connecting portion of the adjustment step portion 5420 and is provided with an inclined surface 5451a that is smoothly connected.

嵩増し部5452は、傾斜面5451aの反対側に形成され本体円環部5410の周方向に沿って傾斜面5451aに近接するにつれて上昇傾斜する平面である当接面5452aと、上面に形成される平滑上面5452bと、を主に備える。   The bulking portion 5452 is formed on the upper surface of the contact surface 5452a which is a flat surface which is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 5451a and which is inclined upward as it approaches the inclined surface 5451a along the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410. And a smooth upper surface 5452b.

当接面5452aは、第1分割円環部材5450の収容状体において傾斜面5412と対向配置される面である。図60に示すように、傾斜面5412が当接面5452aから遠ざかる態様で上昇傾斜するので、当接面5452aと傾斜面5412との間に窪みが形成される。   The abutting surface 5452 a is a surface that is disposed to face the inclined surface 5412 in the housing of the first divided annular member 5450. As shown in FIG. 60, the inclined surface 5412 rises and tilts away from the contact surface 5452a, so that a recess is formed between the contact surface 5452a and the inclined surface 5412.

平滑上面5452bは、本体円環部5410の軸方向の配置が、調整段部5420の第1面421と同等の配置とされる。そのため、本体円環部5410が回転し、調整腕部345が平滑上面5452bと対向配置される状態で遊技者が操作部材310(図6参照)を押し込み操作したとしても、開閉部材340の回転が平滑上面5452bに規制され、開閉部材340は第1位置状態で維持される。   In the smooth upper surface 5452b, the arrangement of the main body ring portion 5410 in the axial direction is the same as that of the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Therefore, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 (see FIG. 6) in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 rotates and the adjustment arm portion 345 is disposed to face the smooth upper surface 5452b, the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated. The opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by being restricted by the smooth upper surface 5452b.

延設支持部5453は、上下の厚みが、凹設部5411の隙間の上下長さよりも若干短く形成され、延設支持部5453の径方向の太さが、凹設部5411の径方向両端部の凹設部分の太さよりも若干細くされる。   The extension support portion 5453 is formed such that the upper and lower thicknesses are slightly shorter than the vertical length of the gap of the recess portion 5411, and the radial thickness of the extension support portion 5453 is the both end portions in the radial direction of the recess portion 5411. It is made slightly thinner than the thickness of the recessed portion.

これにより、延設支持部5453が、凹設部5411に対して本体円環部5410の径方向および軸方向に位置決めされると共に、周方向に相対移動可能に支持される。   Accordingly, the extended support portion 5453 is positioned in the radial direction and the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 with respect to the recessed portion 5411 and is supported so as to be relatively movable in the circumferential direction.

調整部5454は、本体円環部5410の係止凸部5414と当接しすることで、第1分割円環部材5450の動作を規制する部分である。   The adjustment portion 5454 is a portion that regulates the operation of the first divided annular member 5450 by abutting with the locking convex portion 5414 of the main body annular portion 5410.

第2分割円環部材5460は、嵩増し部5462の上端部が、第1分割円環部材5450の嵩増し部5452のように面で形成されるのではなく辺からなる押し上げ上辺5462bとして形成されることを除いて、第1分割円環部材5450と同様の構成とされる。従って、同様の符号を付して、説明を省略する。   In the second divided annular member 5460, the upper end portion of the increased portion 5462 is not formed as a surface like the increased portion 5452 of the first divided annular member 5450, but is formed as a raised upper side 5462b composed of sides. Except for this, the first split annular member 5450 has the same configuration. Accordingly, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

押し上げ上辺5462bは、本体円環部5410の軸方向の配置が、調整段部5420の第1面421と同等の配置とされる。そのため、開閉部材340が第2位置状態とされ(図13参照)、その後、本体円環部5410が回転された場合に、開閉部材340の調整腕部345が押し上げ上辺5462bの上まで乗り上げることで、開閉部材340を第1位置状態とする事ができる。   The push-up upper side 5462b is arranged in the same manner as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 5420 in the axial arrangement of the main body ring part 5410. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state (see FIG. 13), and then the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is pushed up and rides on the upper side 5462b. The opening / closing member 340 can be in the first position state.

図62(a)及び図62(b)は、図61のLXIIa−LXIIa線における本体円環部5410の部分断面図である。なお、図62(a)では、被検出部材5413の先端が本体円環部5410の最外径部よりも内側に収容された状態が図示され、図62(b)では、被検出部材5413の先端が本体円環部5410の最外径部よりも外側に張り出した状態が図示される。また、図62(a)では、収容状態(図60参照)における各分割円環部材5450,5460の調整部5454が図示され、図62(b)では、調整部5454が係止凸部5414に当接した状態が図示される。   62 (a) and 62 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the main body ring portion 5410 along the line LXIIa-LXIIa in FIG. 62A shows a state in which the tip of the member to be detected 5413 is housed inside the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410. FIG. 62B shows the state of the member to be detected 5413. A state in which the tip protrudes outward from the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 is illustrated. 62A shows the adjusting portion 5454 of each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 in the accommodated state (see FIG. 60). In FIG. 62B, the adjusting portion 5454 is formed on the locking convex portion 5414. The abutted state is illustrated.

図62(a)及び図62(b)に示すように、被検出部材5413は、本体円環部5410上に配設される軸棒に回転可能に軸支され、ねじりバネNB51により本体円環部5410の径方向外方へ向けて付勢されている。例えば、第1分割円環部材5450が収容状態とされる場合には、調整部5454により径方向内側へ戻されるが(図62(a)参照)、第1分割円環部材5450が収容状態から外れて、調整部5454が被検出部材5413の軸棒へ近接動作すると、被検出部材5413の先端部が本体円環部5410の径方向外方へ張り出す(図62(b)参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the detected member 5413 is rotatably supported by a shaft rod disposed on the main body ring portion 5410, and the main body ring is rotated by a torsion spring NB51. The portion 5410 is biased outward in the radial direction. For example, when the first divided annular member 5450 is in the accommodated state, it is returned radially inward by the adjusting portion 5454 (see FIG. 62A), but the first divided annular member 5450 is out of the accommodated state. When the adjusting portion 5454 is moved close to the shaft rod of the detected member 5413, the tip end portion of the detected member 5413 projects outward in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 (see FIG. 62B).

これにより、被検出部材5413の配置を検出することで、本体円環部5410に対して各分割円環部材5450,5460が相対動作しているか否かを判定することができる。なお、本実施形態では、後述するセンサKC51により、被検出部材5413の配置を検出している。   Thereby, by detecting the arrangement of the detected member 5413, it is possible to determine whether or not the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 are moving relative to the main body annular portion 5410. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the detected member 5413 is detected by a sensor KC51 described later.

図63から図65を参照して、本体円環部5410の初期状態における開閉部材340の動作態様について説明する。図63及び図64は、操作デバイス5300の上面図であり、図65は、図64のLXV−LXV線における操作デバイス5300の断面図である。なお、図63及び図64では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図63から図65では、本体円環部5410の初期状態が図示され、図64及び図65は、図63の状態から遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作した後の状態(開閉部材340が第1位置状態から外れた状態)が図示される。   With reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 will be described. 63 and 64 are top views of the operation device 5300, and FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line LXV-LXV in FIG. 63 and 64, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 63 to 65 show the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. FIGS. 64 and 65 show the state after the player pushes the operating member 310 from the state of FIG. 63 (opening / closing member 340). Is a state in which the position is deviated from the first position state).

図65に示すように、本実施形態では、外壁部材301の内壁から内方へ張り出して本体円環部5410の外壁と対向配置され、被検出部材5413を検出することで被検出部材5413の配置を判定する検出センサKC51が配設される。   As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the detected member 5413 is arranged by projecting inward from the inner wall of the outer wall member 301 so as to face the outer wall of the main body annular portion 5410 and detecting the detected member 5413. A detection sensor KC51 for determining whether or not

なお、検出センサKC51は、各分割円環部材5450,5460が終端まで張り出した状態において被検出部材5413を検出溝に収容可能に配置される(図67参照)。また、一対の被検出部材5413のいずれも検出可能に構成されるので、本実施形態において、初期状態から本体円環部5410が180度ずれた姿勢の際に遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作し、被検出部材5413が張り出した場合も、同一の検出センサKC51により検出を行うことが可能である。   The detection sensor KC51 is arranged such that the member to be detected 5413 can be accommodated in the detection groove in a state where each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 extends to the end (see FIG. 67). Further, since both of the pair of detected members 5413 are configured to be detectable, in this embodiment, the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is shifted 180 degrees from the initial state. Even when the member to be detected 5413 protrudes, detection can be performed by the same detection sensor KC51.

図63から図65に示すように、本体円環部5410の初期状態において開閉部材340が第1位置状態から外れて回転動作する場合、開閉部材340は、調整腕部345が各分割円環部材5450,5460の本体板部5451の上面に当接する中間位置状態まで回転動作する(図65参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, when the opening / closing member 340 rotates out of the first position in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 has each of the divided ring members. It rotates to the intermediate position where it abuts on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of 5450 and 5460 (see FIG. 65).

なお、図65に示すように、本実施形態では、本体板部5451の上面に調整腕部345が当接した状態で、開閉部材340とクラッチ部材330とが当接しない。即ち、クラッチ部材の状態は、開閉部材340が第1位置状態となる場合と、中間位置状態となる場合とで変化しない。従って、操作部材310を操作する遊技者に対して操作部材310を介して与えられる反力であるスプリングSP1の付勢力とスプリングSP2の付勢力との合力の値を、開閉部材340が第1位置状態となる場合と中間位置状態となる場合とで同等とすることができる。   As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 are not in contact with the adjustment arm 345 in contact with the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451. That is, the state of the clutch member does not change between when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state and when it is in the intermediate position state. Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 determines the value of the resultant force of the urging force of the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 that is a reaction force applied to the player who operates the operating member 310 via the operating member 310 in the first position. It can be made the same in the case of the state and the case of the intermediate position state.

本実施形態では、本体円環部5410の初期状態において、音声出力装置226や、ランプ表示装置227(図4参照)等が操作部材310を押し込むように報知することは無いように制御される。即ち、図64及び図65に示す状態は、パチンコ機10がなんら報知を行っていない状態で、遊技者が勝手に操作部材310を押し込み操作した結果生じるものである。   In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) and the like do not notify the operation member 310 to be pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. That is, the state shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

図66(a)及び図66(b)は、図65の矢印LXVIa方向視における開閉部材340及び切替装置5400の部分側面図である。なお、図66(a)では、本体円環部5410の初期状態が図示され、図66(b)では、本体円環部5410が初期状態から上面視時計回り(図66(b)左向き)に所定量回転した後の状態が図示される。   66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 66 (a) shows the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, and in FIG. 66 (b), the main body ring portion 5410 is clockwise from the initial state as viewed from above (FIG. 66 (b) leftward). The state after a predetermined amount of rotation is illustrated.

図66(a)に示すように、本体円環部5410が初期状態である場合に開閉部材340が第1位置状態から回転動作すると、調整腕部345が、第1分割円環部材5450の当接面5452aと本体円環部5410の傾斜面5412との間の窪みに収容される。ここで、当接面5452aは、窪みから遠ざかる方向に上昇傾斜するが、その傾斜の度合いが鉛直方向側に寄っている(90度に近い)ので、調整腕部345と当接面5452とが図66(b)左右方向で当接する場合、調整腕部345から第1分割円環部材5450へ図66(b)左右方向に沿った負荷が与えられる。   As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rotates from the first position state when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the adjustment arm portion 345 causes the first split ring member 5450 to abut. It is accommodated in a recess between the contact surface 5542a and the inclined surface 5412 of the main body ring portion 5410. Here, the abutting surface 5452a is inclined upward in the direction away from the depression, but since the degree of the inclination is close to the vertical direction side (close to 90 degrees), the adjustment arm portion 345 and the abutting surface 5452 are 66 (b), when contacting in the left-right direction, a load along the left-right direction in FIG. 66 (b) is applied from the adjustment arm portion 345 to the first divided annular member 5450.

これにより、図66(a)に示す状態から本体円環部5410が上面視時計回り(図66(b)左向き)に回転動作すると、第1分割円環部材5450が調整腕部345に移動を規制されることにより、本体円環部5410に対して第1分割円環部材5450が相対動作する。なお、同様のことが第2分割円環部材5460にも言える。   Accordingly, when the main body ring portion 5410 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 66A in the clockwise direction when viewed from above (leftward in FIG. 66B), the first divided ring member 5450 moves to the adjustment arm portion 345. By being restricted, the first split annular member 5450 relatively moves with respect to the main body annular portion 5410. The same applies to the second divided annular member 5460.

図67は、操作デバイス5300の上面図である。なお、図67では、外壁部材301、重ね部材302及び操作部材310の図示が省略される。また、図67では、本体部材340が中間位置状態とされ、本体円環部5410が係止凸部5414と第1分割円環部材5450の調整部5454とが当接するまで回転した最張出状態が図示される。   FIG. 67 is a top view of the operation device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 67, the main body member 340 is in the intermediate position state, and the main body ring portion 5410 rotates until the locking convex portion 5414 comes into contact with the adjustment portion 5454 of the first split ring member 5450. Is illustrated.

図67に示すように、本体円環部5410の最張出状態において、被検出部材5413が径方向外側へ張り出され、検出センサKC51の検出溝に挿通される。従って、検出センサKC51から出力される信号の変化を確認することにより、本体円環部5410が初期状態の時に操作部材310の操作がされたか否かを判定することができる。   As shown in FIG. 67, in the fully extended state of the main body ring portion 5410, the detected member 5413 extends outward in the radial direction and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC51. Therefore, by confirming the change in the signal output from the detection sensor KC51, it can be determined whether or not the operation member 310 has been operated when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

この判定において、操作部材310の押し下げを検出するセンサの信号の変化のタイミングと、音声出力装置226や、ランプ表示装置227(図4参照)等の報知のタイミングとの照合を行う必要が無いので、操作部材310の誤操作(本体円環部5410が初期状態の時の操作)を容易に検出することができる。また、その検出に用いる制御フローを短縮化できる。   In this determination, there is no need to collate the change timing of the sensor signal for detecting the depression of the operation member 310 with the notification timing of the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. Incorrect operation of the operation member 310 (operation when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state) can be easily detected. Moreover, the control flow used for the detection can be shortened.

図68(a)及び図68(b)は、図67の矢印LXVIIIa方向視における開閉部材340及び切替装置5400の部分側面図である。なお、図68(a)では、図67に示す状態と同時期の状態が図示され、図68(b)では、図68(a)に示す状態から本体円環部5410が上面視時計回り(図68(b)左向き)に更に回転した状態が図示される。   68 (a) and 68 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 68 (a) shows a state at the same time as the state shown in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (b) shows that the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated clockwise (as viewed from above) from the state shown in FIG. 68 (a). A further rotated state is illustrated in FIG.

図68(a)に示すように、開閉部材340が第1分割円環部材5450の本体板部5451の上面に乗り中間位置状態となると、調整腕部345と調整段部5420との間に第1分割円環部材5450が介在する。そのため、第1実施形態で説明した第1演出状態〜第3演出状態の時に再度操作部材310を押し込み操作したとしても、調整腕部345が調整段部5420に当接するまで開閉部材340を回転動作させるという演出を行うことができず、開閉部材340は中間位置状態を維持し続ける。従って、開閉部材340の動作態様を、第1実施形態で説明した動作態様とは異なるようにすることができると共に開閉部材340の動作態様から、大当たりの期待度など遊技者の利益になる情報を読み取ることを不可能にすることができる。これにより、遊技者の利益になる情報を読み取れなくなることを嫌う遊技者が、本体円環部5410が初期状態のときに操作部材310を操作しないように仕向けることができる。   As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rides on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of the first split annular member 5450 and is in the intermediate position, the second opening / closing member 340 is placed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 5420. A one-segment annular member 5450 is interposed. Therefore, even if the operation member 310 is pushed again in the first effect state to the third effect state described in the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated until the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the adjustment step part 5420. The opening / closing member 340 continues to maintain the intermediate position state. Therefore, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from the operation mode described in the first embodiment, and information that is beneficial to the player such as the jackpot expectation can be obtained from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. It can be made impossible to read. Thereby, a player who dislikes that he or she cannot read information that is beneficial to the player can be directed not to operate the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

また、開閉部材340の動作態様を中間位置状態という中途半端な状態とすることで異常な雰囲気を演出し、意図せず操作部材310を誤操作した遊技者に対して、開閉部材340の動作態様を利用して誤操作が行われたことを報知することができる。この場合、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81にエラー表示をする場合と比較して、第3図柄表示装置81での演出を損なわせずに誤操作の有無を報知することができる。   Further, by setting the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 to a halfway state of an intermediate position state, an abnormal atmosphere is produced, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is determined for a player who has accidentally operated the operation member 310 unintentionally. This can be used to notify that an erroneous operation has been performed. In this case, for example, as compared with the case where an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the presence or absence of an erroneous operation can be notified without impairing the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

なお、上述した第1分割円環部材5450による効果は、本体円環部5410の動作タイミングや、動作方向の切替により生じるものでは無い。即ち、本体円環部5410の動作態様を、第1実施形態の本体円環部410の動作態様と変化させる必要はない。従って、本体円環部5410の動作制御の設定自由度を維持することができる。   Note that the above-described effect of the first divided annular member 5450 is not caused by the operation timing of the main body annular portion 5410 or the switching of the operation direction. That is, it is not necessary to change the operation mode of the main body ring portion 5410 from the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 of the first embodiment. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the degree of freedom for setting the operation control of the main body ring portion 5410.

図68(b)に示すように、図67に示す最張出状態から更に本体円環部5410を上面視時計回り(図68(b)左向き)に回転させると、本体円環部5410の係止凸部5414と第1分割円環部材5450の調整部5454との当接により第1分割円環部材5450の本体円環部5410に対する相対移動が規制されることから、第1分割円環部材5450が本体円環部5410に押進され、上面視時計回り(図68(b)左向き)に回転する。   As shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the main body ring portion 5410 is further rotated clockwise from the top surface (leftward in FIG. 68 (b)) from the most extended state shown in FIG. Since the relative movement of the first divided annular member 5450 with respect to the main body annular portion 5410 is restricted by the contact between the stop convex portion 5414 and the adjusting portion 5454 of the first divided annular member 5450, the first divided annular member 5450 is pushed by the main body ring portion 5410 and rotates clockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68 (b) leftward).

ここで、開閉部材340は本体円環部5410の周方向への移動が規制されるので、第1分割円環部材5450が図68(b)左方へ移動するのに伴い調整腕部345が当接面5452aの傾斜に沿って上方へ押し上げられ、調整腕部345は第1分割円環部材5450の平滑上面5452bに当接する。   Here, since the opening / closing member 340 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved as the first divided annular member 5450 moves leftward in FIG. 68 (b). The adjustment arm 345 is pushed upward along the inclination of the abutment surface 5452a, and the adjustment arm portion 345 abuts against the smooth upper surface 5452b of the first divided annular member 5450.

平滑上面5452bは、上述した通り、本体円環部5410の軸方向の配置が調整段部5420の第1面421と同等の位置となるので、図68(b)に示す状態で開閉部材340は第1位置状態となる。従って、遊技者が操作部材310を操作しない限りにおいて、開閉部材340は第1位置状態で維持される。   As described above, the smooth upper surface 5452b has the same position as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420 in the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. It will be in the 1st position state. Therefore, as long as the player does not operate the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state.

また、第1分割円環部材5450の当接面5452aと調整腕部345との当接が解除されることにより、第1分割円環部材5450に与えられる上面視反時計回り(図68(b)右向き)の負荷が解除されるので、第1分割円環部材5450がコイルスプリングSP51(図60参照)の復元力により、凹設部5411の深部まで移動され第1分割円環部材5450が収容状態(図60参照)に復帰する。従って、再度、本体円環部5410が初期状態となる場合には、第1分割円環部材5450は収容状態に戻っているので、別個で第1分割円環部剤5450を復帰させる部材を用意することを不要とすることができる。   Further, when the contact between the contact surface 5452a of the first divided annular member 5450 and the adjustment arm portion 345 is released, it is counterclockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68B). ) To the right), the first split annular member 5450 is moved to the depth of the recessed portion 5411 by the restoring force of the coil spring SP51 (see FIG. 60), and the first split annular member 5450 is accommodated. Return to the state (see FIG. 60). Therefore, when the main body annular portion 5410 is in the initial state again, the first divided annular member 5450 is returned to the accommodated state, and therefore a member for returning the first divided annular member 5450 is prepared separately. It can be made unnecessary.

図69(a)から図69(c)は、図65の矢印LXVIa方向視における切替装置5400及び開閉部材340の側面図である。なお、図69(a)では、本体円環部5410が初期状態とされると共に開閉部材340が中間位置状態とされ、図69(b)では、図69(a)に示す状態から本体円環部5410が上面視反時計回り(図69(b)右向き)に回転した状態が図示され、図69(c)では、図69(b)に示す状態から本体円環部5410が上面視時計回り(図69(c)左向き)に回転した状態が図示される。   69 (a) to 69 (c) are side views of the switching device 5400 and the opening / closing member 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 69 (a), the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state and the opening / closing member 340 is in the intermediate position. In FIG. 69 (b), the main body ring is changed from the state shown in FIG. 69 (a). The state in which the portion 5410 is rotated counterclockwise in the top view (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) is shown. In FIG. 69 (c), the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the top view from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated in the left direction (FIG. 69 (c)) is shown.

図69では、初期状態における操作部材310の操作の影響を、キャンセルするための駆動制御が図示される。即ち、図69(a)に示すように、調整腕部345が本体円環部5410の傾斜面5412と第1分割円環部剤5450の当接面5452aとの間の窪みに挿入された(本体円環部5410の初期状態において操作部材310が押し込み操作された)場合であっても、本体円環部5410を上面視時計回り(図69(c)左向き)に回転させる動作の前に、予め本体円環部5410を上面視反時計回り(図69(b)右向き)に回転させる(第1駆動態様)ことにより、調整腕部345が傾斜面5412に持ち上げられ、開閉部材340が第1位置状態に復帰する。   FIG. 69 illustrates drive control for canceling the influence of the operation of the operation member 310 in the initial state. That is, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the adjustment arm portion 345 is inserted into a recess between the inclined surface 5412 of the main body annular portion 5410 and the abutment surface 5452a of the first divided annular portion agent 5450 ( Even when the operation member 310 is pushed in in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410), before the operation of rotating the main body ring portion 5410 clockwise as viewed from above (FIG. 69 (c) leftward), By previously rotating the main body ring portion 5410 counterclockwise when viewed from above (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) (first driving mode), the adjustment arm portion 345 is lifted to the inclined surface 5412, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the first position. Return to position.

これにより、本体円環部5410が初期状態であるときに意図せず操作部材310を操作した場合において、第3図柄表示装置では、ほぼ大当たり(99%大当たり)の演出(例えば、「プレミア演出」)が表示されているにも関わらず、開閉部材340は異常な動作を行うというパチンコ機10全体として食い違いが生じることを防止することができる。   Thereby, when the operation member 310 is operated unintentionally when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the third symbol display device has a large jackpot (99% jackpot) effect (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole, which performs an abnormal operation.

即ち、現に第3図柄表示装置81で行われる演出の大当たり期待度により、本体円環部5410の回転開始時の挙動を変化可能に構成する。これにより、本体円環部5410の初期状態で操作部材310を操作した場合に、開閉部材340と調整段部5420との間に第1分割円環部剤5450を介在させた状態で演出を行うのか、介在を解除して演出を行うのかの選択を制御装置側で行うことができる。   That is, the behavior at the start of rotation of the main body ring portion 5410 can be changed according to the expectation degree of jackpot of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the operation member 310 is operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the presentation is performed with the first divided ring portion agent 5450 interposed between the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 5420. Or the control device can select whether to cancel the intervention.

なお、ほぼ大当たりの演出を行う場合に限って本体円環部5410を図69で示す第1駆動態様で動作する場合には、中間位置状態となった開閉部材340が予備動作で第1位置状態となることを確認することで、遊技者は、ほぼ大当たりの演出が始まることを前もって知ることができる。   When the main body ring portion 5410 is operated in the first drive mode shown in FIG. 69 only when the big hit effect is performed, the opening / closing member 340 in the intermediate position state is in the first position state in the preliminary operation. By confirming that, the player can know in advance that the performance of the jackpot is almost started.

従って、本体円環部5410の初期状態において、敢えて操作部材310を押し込み、開閉部材340を中間状態とし、予備動作で第1位置状態に戻ることを期待するという遊技の仕方を提供することができる。この場合、開閉部材340の姿勢の変化に遊技者の視線を集めることができ、開閉部材340の注目力を向上させることができる。   Therefore, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, it is possible to provide a game method in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 is set in the intermediate state, and the first operation is expected to return to the first position state. . In this case, the player's line of sight can be gathered in the change in the posture of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

なお、ほぼ大当たりの演出を、極めて低い確率(例えば、1/10000)で生じるように設定することにより、本体円環部5410の初期状態において敢えて操作部材310を押し込むという上述の遊技態様が、長期間継続されることを防止することができる。   In addition, the above-described game mode in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 by setting an almost jackpot effect to occur with a very low probability (for example, 1/10000) is long. It is possible to prevent the period from being continued.

次いで、図70から図77を参照して、第6実施形態について説明する。第4実施形態では、切替装置4500が第1状態とされる場合に操作部材4310を押し込み操作することで開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持される場合を説明したが、第6実施形態における操作デバイス6300は、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作する操作態様により、切替装置4500が第1状態とされる場合に操作部材4310を押し込み操作しても、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されない場合を形成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state by pushing the operation member 4310 when the switching device 4500 is in the first state has been described. In the operation device 6300, the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when the switching device 4500 is in the first state according to an operation mode in which the player operates the operation member 4310. It is possible to form a case that is not. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図70は、図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における第6実施形態における操作デバイス6300の断面図である。図70に示すように、操作デバイス6300は、開閉部材4340の回転軸部付近に、開閉部材4340を覆う移動カバー部材6360が配設されることと、切替装置6500のスライド部材4520の上面に、外押出部材6550と、内押出部材6560とが配設されることとを除いて、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300と同様の構成を備える。なお、図70では、開閉部材4340の回転軸部付近と移動カバー部材6360とにおいてのみ、移動カバー部材6360の本体部材6361の一対の平行な板を通る位置での断面形状が図示される。   FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 70, the operation device 6300 includes a movable cover member 6360 that covers the opening / closing member 4340 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340, and an upper surface of the slide member 4520 of the switching device 6500. Except that the outer push-out member 6550 and the inner push-out member 6560 are disposed, the same configuration as the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is provided. In FIG. 70, only in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360, a cross-sectional shape at a position passing through a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 of the moving cover member 6360 is illustrated.

即ち、操作デバイス6300は、第4実施形態と同様に、外壁部材4301と、重ね部材302と、操作部材4310と、一対の開閉部材4340と、切替装置を動作させる駆動ギア4591の駆動力を発生する駆動モータ4590と、を備えることに加え、開閉部材4340に対して相対動作可能に開閉部材4340に配設される移動カバー部材6360と、開閉部材4340の下方に配置され、開閉部材4340と当接することで開閉部材4340を付勢する状態と、開閉部材4340と当接しない状態とを直進動作により切替可能に構成される切替装置6500と、を主に備える。   That is, the operation device 6300 generates the driving force of the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, the operation member 4310, the pair of opening / closing members 4340, and the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device, as in the fourth embodiment. A drive motor 4590 for moving, a movable cover member 6360 disposed on the opening / closing member 4340 so as to be capable of relative movement with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, and a lower portion of the opening / closing member 4340. It mainly includes a switching device 6500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is biased by contact and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 by a straight-ahead operation.

切替装置6500は、第4実施形態と同様に、土台部材4510と、スライド部材4520と、第1復帰部材4530と、第2復帰部材4540と、ねじりバネNB4と、を備えることに加え、移動カバー部材6360と対向する状態において開閉部材4340が回転動作する事に伴い移動カバー部材6360を外側位置に配置させる外押出部材6550と、移動カバー部材6360と対向する状態において開閉部材4340が第1位置状態に配置されることに伴い移動カバー部材6360を初期位置としての内側位置に配置させる内押出部材6560と、を主に備える。   As in the fourth embodiment, the switching device 6500 includes a base member 4510, a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530, a second return member 4540, and a torsion spring NB4, and a moving cover. When the opening / closing member 4340 rotates in a state of facing the member 6360, the outer push-out member 6550 that places the moving cover member 6360 at the outer position, and in the state of facing the moving cover member 6360, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the first position state. The inner push-out member 6560 that mainly places the movable cover member 6360 at the inner position as the initial position is provided.

図71(a)は、切替装置6500の側面図であり、図71(b)は、図71(a)の矢印LXXIb方向視における切替装置6500の上面図である。   71 (a) is a side view of the switching device 6500, and FIG. 71 (b) is a top view of the switching device 6500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a).

なお、理解を容易にするために、図71(b)に示すように、一対の第1復帰部材4530を結ぶ方向に沿って延設される想像線の直線が、第1復帰部材4530と第2復帰部材4540とを結ぶ方向に等間隔に配置される。また、図71では、土台部材4510の図示が省略される。   In order to facilitate understanding, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), an imaginary straight line extending along the direction connecting the pair of first return members 4530 is connected to the first return member 4530 and the first return member 4530. 2 are arranged at equal intervals in the direction connecting the return member 4540. In FIG. 71, the base member 4510 is not shown.

即ち、図71(b)には、一対の第1復帰部材4530の幅長さ(図71(b)上下方向の寸法)の中心を通る固定側位置線Wrと、一対の第2復帰部材4540の幅長さ中心を通る非固定側位置線Wnと、固定側位置線Wr及び非固定側位置線Wnの中間に配置される復帰位置線Wcと、固定側位置線Wr及び復帰位置線Wcの中間に配置される固定側中間線Wcrと、非固定側位置線Wn及び復帰位置線Wcの中間に配置される非固定側中間線Wcnと、が図示される。   That is, FIG. 71B shows a fixed position line Wr passing through the center of the width of the pair of first return members 4530 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 71B) and the pair of second return members 4540. Of the non-fixed side position line Wn passing through the center of the width length, the return position line Wc disposed between the fixed side position line Wr and the non-fixed side position line Wn, and the fixed side position line Wr and the return position line Wc. A fixed intermediate line Wcr disposed in the middle and a non-fixed intermediate line Wcn disposed in the middle of the non-fixed position line Wn and the return position line Wc are illustrated.

各線Wr,Wn,Wc,Wcr,Wcnは、上面視において開閉部材4340の幅長さ(図70紙面垂直方向の寸法)の中心が配置される目安の線として図示される。   Each line Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn is illustrated as a reference line in which the center of the width length (dimension in the vertical direction of FIG. 70) of the opening / closing member 4340 is arranged in a top view.

即ち、例えば、切替装置6500が、第4実施形態で上述した第1状態とされる場合には、開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心が上面視で固定側位置線Wrに配置される。本実施形態では、開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心が上面視で各線Wr,Wn,Wc,Wcr,Wcnに配置される5種類の停止位置を形成する態様で、スライド部材4520が駆動制御される。   That is, for example, when the switching device 6500 is in the first state described above in the fourth embodiment, the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the fixed-side position line Wr in a top view. In the present embodiment, the slide member 4520 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 forms five types of stop positions arranged on the lines Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. The

外押出部材6550は。上面視において、固定側中間線Wcr、非固定側中間線Wcnに厚み長さ(図71(b)上下方向の長さ)の中心を一致させ、前後(図71(b)左右)に幅広な形状から形成される側面視T字形状の本体部6551と、その本体部6551の上端部において面取り形成される面取り部6552と、を主に備える。   The outer extrusion member 6550 is. When viewed from above, the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr and the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn, and the width is wide in the front and rear (FIG. 71 (b) left and right). A main body portion 6551 having a T-shape in side view formed from the shape and a chamfered portion 6552 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 are mainly provided.

本体部6551の上端部は、開閉部材4340が回転動作する際に、移動カバー部材6360と当接し得る部分である。面取り部6552が上面視の全角部に形成されており、略楕円形状となっているので、スライド部材4520がスライド動作している最中に移動カバー部材6360と外押出部材6550とが当接しても、生じる負荷を開閉部材4340及び移動カバー部材6360が移動可能な方向に逃がすことができるので、構成部材が破損することを防止することができる。   The upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 rotates. Since the chamfered portion 6552 is formed at all corners in a top view and has a substantially elliptical shape, the movable cover member 6360 and the outer push-out member 6550 come into contact with each other while the slide member 4520 is sliding. In addition, since the generated load can be released in a direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, it is possible to prevent the constituent members from being damaged.

なお、外押出部材6550は、開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心が上面視で他の線Wr,Wn,Wcに配置される場合には、開閉部材4340及び移動カバー部材6360と当接しない態様から形成される。   The outer pushing member 6550 does not come into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wc in a top view. Formed from.

内押出部材6560は、上面視において、復帰位置線Wcに厚み長さ(図71(b)上下方向の長さ)の中心を一致させる前後に一対で配置される棒状部材から形成され、上端部から互いに対向する側に延設される延設部を有する側面視L字形状の本体部6561と、その本体部6561の上端部において面取り形成される面取り部6562と、を主に備える。   The inner pushing member 6560 is formed by a pair of rod-like members arranged before and after the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the return position line Wc when viewed from above, and has an upper end portion. The main body portion 6561 having an L-shape in side view and extending portions that extend to opposite sides from each other, and a chamfered portion 6562 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 are mainly provided.

本体部6561の上端部は、開閉部材4340が第1位置状態に配置される際に移動カバー部材6360と当接し得る部分である。面取り部6562が上面視で延設部の先端の全角部に形成されており、丸角となっているのでスライド部材4520がスライド動作している最中に移動カバー部材6360と内押出部材6560とが当接しても、生じる負荷を開閉部材4340及び移動カバー部材6360が移動可能な方向に逃がすことができるので、構成部材が破損することを防止することができる。   The upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed in the first position state. Since the chamfered portion 6562 is formed at all corners at the tip of the extended portion in a top view, and is rounded, the moving cover member 6360 and the inner pushing member 6560 are in the middle of the sliding operation of the sliding member 4520. Even if the contact occurs, the generated load can be released in the direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, so that the constituent members can be prevented from being damaged.

なお、内押出部材6560は、開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心が上面視で他の線Wr,Wn,Wcr,Wcnに配置される場合には、開閉部材4340及び移動カバー部材6360と当接しない態様から形成される。   The inner pushing member 6560 is in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. It is formed from the aspect which does not.

図72を参照して、開閉部材4340と移動カバー部材6360の詳細について説明する。図72(a)は、開閉部材4340の正面図であり、図72(b)は、図72(a)の矢印LXXIIb方向視における開閉部材4340の側面図であり、図72(c)は、移動カバー部材6360の正面図であり、図72(d)は、図72(c)の矢印LXXIId方向視における移動カバー部材6360の側面図であり、図72(e)は、図72(c)の矢印LXXIIe方向視における移動カバー部材6360の上面図である。なお、本実施形態で説明する開閉部材4340と、第4実施形態で説明した開閉部材4340とは同一部材であるが、ここで詳細を説明する。   Details of the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a) is a front view of the opening / closing member 4340, FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member 4340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (d) is a front view of the movable cover member 6360, FIG. 72 (d) is a side view of the movable cover member 6360 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and FIG. 72 (e) is FIG. It is a top view of the movable cover member 6360 in the arrow LXXIIe direction view. Note that the opening / closing member 4340 described in the present embodiment and the opening / closing member 4340 described in the fourth embodiment are the same members, but the details will be described here.

図72(a)及び図72(b)に示すように、開閉部材4340は、第4実施形態と同様に、軸方向視(図72(a)参照)で長尺板状に形成される本体板部341と、支持孔342と、凸設受け部344(図8参照)と、を備えると共に、本体板部341の上端部において相手側の開閉部材4340へ向けて前後方向(図72(a)左右方向)に沿って延設される延設部4343と、本体板部341の下端部において相手側の開閉部材4340と対向する側の反対側へ延設される調整腕部4345と、軸部4301c1の周りに巻き付けられると共に凸設受け部344に係止され開閉部材4340を内方側の位置へ回動させる付勢力を発生するねじりバネNB1(図8参照)と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the opening / closing member 4340 is formed in a long plate shape as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72 (a)), as in the fourth embodiment. A plate portion 341, a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8) are provided, and at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341, the front-rear direction (see FIG. 72 (a ) An extending portion 4343 extending along the left-right direction), an adjusting arm portion 4345 extending to the opposite side of the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341 facing the other opening / closing member 4340, and a shaft And a torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that is wound around the portion 4301c1 and is engaged with the convex receiving portion 344 to generate an urging force that rotates the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward position.

図72(b)に示すように、本体板部341の支持孔342側の端部は、軸方向の厚みが他の部分に比較して薄くされ、厚みの境界に傾斜側面4341aが形成される。傾斜側面4341aは、調整腕部4345の当接面4345aと平行な側面として形成される。   As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end on the support hole 342 side of the main body plate portion 341 is thinner in the axial direction than other portions, and an inclined side surface 4341a is formed at the boundary of the thickness. . The inclined side surface 4341a is formed as a side surface parallel to the contact surface 4345a of the adjustment arm portion 4345.

調整腕部4345は、延設先端部下面に配置される当接面4345aと、延設方向と交差する回転規制面4345bと、を主に備える。   The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

当接面4345aは、切替装置6500の各復帰部材4530,4540と当接し、開閉部材4340の回転動作により各復帰部材4530,4540を押圧する面である。   The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 6500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 4340.

回転規制面4345bは、軸部4301c1側へ向けて凹む湾曲形状から構成される面である。開閉部材4340の第2位置状態(図54参照)において、切替装置4500の復帰部材4530,4540の回転軸を中心とする円弧形状と一致する形状とされる。   The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 54), the opening / closing member 4340 has a shape that coincides with the arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500.

図72(c)から図72(e)に示すように、移動カバー部材6360は、上面視コ字状に形成される本体部材6361と、その本体部材6361の一対の平行な板に長孔状に貫通形成される一対の調整長孔6362と、本体部材6361の一部であって一対の平行な板を連結する連結部6363と、本体部材6361の一対の平行な板の先端から延設される延設腕部6364と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIGS. 72C to 72E, the movable cover member 6360 has a main body member 6361 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above and a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 having a long hole shape. A pair of adjustment long holes 6362 that are formed so as to penetrate, a connecting portion 6363 that is a part of the main body member 6361 and connects the pair of parallel plates, and extends from the tips of the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361. Extending arm 6364 mainly.

本体部材6361は、一対の平行な板の間隔が、開閉部材4340の支持孔342側の端部の厚みと同程度とされ、その上面に平面として形成される位置決め平面6361aを備える。   The main body member 6361 has a positioning flat surface 6361a formed as a flat surface on the upper surface thereof, in which the distance between the pair of parallel plates is approximately the same as the thickness of the end portion on the support hole 342 side of the opening / closing member 4340.

本体部材6361の一対の平行な板と開閉部材4340との間には、組立状態(図70参照)において、静止摩擦力が生じる。そのため、開閉部材4340と本体部材6361とを相対動作させるためには、最大静止摩擦力より大きな負荷が必要とされる。   A static frictional force is generated between the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 and the opening / closing member 4340 in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). Therefore, in order to cause the opening / closing member 4340 and the main body member 6361 to move relative to each other, a load greater than the maximum static frictional force is required.

本実施形態では、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態において配置される側へ向けて付勢するねじりバネNB1(図8参照)の付勢力が、開閉部材4340が第1位置状態(図70参照)とされる場合において、上述した最大静止摩擦力より大きくされ、ねじりバネNB4の付勢力が、ねじりバネNB4の変位が最大とされる場合(図77参照)において、上述した最大静止摩擦力以下となるように、ねじりバネNB1,NB4のバネ定数が設定される。これにより、移動カバー6360が、外押出部材6550や内押出部材6560に押し当てられた際には開閉部材4340に対して擦れて相対動作し、各復帰部材4530,4540に押し当てられた際には開閉部材4340に対して相対動作しないようにすることができる。   In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 toward the side disposed in the second position state causes the opening / closing member 4340 to be in the first position state (see FIG. 70). In the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 is greater than the maximum static friction force described above, and the displacement of the torsion spring NB4 is maximum (see FIG. 77), Thus, the spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set. Thus, when the movable cover 6360 is pressed against the outer push-out member 6550 or the inner push-out member 6560, the movable cover 6360 rubs relative to the opening / closing member 4340 and moves relative to the return member 4530, 4540. Can be prevented from moving relative to the opening / closing member 4340.

位置決め平面6361aは、組立状態(図70参照)において、傾斜側面4341aと当接する面である。位置決め平面6361aと傾斜側面4341aが面接触することにより、移動カバー部材6360の開閉部材4340に対する姿勢ずれが防止される。   The positioning plane 6361a is a surface that comes into contact with the inclined side surface 4341a in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). When the positioning flat surface 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a are in surface contact with each other, the posture deviation of the movable cover member 6360 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented.

調整長孔6362は、位置決め平面6361aと平行な直線に沿って延設されると共に短手方向の長さが支持孔342の直径と同等とされる長孔であり、位置決め平面6361aと傾斜側面4341aが面接触する状態において、軸方向視(図72(c)参照)で支持孔342を内包する位置に配置される。   The adjustment long hole 6362 is a long hole that extends along a straight line parallel to the positioning plane 6361a and whose length in the short direction is equal to the diameter of the support hole 342. The adjustment long hole 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a. In a state of surface contact, the support hole 342 is disposed at a position including the support hole 342 as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72C).

これにより、組立状態(図70参照)において、開閉部材4340と移動カバー部材6360とを共通の軸部4301c1で支持すると共に、開閉部材4340に対して移動カバー部材6360を調整長孔6362の延設方向(傾斜側面4341aの延設方向)に沿って相対移動させることができる。   Thus, in the assembled state (see FIG. 70), the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 are supported by the common shaft portion 4301c1, and the moving cover member 6360 is extended from the opening / closing member 4340 by the adjustment long hole 6362. It can be relatively moved along the direction (the extending direction of the inclined side surface 4341a).

延設腕部6364は、調整長孔6362の延設腕部6364側の端部と開閉部材4340の支持孔342とを軸方向視(図70参照)で同位置に配置した場合に、軸方向視で、調整腕部4345の外形と同形状の外形を有する態様で形成される。例えば、延設腕部6364の下側側面は、位置決め平面6361a及び調整長孔6362と平行な平面として形成される。   The extended arm portion 6364 is axially disposed when the end portion of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extended arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). It is formed in such a manner that it has the same outer shape as that of the adjustment arm portion 4345 when viewed. For example, the lower side surface of the extended arm portion 6364 is formed as a plane parallel to the positioning plane 6361 a and the adjustment slot 6362.

そのため、例えば、調整長孔6362の延設腕部6364側の端部と開閉部材4340の支持孔342とを軸方向視(図70参照)で同位置に配置した場合(図70参照)には、開閉部材4340を回転動作させることで各復帰部材4530,4540と当接する際に、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345と各復帰部材4530,4540とが直接当接することとなり、間に移動カバー部材6360が介在する態様とは異なる。以下において、移動カバー部材6360が開閉部材4340と各復帰部材4530,4540との間に介在する場合について説明する。   Therefore, for example, when the end of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extending arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position (see FIG. 70) (see FIG. 70). When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to come into contact with the return members 4530 and 4540, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the open / close member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 come into direct contact with each other. This is different from the mode in which 6360 is interposed. Hereinafter, a case where the moving cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 will be described.

図73は、操作デバイス6300の上面図であり、図74及び図75は、図73のLXXIV−LXXIV線における操作デバイス6300の断面図である。なお、図73では、外壁部材4301、重ね部材302及び操作部材4310が想像線で図示される。また、図73では、切替装置6500の固定側中間線Wcrが上面視で開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心と一致する固定側中間状態が図示され、図74では、開閉部材4340の第1位置状態が図示され、図75では、開閉部材4340の第2位置状態が図示される。   73 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIGS. 74 and 75 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. In FIG. 73, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 73 illustrates a fixed-side intermediate state in which the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and in FIG. 74, the first position of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 75, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

本実施形態では、図73に示す状態において、音声出力装置226や、ランプ表示装置227(図4参照)等が操作部材4310を押し込むように報知することは無いように制御される。即ち、図75に示す状態は、パチンコ機10がなんら報知を行っていない状態で、遊技者が勝手に操作部材4310を押し込み操作した結果生じるものである。   In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 73, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), etc. do not notify the operation member 4310 to be pushed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 75 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 4310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

図74及び図75に示すように、操作部材4310の押し込みがあり、開閉部材4340が第1位置状態から回転動作することに伴い、外押出部材6550と移動カバー部材6360の連結部6363とが当接し、移動カバー部材6360が内側位置から外側位置へ向けて押進される。この押進により、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態まで回転した場合には、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置に配置される(図75参照)。   As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, when the operating member 4310 is pushed and the opening / closing member 4340 rotates from the first position, the outer push-out member 6550 and the connecting portion 6363 of the movable cover member 6360 are in contact with each other. In contact therewith, the movable cover member 6360 is pushed from the inner position toward the outer position. When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to the second position by this pushing, the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position (see FIG. 75).

なお、遊技者が押し下げ操作を止め、図75に示す状態から操作部材4310が上方へ復帰し、開閉部材4340が第1位置状態に戻ったとしても、移動カバー部材6360を内側へ戻す力は生じないので、移動カバー部材6360の配置は、外側位置で維持される。   Even if the player stops the push-down operation, the operation member 4310 returns upward from the state shown in FIG. 75, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state, a force to return the movable cover member 6360 to the inside is generated. Therefore, the arrangement of the moving cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

ここで、移動カバー部材6360が開閉部材4340の回転軸を通る直線上を移動するので、移動カバー部材6360の移動により、開閉部材4340の回転方向に生じる負荷が変化することを防止することができる。これにより、操作部材4310を介して遊技者に与えられる反力が変化することを防止できるので、操作部材4310から与えられる反力の変化により、遊技者が、切替装置6500の状態が固定側中間状態であると認識することを困難とすることができる。   Here, since the moving cover member 6360 moves on a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 4340, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 4340 from changing due to the movement of the moving cover member 6360. . Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 4310 can be prevented from changing, so that the player can change the state of the switching device 6500 between the fixed side and the change by the reaction force applied from the operation member 4310. It can be difficult to recognize that it is in a state.

図76は、操作デバイス6300の上面図であり、図77は、図76のLXXVII−LXXVII線における操作デバイス6300の断面図である。なお、図76では、外壁部材4301、重ね部材302想像線で図示され、操作部材4310の図示が省略される。また、図76では、切替装置6500の固定側位置線Wcが上面視で開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心と一致する第1状態が図示され、図77では、開閉部材4340の第2位置状態が図示される。   76 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. In FIG. 76, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are shown by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not shown. 76 shows a first state in which the fixed side position line Wc of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and FIG. 77 shows a second position state of the opening / closing member 4340. Is illustrated.

なお、図76及び図77では、図75に示すように切替装置6500が固定側中間状態の内に操作部材4310が操作された後で、切替装置6500の復帰位置線Wcが上面視で開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心と一致する第2状態を経由せず切替装置6500が第1状態とされた場合が図示される。そのため、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置で維持される。   76 and 77, after the operating member 4310 is operated while the switching device 6500 is in the fixed intermediate state as shown in FIG. 75, the return position line Wc of the switching device 6500 is an opening / closing member in a top view. The case where the switching device 6500 is set to the first state without passing through the second state that coincides with the center of the width length of 4340 is illustrated. Therefore, the movable cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

図77に示すように、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置に配置された状態で操作部材4310が操作され、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となっても、第1復帰部材4530の移動軌跡上に移動カバー部材6360が依然として配置され、開閉部材4340と第1復帰部材4530との間に移動カバー部材6360が介在するので、開閉部材4340が第1復帰部材4530から負荷を受け続けることとなる。   As shown in FIG. 77, even when the operation member 4310 is operated with the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position and the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, the first return member 4530 remains on the movement locus. Since the movable cover member 6360 is still disposed and the movable cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530, the opening / closing member 4340 continues to receive a load from the first return member 4530.

即ち、移動カバー部材6360が内側位置に配置されるか、外側位置に配置されるかによって、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となった際に姿勢を固定される場合と(図54参照)、移動カバー部材6360が介在し依然として第1復帰部材4530からの反力を受け続ける場合とを生じさせることができる。   That is, when the opening / closing member 4340 is fixed in the second position state depending on whether the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position or the outer position (see FIG. 54), The case where the movable cover member 6360 is interposed and still receives the reaction force from the first return member 4530 can be caused.

換言すれば、切替装置6500が固定側中間位置に配置され押し込みの報知が無い状態で、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作するか否かにより、切替装置6500の状態は第1状態で同じであるにも関わらず、遊技者の操作部材4310の操作に伴う開閉部材4340の動作態様を変化させることができる。また、この変化は、遊技者を混乱させることにつながる変化である。このことについて、以下で説明する。   In other words, the state of the switching device 6500 is the same as that in the first state depending on whether or not the player operates the operation member 4310 in a state where the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification. Nevertheless, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 by the player. This change is a change that leads to confusion for the player. This will be described below.

本実施形態における操作デバイス6300は、操作部材4310を押し込み操作した時の開閉部材4340の動作態様により、遊技者の利益となる情報を報知するものである。開閉部材4340の動作態様は切替装置6500の状態により切り替えることが可能とされるので、遊技者の利益となる情報と対応して切替装置6500の状態を切り替えるように駆動モータ4590が駆動され、切替装置6500の状態が制御される。なお、本実施形態では、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高い場合に開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持され易くなるように、切替装置6500が制御される。   The operation device 6300 in the present embodiment notifies information that is beneficial to the player by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 when the operation member 4310 is pushed in. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be switched depending on the state of the switching device 6500, the drive motor 4590 is driven so as to switch the state of the switching device 6500 in accordance with information that is beneficial to the player. The state of the device 6500 is controlled. In the present embodiment, the switching device 6500 is controlled so that the opening / closing member 4340 is easily maintained in the second position when the degree of jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

ここで、切替装置6500の第1状態は、移動カバー部材6360が内側位置(初期位置)に配置されていれば、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態とされることに伴い開閉部材4340が第2位置状態に維持される(図54参照)状態である。一方、切替装置6500の第3状態(図56から図58参照)では、開閉部材4340は第2位置状態に維持されず、操作部材4310の上昇に伴って第1位置状態に復帰する。従って、遊技者は、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態に復帰するか否かにより、切替装置6500の状態の違いを把握でき、その状態の違いから、制御側が意図した通りの期待度としての利益を、遊技者が理解することができる(第1状態における大当たり期待度>第3状態における大当たり期待度)。   Here, in the first state of the switching device 6500, if the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position (initial position), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position as the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state. This is a state maintained in the position state (see FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the third state of the switching device 6500 (see FIGS. 56 to 58), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and returns to the first position state as the operation member 4310 is raised. Therefore, the player can grasp the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 based on whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the second position state, and the profit as the expectation degree as intended by the control side is determined from the difference in the state. Can be understood by the player (expected degree of jackpot in the first state> expected degree of jackpot in the third state).

しかし、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置に配置される場合、切替装置6500が第1状態とされていても、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されず、操作部材4310の上昇に伴い第1位置状態に復帰するので、切替装置6500が第3状態とされる場合と区別が付かず、開閉部材4340の動作態様から切替装置6500の状態を判定することが困難となる。そのため、遊技者が開閉部材4340の動作態様を視認することにより得られる利益が低減される。   However, when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, even when the switching device 6500 is in the first state, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and the first operation is performed as the operation member 4310 is raised. Since it returns to the position state, it cannot be distinguished from the case where the switching device 6500 is in the third state, and it is difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced.

また、図77に示す状態では、開閉部材4340の回転量に伴って第1復帰部材4530が回転し、その回転角度に応じて増大するねじりバネNB4の反力が、遊技者に与えられる。これは、切替装置6500が第3状態とされる場合(図56から図58参照)に遊技者に与えられる反力と、絶対値および変化態様の面で同等であるので、遊技者に与えられる反力から切替装置6500の状態を判定することが困難となる。そのため、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作する際の反力に意識を集中させ反力の違いを識別することにより得られる利益が低減される。   In the state shown in FIG. 77, the first return member 4530 rotates in accordance with the rotation amount of the opening / closing member 4340, and the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4 that increases in accordance with the rotation angle is given to the player. This is given to the player because the reaction force applied to the player when the switching device 6500 is in the third state (see FIGS. 56 to 58) is equivalent in terms of absolute value and change mode. It becomes difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the reaction force. Therefore, the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force when the player operates the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force is reduced.

換言すれば、切替装置6500が固定側中間位置に配置され押し込みの報知が無い状態で、操作部材4310を操作しなければ、遊技者は、開閉部材4340の動作態様を視認することで得られる利益を維持することができる。また、遊技者に操作部材4310を介して与えられる反力に意識を集中させ反力の違いを識別することにより得られる利益を維持することができる。これにより、押し込みの報知が無い状態で遊技者が操作部材4310を押し込み操作することを抑制することができる。   In other words, if the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification, and if the operation member 4310 is not operated, the player can obtain the profit obtained by visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Can be maintained. Further, it is possible to maintain the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force given to the player through the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force. Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the operation member 4310 in the state where there is no notification of pushing.

なお、図77に示す状態から、切替装置6500を第2状態とすることで、外側位置に配置される移動カバー部材6360が内押出部材6560から内向きに負荷を受け、内側位置に押進される(図70参照)。即ち、内押出部材6560は、軸方向視(図70参照)において、調整腕部4345の延設方向の端部と、内押出部材6560の端部とが同一線上で重なる態様から形成される。従って、遊技者が操作部材4310を操作することにより移動カバ−部材6360が外側位置に配置された場合であっても、切替装置6500が第2状態を経由してから第1状態となることで、遊技者の操作の影響をキャンセルすることができる。   77, when the switching device 6500 is set to the second state, the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position receives an inward load from the inner pushing member 6560 and is pushed to the inner position. (See FIG. 70). That is, the inner pushing member 6560 is formed in such a manner that the end in the extending direction of the adjusting arm portion 4345 and the end of the inner pushing member 6560 overlap on the same line when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). Accordingly, even when the moving cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position by operating the operation member 4310 by the player, the switching device 6500 goes into the first state after passing through the second state. The influence of the player's operation can be canceled.

これにより、切替装置6500が固定側中間状態であるときに意図せず操作部材4310を操作した場合において、第3図柄表示装置では、ほぼ大当たり(99%大当たり)の演出(例えば、「プレミア演出」)が表示されているにも関わらず、開閉部材4340は期待度の低い動作(第2位置状態で維持されない動作)を行うというパチンコ機10全体として食い違いが生じることを防止することができる。   Thereby, when the operation member 4310 is operated unintentionally when the switching device 6500 is in the fixed-side intermediate state, the third symbol display device has an effect of almost jackpot (99% jackpot) (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 4340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole that performs an operation with a low degree of expectation (an operation that is not maintained in the second position state).

即ち、現に第3図柄表示装置81で行われる演出の大当たり期待度により、切替装置6500が固定側中間状態に配置された後の切替装置6500の挙動を変化可能に構成する。これにより、切替装置6500が固定側中間状態で操作部材4310を操作した場合に、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置に配置された状態で操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出を行うのか、移動カバー部材6360の配置を内側位置にした後で操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出を行うのか、の選択を制御装置側で行うことができる。   In other words, the behavior of the switching device 6500 after the switching device 6500 is arranged in the fixed intermediate state is configured to be changeable according to the jackpot expectation of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, when the switching device 6500 operates the operation member 4310 in the fixed intermediate state, the moving cover member 6360 performs an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed in a state where the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position. It is possible to select on the control device side whether or not an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed is performed after the position of is set to the inner position.

例えば、操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出を行う前に切替装置6500が固定側中間状態とされた後で、操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出の直前に第2状態を経由して切替装置6500を第1状態とする動作態様(第1駆動態様)で動作させることで、移動カバー部材6360が外側位置に配置されていた場合にも内側位置に復帰させた後で、操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出を行うことができる。   For example, after the switching device 6500 is set to the fixed-side intermediate state before performing the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed, the switching device 6500 is switched via the second state immediately before the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed. By operating in the first mode of operation (first driving mode), even when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, the operation member 4310 is pushed after being returned to the inner position. Production can be performed.

なお、別動作として、切替装置6500の非固定側中間線Wcnが上面視で開閉部材4340の幅長さの中心と一致する非固定側中間状態とされた後、操作部材4310の押し込みを促す演出の直前に第2状態を経由して切替装置6500を第3状態とする動作態様(第1駆動態様に対して駆動モータ4590の回転方向を逆転させた動作態様)を切替装置6500が備えることで、切替装置6500が第1駆動態様で動作したことの、動作音や機械振動による把握を困難とすることができる(遊技者が、動作音を聞いたり、パチンコ機10(図1参照)の枠を介して伝わる振動を感じたりすることにより切替装置6500が第1駆動態様で動作していることに気付くことを困難とすることができる)。   As another operation, after the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn of the switching device 6500 is set to the non-fixed-side intermediate state that coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 when viewed from above, an effect that prompts the operation member 4310 to be pushed in. The switching device 6500 is provided with an operation mode (an operation mode in which the rotation direction of the drive motor 4590 is reversed with respect to the first drive mode) in which the switching device 6500 is set to the third state via the second state immediately before. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp the operation sound or mechanical vibration of the switching device 6500 operating in the first drive mode (the player can hear the operation sound or the frame of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). It can be difficult to notice that the switching device 6500 is operating in the first drive mode by feeling the vibration transmitted through.

これにより、切替装置6500の状態の違いに対応した大当たり期待度の情報を、操作部材4310を押し込むことなく把握することを困難とすることができる。即ち、操作部材4310の操作に伴い動作する開閉部材4340の動作態様を視認しないと、切替装置6500の状態の違いを把握できないようにすることができる。従って、操作部材4310を操作した後の開閉部材4340の状態に対する注目力を向上させることができ、遊技者に操作部材4310を操作するように仕向けることができる。   As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the jackpot expectation information corresponding to the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 without pressing the operation member 4310. That is, the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 cannot be grasped unless the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 that operates in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 is visually recognized. Therefore, attention to the state of the opening / closing member 4340 after operating the operation member 4310 can be improved, and the player can be directed to operate the operation member 4310.

上述したように、第6実施形態では、押し込みを促す報知が無い場合に操作部材4310を押し込み操作すると、開閉部材4340の動作態様が変化し、開閉部材4340から得られる情報が減るように構成されるので、遊技者に報知通りの操作を行うように仕向けることができる。   As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured such that when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when there is no notification for pushing, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 changes, and the information obtained from the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced. Therefore, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

また、報知を無視した操作部材4310の押し込みがあろうが、無かろうが、開閉部材4340の動作態様を遊技者が有益な情報を得られるようにできる制御も混ぜることで、報知を無視して操作部材4310が操作された後においても、開閉部材4340に対する注目力を維持することができる。   In addition, whether or not the operation member 4310 is pushed while ignoring the notification, the notification is ignored by mixing the operation mode of the opening and closing member 4340 with a control that enables the player to obtain useful information. Thus, even after the operation member 4310 is operated, it is possible to maintain the attention to the opening / closing member 4340.

また、押し込みを促す報知が無い場合に操作部材4310を操作しても遊技者に操作部材4310から与えられる反力は変化しないので、開閉部材4340の動作態様を故意に無視して好きなタイミングで操作部材4310を操作する遊技者に、押し込み操作時に反力が変わることによる違和感を与えることを防止できる。   Further, even if the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification for pushing, the reaction force applied to the player from the operation member 4310 does not change, so the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is intentionally ignored at a desired timing. It is possible to prevent the player who operates the operation member 4310 from feeling uncomfortable due to the reaction force changing during the push-in operation.

次いで、図78から図92を参照して、第7実施形態について説明する。第3実施形態では、操作部材310を押し込む距離により、開閉部材340が回転動作する場合と、回転動作しない場合とを形成可能とする場合を説明したが、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300は、操作デバイス7300を操作する期間により、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持される場合と、第2位置状態で維持されず第1位置状態に復帰する場合とが形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 92. In the third embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated depending on the distance by which the operation member 310 is pushed is described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment Depending on the period during which the operation device 7300 is operated, there are formed a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state and returns to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図78及び図79は、図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300の断面図である。図78及び図79では、切替装置7500が、後述する第1状態とされる。また、図78では、開閉部材4340の第1位置状態が図示され、図79では、開閉部材4340の第2位置状態が図示される。   78 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 78 and 79, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 78, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 79, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

本実施形態における操作デバイス7300は、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300の構成を部分的に流用する一方で、遊技者が直接操作する操作カバー7320に対して操作部材4310が相対移動可能に構成されることが大きく異なる。   The operation device 7300 in the present embodiment is configured such that the operation member 4310 is relatively movable with respect to the operation cover 7320 that is directly operated by the player while partially using the configuration of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Is very different.

即ち、操作デバイス7300は、第4実施形態と同形状の開閉部材4340を備えると共に、内部機構を一部視認させることで操作デバイス7300自体に演出効果を持たせる機能を有しており、逆カップ形状の底中心部に開口301aを有して形成されると共に正面枠14(図5参照)との間に切替装置7500等の動作装置を収容する態様で正面枠14に固定される外壁部材7301と、その外壁部材7301の高さ方向幅を短縮した形状から形成され底中心部に開口301aと同軸で若干直径が大きく形成される開口7302aを有すると共に外壁部材7301との間に内部空間を形成する態様で重ねて固定される重ね部材7302と、開口301a,7302aに挿通され外壁部材7301と重ね部材7302とで形成される内部空間により移動を制限される部材であって光透過性材料から構成される皿形状の操作部材4310と、操作部材4310に覆設される操作カバー7320と、外壁部材7301に支持されると共に操作部材4310の操作量に伴って傾倒動作可能に構成される一対の開閉部材4340と、その開閉部材4340の下方に配置され遊技者が操作部材4310から手を離した後も開閉部材4340を第2位置状態で維持可能な状態と、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態で維持不能な状態とを切替可能に構成される切替装置7500と、その切替装置7500を動作させる駆動ギア4591の駆動力を発生する駆動モータ4590と、を主に備える。   That is, the operation device 7300 includes an opening / closing member 4340 having the same shape as that of the fourth embodiment, and has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 7300 itself by partially viewing the internal mechanism. The outer wall member 7301 is formed to have an opening 301a at the bottom center of the shape and is fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operation device such as the switching device 7500 is accommodated between the front frame 14 (see FIG. 5). The outer wall member 7301 has an opening 7302a that is formed in a shape with a reduced width in the height direction and that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter, and an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 7301 and the outer wall member 7301. And an internal space formed by the outer wall member 7301 and the overlapping member 7302 inserted through the openings 301a and 7302a. The plate-shaped operation member 4310 made of a light transmissive material, the operation of which is restricted by the operation member 4310, the operation cover 7320 covered by the operation member 4310, and the operation member 4310 supported by the outer wall member 7301. And a pair of opening / closing members 4340 configured to be tiltable according to the amount of operation, and the opening / closing member 4340 disposed below the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state even after the player releases his / her hand from the operation member 4310. The switching device 7500 configured to be able to switch between the state that can be maintained in the state and the state that the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained in the second position state, and the drive that generates the driving force of the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device 7500 And a motor 4590.

外壁部材7301は、開口301aと、凹設部301bと、一対の支持腕部4301cと、傾倒防止腕部4301dと、を第4実施形態における外壁部材4301と同様に備えると共に外壁部材4301と同等の外形寸法を有し、加えて、開口301aの内側において支持腕部4301cの上端位置が下降して形成され、支持腕部4301cに軸支される断面くの字形状の押し上げ部材7301eと、凹設部301bの底部に穿設される貫通孔7301fと、その貫通孔7301fの下方に配設される検出センサKC71と、を主に備える。   The outer wall member 7301 includes an opening 301a, a recessed portion 301b, a pair of support arm portions 4301c, and a tilt prevention arm portion 4301d in the same manner as the outer wall member 4301 in the fourth embodiment, and is equivalent to the outer wall member 4301. In addition, the upper end position of the support arm portion 4301c is formed at the inner side of the opening 301a so as to be lowered, and is formed in a U-shaped push-up member 7301e that is pivotally supported by the support arm portion 4301c. It mainly includes a through hole 7301f drilled in the bottom of the portion 301b and a detection sensor KC71 disposed below the through hole 7301f.

支持腕部4301cは、本実施形態の方が、第4実施形態に比較して幅寸法が長くされる、これにより、押し上げ部材7301eを軸支する領域を確保できると共に、上面視における切替装置7500の視認性を悪化させることができる。従って、操作部材4310を通して切替装置7500の状態を把握することで満足し、操作部材4310の操作は行わないという遊技の方法を抑制することができる。   The support arm 4301c is longer in width in the present embodiment than in the fourth embodiment, so that a region for supporting the push-up member 7301e can be secured and the switching device 7500 in a top view can be secured. Visibility can be deteriorated. Therefore, it is satisfied by grasping the state of the switching device 7500 through the operation member 4310, and the game method of not operating the operation member 4310 can be suppressed.

押し上げ部材7301eは、操作カバー7320を押し下げ操作することに伴って、姿勢変化する部材である。なお、操作カバー7320との関係の詳細は後述する。   The push-up member 7301e is a member that changes its posture as the operation cover 7320 is pushed down. Details of the relationship with the operation cover 7320 will be described later.

重ね部材7302の開口7302aは、操作カバー7320が第4実施形態の操作部材4310に比較して大径に形成されることに対応して、開口302aよりも大径に形成される。   The opening 7302a of the overlapping member 7302 is formed to have a larger diameter than the opening 302a corresponding to the operation cover 7320 having a larger diameter than the operation member 4310 of the fourth embodiment.

操作カバー7320は、操作部材4310に覆設されると共に光透過性の材料から逆カップ形状に形成される部材であって、操作部材4310の外径よりも若干大きな内径を有する逆カップ形状の本体部7321と、その本体部7321の内周面から軸中心側へ向けて凸設される凸設部7322と、本体部7321の開口先端から外径方向に円環形状を構成する態様で延設されその延設先端から更に下方へ延設されるフランジ部7323と、そのフランジ部7323の下端部から内径方向に延設される規制部7324と、その規制部7324から外壁部材7301の貫通孔7301fに挿通可能に延設される検出部7325と、を主に備える。   The operation cover 7320 is a member that is covered with the operation member 4310 and is formed in a reverse cup shape from a light-transmitting material, and has a reverse cup-shaped main body having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the operation member 4310. A portion 7321, a protruding portion 7322 that protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 7321 toward the axial center side, and an annular shape extending from the opening tip of the main body portion 7321 in the outer diameter direction. A flange portion 7323 extending further downward from the extending tip, a restricting portion 7324 extending in the inner diameter direction from the lower end portion of the flange portion 7323, and a through hole 7301 f of the outer wall member 7301 from the restricting portion 7324. And a detection unit 7325 extending so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

凸設部7322は、操作部材4310との間に配設されることで、操作部材4310と操作カバー7320との接触面積を減少させる部分である。これにより、操作部材4310が操作カバー7320に対して擦れ動作しやすくなる(相対移動し易くなる)。   The protruding portion 7322 is a portion that reduces the contact area between the operation member 4310 and the operation cover 7320 by being arranged between the operation member 4310 and the operation member 4310. As a result, the operation member 4310 easily rubs against the operation cover 7320 (it becomes easy to move relative).

フランジ部7323の下方への延設長さは、操作部材4310の外側延設部313の厚みよりも長く形成され、規制部7324は、外側延設部313の下方に配置される。即ち、操作部材4310の上下動作を規制する負荷が解除された場合、操作部材4310は、外側延設部313が規制部7324に乗る位置まで、下降動作する態様で構成される。   The downward extending length of the flange portion 7323 is formed longer than the thickness of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310, and the restricting portion 7324 is disposed below the outer extending portion 313. That is, when the load that restricts the vertical movement of the operation member 4310 is released, the operation member 4310 is configured to move downward to a position where the outer extending portion 313 rides on the restriction portion 7324.

検出部7325は、操作カバー7320が押し込まれず、上端位置に配置される場合には検出センサKC71から外れ、操作カバー7320が押し込み操作された後には、検出センサKC71の検出溝に挿通される(図79参照)。これにより、操作カバー7320が押し込み操作されているか否かを制御操作側が認識することができる。   The detection unit 7325 is detached from the detection sensor KC71 when the operation cover 7320 is not pushed in and is disposed at the upper end position, and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC71 after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in (FIG. 79). Thereby, the control operation side can recognize whether or not the operation cover 7320 has been pushed.

図79では、操作部材4310が、操作カバー7320に対する移動範囲の下端に配置された状態が図示される。操作部材4310が図79に示す配置とされた場合に、初めて開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となる。換言すれば、操作部材4310が図79に示す配置とされない場合(例えば、図78参照)には、操作カバー7320をいくら押し込み操作しても、開閉部材4340は第2位置状態とはならない。そこで、以下では、図79に示す操作部材4310の状態(移動範囲の下端に配置された状態)を操作部材4310の許容状態と称し、その他の状態を操作部材4310の規制状態と称する。   FIG. 79 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range with respect to the operation cover 7320. When the operation member 4310 is arranged as shown in FIG. 79, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state for the first time. In other words, when the operation member 4310 is not arranged as shown in FIG. 79 (see, for example, FIG. 78), the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state no matter how much the operation cover 7320 is pushed. Therefore, in the following, the state of the operation member 4310 shown in FIG. 79 (the state disposed at the lower end of the movement range) is referred to as an allowable state of the operation member 4310, and the other state is referred to as a restricted state of the operation member 4310.

なお、本実施形態では、操作部材4310に対して押し上げ部材7301eからの負荷が生じている場合には、操作部材4310は規制状態とされ、操作部材4310に対する押し上げ部材7301eからの負荷が解除されると、操作部材4310が重力の作用で下降するように構成される。   In this embodiment, when a load from the push-up member 7301e is generated on the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is in a restricted state, and the load from the push-up member 7301e on the operation member 4310 is released. Then, the operation member 4310 is configured to descend by the action of gravity.

図80及び図81を参照して、操作カバー7320を押し込み操作する際の、操作部材4310の状態の変化について説明する。図80(a)、図80(b)、図81(a)及び図81(b)は、図78のLXXXa―LXXXa線における操作デバイス7300の部分断面図である。なお、図80(a)では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の上端位置に配置された状態が、図80(b)では、操作カバー7320が所定量押し込み操作された状態が、図81(a)では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の下端位置に配置された状態が、図81(b)では、図81(a)の状態から所定期間経過した後の状態が図示される。なお、理解を容易とするために、検出センサKC71及び検出部7325の図示が省略される。   With reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, a change in the state of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in will be described. FIG. 80A, FIG. 80B, FIG. 81A, and FIG. 81B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line LXXXa-LXXXa in FIG. In FIG. 80A, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the moving range is shown, and in FIG. 80B, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is pushed by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. FIG. 81 (b) shows a state where the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, and FIG. 81 (b) shows a state after a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 81 (a). Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

図80及び図81に示すように、押し上げ部材7301eは、付勢バネにより上向きに付勢され、図80(a)に示す状態において、操作部材4310に重力による負荷を越える大きさの押し上げ負荷を与える。即ち、図80(a)に示す状態は、押し上げ部材7301eが操作部材4310を下支えすることにより維持されている。   As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the push-up member 7301e is urged upward by the urging spring, and in the state shown in FIG. 80A, the push-up load having a magnitude exceeding the load due to gravity is applied to the operation member 4310. give. That is, the state shown in FIG. 80A is maintained by the push-up member 7301e supporting the operation member 4310.

図80(b)は、操作カバー7320に対して操作部材4310を下支えする限界位置として図示される。即ち、操作カバー7320が更に下降動作すると、押し上げ部材7301eが規制部7324に押し下げられ、押し上げ部材7301eが操作部材4310から離される。   FIG. 80B is illustrated as a limit position for supporting the operation member 4310 with respect to the operation cover 7320. That is, when the operation cover 7320 further moves down, the push-up member 7301e is pushed down by the restricting portion 7324, and the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310.

図81(a)では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の下端位置に配置されている一方で、押し上げ部材7301eが操作部材4310から離間した状態(下方へ離れた状態)とされる。この状態では、押し上げ部材7301eから操作部材4310へ負荷が与えられないので、操作部材4310は自重で徐々に下降動作する。   In FIG. 81A, the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, while the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310 (a state separated downward). In this state, since no load is applied from the push-up member 7301e to the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is gradually lowered by its own weight.

図81(b)に示すように、操作部材4310の下降動作は、操作部材4310の外側延設部313が規制部7324に乗る位置で停止する。この図81(b)に示す状態が、操作部材4310の許容状態となる(図79参照)。   As shown in FIG. 81 (b), the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 stops at a position where the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 gets on the restriction portion 7324. The state shown in FIG. 81B is an allowable state of the operation member 4310 (see FIG. 79).

即ち、本実施形態では、操作カバー7320を押し込んだ後、所定期間経ってから開閉部材4340が第2位置状態とされることになる。そのことについて、図82及び図83を参照して説明する。   That is, in this embodiment, after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state after a predetermined period. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

図82及び図83は、図47のXLVIII−XLVIII線に対応する線における操作デバイス7300の断面図である。図82及び図83では、切替装置7500が、後述する第1状態とされる。なお、図82は、図81(a)で図示した状態に相当し、図83は、図81(b)で図示した状態に相当する。また、図83では、開閉部材4340の第2位置状態が図示される。   82 and 83 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 82 and 83, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 82 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81A, and FIG. 83 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81B. FIG. 83 shows the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340.

図82では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の下端まで押し込み操作されているものの、開閉部材4340は依然として第1復帰部材4530から負荷を受けている(第1復帰部材4530の移動軌跡上に開閉部材4340が配置されている)。そのため、図82に示す状態で遊技者が操作カバー7320から手を離すと、操作カバー7320及び操作部材4310が上端位置へ復帰してしまい、開閉部材4340は第1位置状態へと復帰する。   In FIG. 82, although the operation cover 7320 has been pushed to the lower end of the movement range, the opening / closing member 4340 is still receiving a load from the first return member 4530 (the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the first return member 4530). Is placed). Therefore, when the player releases his hand from the operation cover 7320 in the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation cover 7320 and the operation member 4310 return to the upper end position, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

一方、図82に示す状態から、一定期間(本実施形態では、約3秒間)押し込みを維持すると、操作部材4310が操作カバー7320に対して下降し、図83に示すように開閉部材4340が第2位置状態とあれる。従って、遊技者が、短期間の操作で操作カバー7320を操作するか、長期間(約3秒以上)の操作で操作カバー7320を操作するかのどちらか一方でのみ、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となるようにすることができる。   On the other hand, if the push-in is maintained for a certain period (about 3 seconds in this embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation member 4310 descends with respect to the operation cover 7320, and the opening / closing member 4340 is moved to the first position as shown in FIG. There is a two-position state. Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

図84は、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材4310の配置の計時変化を示した図であり、図85は、操作カバー7320を短期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材4310の配置の計時変化を示した図である。   FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time. FIG. 85 shows the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

まず、図84について説明する。図84の上側のグラフが、操作カバー7320の配置の計時変化(上端位置か下端位置か)を示しており、図84の下側のグラフが操作部材4310の配置の計時変化を示している。なお、上側のグラフの上下長さと、下側のグラフの上下長さとは対応するものでは無い(下側のグラフの方が、上下に圧縮された関係にある)。また、図84の下側のグラフでは、規制状態が、黒丸で図示される操作部材4310の移動範囲の上端位置から、白丸で図示される操作部材の移動範囲の下端位置に到達する直前の位置までの範囲として図示される。   First, FIG. 84 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation cover 7320 (upper position or lower end position), and the lower graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation member 4310. Note that the vertical length of the upper graph and the vertical length of the lower graph do not correspond to each other (the lower graph has a vertically compressed relationship). Further, in the lower graph of FIG. 84, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating range of the operating member illustrated by a white circle from the upper end position of the operating range of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle. It is illustrated as a range up to.

図84に示す切替装置7500の第1状態では、開閉部材4340が切替装置7500の第1復帰部材4530と対向配置されるので、操作部材4310が許容状態となることは、即ち、操作カバー7320の押し込み時に開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となることを意味する。従って、図84において、下側のグラフが許容状態である場合には、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態であることを意味する。   In the first state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 84, since the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be allowed, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 84, when the lower graph is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

図84に示した通り、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作すると、所定期間(本実施形態では3秒間)経過後、操作部材4310が許容状態となる。従って、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作することにより、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態とすることができる。   As shown in FIG. 84, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long period of time, the operation member 4310 is allowed after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Therefore, the opening / closing member 4340 can be brought into the second position state by pushing the operation cover 7320 for a long time.

次に、図85について説明する。なお、上下のグラフは図84と同様の事項を示す。図85に示した通り、操作カバー7320の押し込みが短期間(本実施形態では、3秒未満の、約1秒間)であると、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の上端位置に配置される度に、押し上げ部材7301eにより操作部材4310が押し上げられることから、操作部材4320が許容状態とならない。これは、短期間操作を繰り返し行う(連打操作)においても同様である。   Next, FIG. 85 will be described. The upper and lower graphs show the same items as in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period (less than 3 seconds in this embodiment, about 1 second), each time the operation cover 7320 is placed at the upper end position of the movement range, Since the operation member 4310 is pushed up by the push-up member 7301e, the operation member 4320 is not allowed. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

従って、切替装置7500が第1状態とされる場合、操作カバー7320を長期間押すことで操作部材4310が許容状態となる一方、操作カバーを短期間押す操作および連打操作では操作部材4310が許容状態とならず、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態にならないように形成される。   Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is set to the first state, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be in an allowable state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time, while the operation member 4310 is in an allowable state for an operation of pressing the operation cover for a short period of time and repeated operations. The opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be in the second position state.

このように、切替装置7500の配置はそのままで、操作カバー7320の操作態様により開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となるか、否かを変化させることができるので、例えば、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となる方が、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いという演出において、遊技者に報知通りの操作をするように仕向けることができる。   In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. In the effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level in the position state, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

即ち、切替装置7500が第1状態とされ、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高い変動において、「ボタンを長押しせよ」という報知を音声出力装置226や、ランプ表示装置227(図4参照)等が行う場合、遊技者が操作カバー7320を長く押せば(図84参照)、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となり、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者が把握できるが、報知を無視して短く押したり、連打したりする場合には、開閉部材4340は第2位置状態とはならず、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者は把握できない。   In other words, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) notify that “Press and hold the button”. When the player presses the operation cover 7320 for a long time (see FIG. 84), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, and the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the notification is ignored and the button is pressed or repeatedly hit, the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state, and the player cannot grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

この場合、報知を無視して操作カバー7320を操作すると、せっかく操作をしても、遊技者が得られる情報量が減るため、損をすることになる。従って、遊技者に、得られる情報量として損をしない操作方法として、報知通りの操作を行うように仕向けることができる。   In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

なお、大当たり期待度に係る情報を遊技者が一切得たくないと考える場合には、操作カバー7320を一切操作しないことにより、その目的を達成することができる。   If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

次いで、図86を参照して、切替装置7500について説明する。図86(a)は、切替装置7500の上面図であり、図86(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における切替装置7500の側面図であり、図86(c)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIc方向視における切替装置7500の正面図である。なお、図86では、土台部材4510の図示が省略されている。   Next, the switching device 7500 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a) is a top view of the switching device 7500, FIG. 86 (b) is a side view of the switching device 7500 in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. It is a front view of the switching apparatus 7500 in the arrow LXXXVIc direction view of Fig.86 (a). In FIG. 86, the base member 4510 is not shown.

切替装置7500は、土台部材4510(図78参照)と、スライド部材4520と、前後一対の部材が左右に2組配設される第1復帰部材4530と、2組の第1復帰部材4530の間を均等に分割する位置に配設される第2復帰部材7540と、スライド部材4520の前後端部から上方へ延設される一対の柱部材7550と、を主に備える。   The switching device 7500 includes a base member 4510 (see FIG. 78), a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530 in which two pairs of front and rear members are disposed on the left and right, and between the two sets of first return members 4530. Are mainly provided with a second return member 7540 that is disposed at a position that equally divides the slide member 4520 and a pair of pillar members 7550 that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the slide member 4520.

第2復帰部材7540は、本体部4541と、回転規制部4542と、その回転規制部4542が形成される側の反対側の端部において本体部4541に形成される傾斜面部7543と、を主に備える。   The second return member 7540 mainly includes a main body portion 4541, a rotation restricting portion 4542, and an inclined surface portion 7543 formed on the main body portion 4541 at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed. Prepare.

傾斜面部7543は、スライド部材4520がスライド動作した際に、第2復帰部材7540と、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345とが、動作方向と直交する面同士で衝突し破損することを防止するための傾斜面が形成される部分であり、少なくとも、本体部4541の端部から、開閉部材4340の調整腕部4345と当接し得る範囲に亘って形成される。なお、第4実施形態と異なり、本体部4541の左右両側に形成される。   The inclined surface portion 7543 prevents the second return member 7540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340. Unlike the fourth embodiment, the main body portion 4541 is formed on both left and right sides.

図87は、操作デバイス7300の上面図である。なお、図87では、外壁部材7301、重ね部材7302、想像線で図示され、カバー部材7320及び操作部材4310の図示が省略される。また、図87では、切替装置7500の第3状態が図示される。   FIG. 87 is a top view of the operation device 7300. In FIG. 87, the outer wall member 7301, the overlapping member 7302, and the imaginary line are shown, and the cover member 7320 and the operation member 4310 are not shown. In FIG. 87, a third state of the switching device 7500 is shown.

なお、切替装置7500の第3状態との記載で、スライド部材4520の開閉部材4340に対する一の配置を表現する。ここで、第3状態において、スライド部材4520は、開閉部材4340と左側(図87左側)の第1復帰部材4530とが対向配置される。また、図78に示した切替装置7500の第1状態では、スライド部材4520は、開閉部材4340と右側(図87右側)の第1復帰部材4530とが対向配置される。   Note that the description of the third state of the switching device 7500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the third state, in the slide member 4520, the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 on the left side (left side in FIG. 87) are arranged to face each other. In the first state of switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 78, slide member 4520 has opening / closing member 4340 and first return member 4530 on the right side (right side in FIG. 87) arranged to face each other.

上述したように、切替装置7500の第1状態と第3状態とでは、開閉部材4340が対向するのは同様に第1復帰部材4530であるが、第1状態と第3状態とでは、押し上げ部材7301eの状態が異なる。即ち、図87に示すように、切替装置7500の第3状態では、押し上げ部材7301eは柱部材7550に当接され、姿勢変化する。このことについて、図88を参照して説明する。   As described above, in the first state and the third state of the switching device 7500, the opening and closing member 4340 is similarly opposed to the first return member 4530. However, in the first state and the third state, the push-up member The state of 7301e is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the push-up member 7301e is brought into contact with the column member 7550 and changes its posture. This will be described with reference to FIG.

図88(a)及び図88(b)は、図87のLXXXVIIIa―LXXXVIIIa線における操作デバイス7300の部分断面図である。なお、図88(a)では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の上端位置に配置された状態が図示され、図88(b)では、操作カバー7320が移動範囲の下端位置まで押し下げ操作された状態が図示される。なお、理解を容易とするために、検出センサKC71及び検出部7325の図示が省略される。   88A and 88B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 88A shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 88B shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 has been pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range. Illustrated. Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

図89及び図90は、図87のLXXXIX−LXXXIX線における操作デバイス7300の断面図である。なお、図89では、図88(a)に対応した状態が図示され、図90では、図88(b)に対応した状態が図示される。   89 and 90 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXIX-LXXXIX in FIG. 87. 89 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 90 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (b).

図88(a)及び図89に示すように、切替装置7500の第3状態では、柱部材7550が、押し上げ部材7301eと当接し傾倒した姿勢とされることで、押し上げ部材7301eと操作部材4310とが離間し、押し上げ部材7301eから操作部材4310への負荷が解除される。   As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 89, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the column member 7550 is in a tilted position in contact with the push-up member 7301e, so that the push-up member 7301e and the operation member 4310 are , And the load on the operating member 4310 from the push-up member 7301e is released.

このとき、操作カバ−7320を押し込み操作しても押し上げ部材7301eからの負荷が遊技者に与えられないので、操作カバー7320の配置に伴って(操作量に伴って)、操作カバー7320を介して遊技者に与えられる反力の大きさは、切替装置7500が第1状態の時に生じる反力とは異なる大きさになる。   At this time, even if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, a load from the push-up member 7301e is not given to the player, so that the operation cover 7320 is arranged (with the operation amount) via the operation cover 7320. The magnitude of the reaction force given to the player is different from the reaction force generated when the switching device 7500 is in the first state.

押し上げ部材7301eからの負荷が解除されることにより、操作部材4310は自重で下降し、操作カバー7320に対する下端位置で停止する(図89参照)。即ち、操作部材4310が予め、許容状態の予備的な状態を形成するので、操作カバー7320が押し下げ操作された後、即座に、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態とすることができる(図88(b)及び図90参照)。   When the load from the push-up member 7301e is released, the operation member 4310 descends by its own weight and stops at the lower end position with respect to the operation cover 7320 (see FIG. 89). That is, since the operation member 4310 forms a preliminary state in an allowable state in advance, the opening / closing member 4340 can be immediately brought into the second position state after the operation cover 7320 is pushed down (FIG. 88 ( b) and FIG. 90).

操作部材4310は、操作により上下動作する操作カバー7320の内側を上下に移動する。この移動方向は、遊技者が、操作カバー7320を視認する視線の方向(鉛直方向)に沿ったものなので、操作部材4310が操作カバー7320に対して相対動作したことを認識し難くすることができる。   The operation member 4310 moves up and down inside the operation cover 7320 that moves up and down by operation. Since this moving direction is along the line of sight (vertical direction) in which the player visually recognizes the operation cover 7320, it is difficult to recognize that the operation member 4310 has moved relative to the operation cover 7320. .

なお、本実施形態では、開閉部材4340を介して操作部材4310に上向きに与えられるねじりバネNB1,NB4の付勢力が、開閉部材4340及び各復帰部材4530,4540の動作範囲内において操作部材4310の自重よりも小さくなるように、ねじりバネNB1,NB4のバネ定数が設定される。これにより、ねじりバネNB1,NB4の付勢力により、操作部材4310の下降動作が妨害されることを防止することができる。   In this embodiment, the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 applied upward to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 causes the operation member 4310 to move within the operating range of the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540. The spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set so as to be smaller than the own weight. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 from being obstructed by the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4.

また、本実施形態では、切替装置7500が第3状態のときに、操作カバー7320が長期間(約3秒以上)押仕込み操作されることを契機に、駆動モータ4590が切替装置7500の第2状態(開閉部材4340と第2復帰部材7540とが対向する状態)へ向けて駆動するように制御される。従って、図90の状態が維持されると(操作カバー7320が3秒以上押されると)、操作カバー7320から手を離した際に開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されなくなる。   In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the drive motor 4590 is pushed in for a long period (about 3 seconds or longer) and the drive motor 4590 is switched to the second state of the switching device 7500. Control is performed so as to drive toward a state (a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 face each other). Therefore, when the state of FIG. 90 is maintained (when the operation cover 7320 is pressed for 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state when the hand is released from the operation cover 7320.

従って、遊技者が、短期間の操作で操作カバー7320を操作するか、長期間(約3秒以上)の操作で操作カバー7320を操作するかのどちらか一方でのみ、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となるようにすることができる。   Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

図91は、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材4310の配置の計時変化を示した図であり、図92は、操作カバー7320を短期間押し込み操作した場合における操作部材4310の配置の計時変化を示した図である。   FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a change in time-position of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, and FIG. 92 is a view of the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

まず、図91について説明する。図91の上側のグラフが操作カバー7320の配置の計時変化(上端位置か下端位置か)を示しており、図91の中間位置のグラフが操作部材4310の配置(規制状態か許容状態か)の計時変化を示しており、図91の下側のグラフが駆動モータ4590の駆動状態を示している。なお、上側のグラフの上下長さと、中間位置のグラフの上下長さとは対応するものでは無い(中間位置のグラフの方が、上下に圧縮された関係にある)。また、図91の中間位置のグラフでは、規制状態が、黒丸で図示される操作部材4310の移動範囲の上端位置から、白丸で図示される操作部材の移動範囲の下端位置に到達する直前の位置までの範囲として図示される。   First, FIG. 91 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 91 shows the time variation (upper end position or lower end position) of the arrangement of the operation cover 7320, and the intermediate position graph in FIG. 91 shows the arrangement of the operation member 4310 (whether it is in a restricted state or an allowed state). The time change is shown, and the lower graph in FIG. 91 shows the drive state of the drive motor 4590. Note that the upper and lower lengths of the upper graph and the upper and lower lengths of the intermediate graph do not correspond to each other (the intermediate graph is more vertically compressed). Further, in the intermediate position graph of FIG. 91, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating member movement range illustrated by the white circle from the upper end position of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle. It is illustrated as a range up to.

図91に示す切替装置7500の第3状態では、開閉部材4340が切替装置7500の第1復帰部材4530と対向配置されるので、操作部材4310が許容状態となることは、即ち、操作カバー7320の押し込み時に開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となることを意味する。従って、図91において、中間位置のグラフが許容状態である場合には、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態であることを意味する。   In the third state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 91, the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, so that the operation member 4310 is in the permitted state, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 91, when the graph of the intermediate position is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

図91に示した通り、操作カバー7320を押し込み操作すると、その押し込み操作完了とほぼ同時に開閉部材4340が第2位置状態となる。そして、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作すると、所定期間(本実施形態では3秒間)の押し込みを検出センサKC71が検出することにより、駆動モータ4590が動作し、切替装置7500の状態が開閉部材4340と第2復帰部材7540とが対向配置される状態へ向けて変化する。従って、操作カバー7320を長期間押し込み操作することにより、開閉部材4340の第2維持状態を維持できなくなる。   As shown in FIG. 91, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state almost simultaneously with the completion of the pushing operation. When the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the detection sensor KC71 detects pushing for a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment), whereby the drive motor 4590 is operated, and the state of the switching device 7500 is changed to the opening / closing member 4340. And the second return member 7540 change toward a state where they are arranged to face each other. Therefore, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the second maintenance state of the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained.

次に、図92について説明する。なお、各グラフは図91と同様の事項を示す。   Next, FIG. 92 will be described. Each graph shows the same items as in FIG.

図92に示した通り、操作カバー7320の押し込みが短期間であると、検出センサKC71に操作カバー7320を所定期間押し込み操作したと検出されないので、駆動モータ4590は駆動されず、切替装置7500の第3状態が維持され、開閉部材4340を第2位置状態で維持することができる。これは、短期間操作を繰り返し行う(連打操作)においても同様である。   As shown in FIG. 92, if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period, the detection sensor KC71 does not detect that the operation cover 7320 has been pushed in for a predetermined period. Therefore, the drive motor 4590 is not driven, and the switching device 7500 The three states are maintained, and the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

従って、切替装置7500が第3状態とされる場合、操作カバー7320を短期間押す操作および連打操作をすることで開閉部材4340を第2位置状態に維持できる一方、操作カバー7320を長期間押す操作では開閉部材4340を第2位置状態で維持できないように形成される。   Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a short period of time and continuously striking, while pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time. Then, the opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be maintained in the second position state.

このように、切替装置7500の配置はそのままで、操作カバー7320の操作態様により開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されるか、否かを変化させることができるので、例えば、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持される方が、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いという演出において、遊技者に報知通りの操作をするように仕向けることができる。   In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. The player who is maintained in the second position state can be directed to perform the operation as informed to the player in the effect that the expected degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level.

即ち、切替装置7500が第1状態とされ、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高い変動において、「ボタンを連打せよ」という報知を音声出力装置226や、ランプ表示装置227(図4参照)等が行う場合、遊技者が操作カバー7320を連打すれば(図92参照)、開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持され、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者が把握できるが、報知を無視して長期間押し込み操作する場合には、操作カバー7320から遊技者が手を離した後に開閉部材4340は第2位置状態に維持されず、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者は把握できない。   That is, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, a notification that “please hit the button repeatedly” is given as an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. When the player hits the operation cover 7320 repeatedly (see FIG. 92), the player can grasp that the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the push operation is performed for a long time ignoring the notification, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state after the player releases the hand from the operation cover 7320, and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. The player cannot grasp this.

この場合、報知を無視して操作カバー7320を操作すると、せっかく操作をしても、遊技者が得られる情報量が減るため、損をすることになる。従って、遊技者に、得られる情報量として損をしない操作方法として、報知通りの操作を行うように仕向けることができる。   In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

なお、大当たり期待度に係る情報を遊技者が一切得たくないと考える場合には、操作カバー7320を一切操作しないことにより、その目的を達成することができる。   If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

本実施形態では、切替装置7500が第1状態とされる場合には、押し込み操作により開閉部材4340が第2位置状態になったら大当たり期待後が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者が把握でき(図84及び図85参照)、切替装置7500が第3状態とされる場合には、押し込み操作により開閉部材4340が第2位置状態になった後(操作方法に寄らず第2位置状態にはなる。その後)、遊技者が操作カバー7320から手を離した後も開閉部材4340が第2位置状態で維持されていて初めて、大当たり期待度が一定の水準よりも高いことを遊技者が把握できる(図91及び図92参照)。   In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state, the player can grasp that the expected value after the jackpot is higher than a certain level when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the pushing operation. (See FIGS. 84 and 85) When the switching device 7500 is in the third state, after the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the push-in operation (regardless of the operation method, the second position state is not reached). After that, the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level only when the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the operation cover 7320. (See FIGS. 91 and 92).

このように、報知通りの操作に対する開閉部材4340の動きに変化を付けることにより、操作デバイス7300に対する注目力を維持させることができ、遊技者に飽きられないようにすることができる。   In this manner, by changing the movement of the opening / closing member 4340 with respect to the operation as informed, attention to the operation device 7300 can be maintained, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

なお、本実施形態では、第2復帰部材7540から2組の第1復帰部材4530までの距離が同じとされることから、開閉部材4340と第2復帰部材7540とが対向配置される状態から第1状態を形成するまでの駆動モータ4590の動作量と、開閉部材4340と第2復帰部材7540とが対向配置される状態から第3状態を形成するまでの駆動モータ4590の動作量とは、逆向きで同量である。即ち、同様の動作速度で、同期間作動させることで切替装置7500を第1状態または第3状態とすることができる。従って、駆動モータ4590の動作音や振動から、遊技者に切替装置75000の状態を予想されることを防止することができ、操作カバー7320を押し込むことへの遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。   In the present embodiment, since the distance from the second return member 7540 to the two sets of first return members 4530 is the same, the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged in a state opposite to each other. The operation amount of the drive motor 4590 until the first state is formed is opposite to the operation amount of the drive motor 4590 from the state where the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged to face each other until the third state is formed. Same amount in direction. That is, the switching device 7500 can be set to the first state or the third state by operating at the same operation speed for the same period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the state of the switching device 75000 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 4590, and to improve the player's interest in pushing the operation cover 7320. .

以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。   Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

上記各実施形態において、一の実施形態における構成の一部または全部を、他の実施形態における構成の一部または全部の構成と組み合わせて或いは置き換えて、別の実施形態としても良い。   In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

上記第1実施形態では、開閉部材340の調整腕部345と調整段部420の第3面423とが対向配置される状態において、開閉部材340を第1位置状態から回転動作させた後で、本体円環部410を回転動作させることにより、一対の開閉部材340を同時に第1位置状態へ復帰可能とされる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、第3面423の代わりに第2面422が形成されても良い。この場合、一対の開閉部材340が第2位置状態とされた後で、同時に第1位置状態に復帰する動作を行わせることができる。   In the first embodiment, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 are arranged to face each other, after the opening / closing member 340 is rotated from the first position state, Although the case where the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be simultaneously returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 410 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second surface 422 may be formed instead of the third surface 423. In this case, after the pair of opening / closing members 340 are in the second position state, an operation of returning to the first position state can be performed at the same time.

上記第1実施形態では、開閉部材340の調整腕部345が調整段部420の第3面423と対向した状態で回転動作され、開閉部材340の側面と、操作部材310の内側面とが面当たりする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材310の内壁に凹設部が形成され、その凹設部に開閉部材340から凸設される凸部が嵌り込むようにしても良い。この場合、操作部材310を下端位置で維持し易くすることができる。   In the first embodiment, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is rotated while facing the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420, and the side surface of the opening / closing member 340 and the inner surface of the operation member 310 are surfaces. Although the case where it hits was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, a concave portion may be formed on the inner wall of the operation member 310, and a convex portion protruding from the opening / closing member 340 may be fitted into the concave portion. In this case, the operation member 310 can be easily maintained at the lower end position.

上記第1実施形態では、係合爪343の鉤形状の内側の面の延設方向に延設される直線が軸部323を通過しない場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、係合爪343の鉤形状の内側の面の延設方向に延設される直線が軸部323を通過するようにしても良い。この場合、開閉部材340が第1位置状態とされる場合において、係合爪343に延設部333から与えられる負荷の方向と、係合爪343の動作方向とを正反対(同一直線上反対)の方向とすることができるので、効果的に開閉部材340のぐらつきを抑制することができる。   In the first embodiment, the case where the straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook-shaped inner surface of the engaging claw 343 does not pass through the shaft portion 323 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook shape of the engaging claw 343 may pass through the shaft portion 323. In this case, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state, the direction of the load applied from the extending portion 333 to the engagement claw 343 and the operation direction of the engagement claw 343 are opposite (on the same straight line). Therefore, the wobbling of the opening / closing member 340 can be effectively suppressed.

上記第1実施形態では、調整段部420の第1面421と第2面422との連結部分が直線的に傾斜する坂から形成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、径方向視において2次直線的に湾曲する湾曲面により形成されても良い。この場合、本体円環部410を等速で回転させながら、開閉部材340の回転動作に加速度をつけることができる。   In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting portion between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420 is formed from a slope that is linearly inclined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, it may be formed by a curved surface that is secondarily linearly curved when viewed in the radial direction. In this case, acceleration can be applied to the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 while rotating the main body ring portion 410 at a constant speed.

なお、湾曲の態様は特に限定されるものでは無い。例えば、本体円環部410の低位置よりも高位置の方が、水平方向に対する接線の傾斜が深くなるように湾曲しても良い。この場合、開閉部材340を外側に付勢するねじりバネNB1からの負荷が小さくなる場合(開閉部材340が第2位置状態側に配置される場合)に開閉部材340の復帰速度を大きくし(復帰方向に与える負荷を大きくし)、ねじりバネNB1からの負荷が大きくなる場合(開閉部材340が第1位置状態側に配置される場合)に開閉部材340の復帰速度を小さく(復帰方向に与える負荷を小さく)することができる。これにより、開閉部材340の復帰時に、開閉部材340に本体円環部410から与えられる負荷の均一化を図ることができる。   In addition, the aspect of curvature is not specifically limited. For example, the main ring portion 410 may be curved so that the tangent slope with respect to the horizontal direction is deeper at the higher position than at the lower position. In this case, when the load from the torsion spring NB1 that urges the opening / closing member 340 to the outside is reduced (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the second position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is increased (reset). When the load from the torsion spring NB1 increases (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the first position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is reduced (load applied in the return direction). Can be reduced). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 340 is restored, the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 from the main body ring portion 410 can be made uniform.

上記、第1実施形態では、本体円環部410は、操作部材310を遊技者が押し込み操作するか否かに関わらず、一定の動作で制御される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材310を押し込み操作したか否かを検出し、それに基づいて本体円環部410の動作態様を変化させても良い。この場合、操作手段310を、遊技者の意思と選択とで、押し込み操作させるという遊技性を構成することができる。例えば、第3図柄表示手段からは、規定回数(例えば、5回)だけ、「押せ」という報知がされ、遊技者は、それ以下の規定回数(例えば、2回)だけ、押し込み操作を許可されるという条件の下で、何回目に押し込むかで、把握できる大当たり期待度の大きさが変わるという設定とすることで、遊技者が、自分の意思と選択とで、操作部材310を押し込むタイミングを決められる。この場合に、例えば、1回目や2回目の報知期間に、2度、操作部材310を押し込むと、開閉部材340が回転する確率は高いが、開閉部材340が回転した場合の大当たり期待度は低めに設定され、1回目または2回目の報知期間に、1度、操作部材310が押し込まれた上で、3から5回目の報知期間に操作部材310を1度押し込むと、開閉部材340が回転する確率は低いが、開閉部材340が回転した場合の大当たり期待度は高めに設定され、また、3〜5回目の報知期間に、2度、操作部材310を押し込み、2度目の押し込みで開閉部材340が回転動作する確率は極めて低いが、開閉部材340が回転した場合の大当たり期待度は非常に高くなるように設定される。これにより、大当たり期待度にはそれほど興味が無く、開閉部材340の動作をみたい遊技者は、1回目や2回目の報知で操作部材310の操作を完了することで、欲求を満足できるし、開閉部材340の動作から大当たり期待度を予想したい遊技者は、3〜5回目の報知期間に操作部材310を操作することで、欲求を満足することができる。即ち、遊技者の、開閉部材340等の演出に合わせて動作する部材を大当たり期待度に関わらずとにかく動かして賑やかに遊技したいという第1の要求と、その第1の要求とは異なる、開閉部材340が動くのは大当たり期待度が大きい時のみにして欲しいという第2の要求とを、遊技者の意思と選択とにより満たすことができる。   In the first embodiment described above, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is controlled by a constant operation regardless of whether or not the player pushes the operation member 310 is described, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, it may be detected whether or not the operation member 310 has been pushed in, and the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 may be changed based on the detection. In this case, it is possible to configure a game property in which the operation means 310 is pushed by the player's intention and selection. For example, from the third symbol display means, a notification of “press” is made for a specified number of times (for example, 5 times), and the player is allowed to perform a pushing operation for a specified number of times (for example, 2 times). Under the condition that the player can push the operation member 310 with his / her own intention and selection by setting the expectation of jackpot expectation to change depending on how many times it is pushed. It is decided. In this case, for example, if the operation member 310 is pushed twice during the first or second notification period, the probability of the opening / closing member 340 rotating is high, but the expectation for jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is low. When the operation member 310 is pushed once in the first or second notification period, and the operation member 310 is pushed once in the third to fifth notification periods, the opening / closing member 340 rotates. Although the probability is low, the expectation of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be high, and the operation member 310 is pushed twice in the third to fifth notification periods, and the opening / closing member 340 is pushed by the second pushing. However, the probability of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be very high. Thereby, the player who is not interested in the jackpot expectation degree and wants to operate the opening / closing member 340 can satisfy the desire by completing the operation of the operation member 310 by the first or second notification, and can open / close the opening / closing member. A player who wants to predict the degree of jackpot expectation from the operation of the member 340 can satisfy the desire by operating the operation member 310 during the third to fifth notification periods. In other words, the first request that the player wants to play a lively game regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the first request is different from the first request. The second requirement that the 340 only move when the jackpot expectation is high can be met by the player's will and choice.

上記第5実施形態では、押し込み報知が無い場合に遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、被検出部材5413が検出センサKC51に検出される場合を説明したが、同様に、第6実施形態においても、押し込み報知が無い場合に遊技者が操作部材4310を押し込み操作したことを検出するセンサを設けても良い。   In the fifth embodiment, the case where the detected member 5413 is detected by the detection sensor KC51 when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no push notification has been described. Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, Alternatively, a sensor may be provided that detects that the player has pushed the operation member 4310 when there is no push notification.

上記第5実施形態では、報知が無い時に遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作すると、開閉部材340が特殊な動作を行う場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、土台部材320の内部にソレノイドが収容され、そのソレノイドの駆動により本体棒部331が下方に引き込み動作されるものでも良い。この場合、遊技者が操作部材310を繰り返し押し込み操作する場合に、クラッチ部材330の当接部332と、操作部材310の凸設部312とが、繰り返し衝突することを防止することができ、当接部332及び凸設部312の耐久性を向上させることができる。   In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 performs a special operation when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no notification has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, when the player repeatedly pushes the operation member 310, the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 and the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 can be prevented from repeatedly colliding, The durability of the contact portion 332 and the protruding portion 312 can be improved.

また、本体棒部331ごと下方に引き込むのではなく、クラッチ部材330の当接部332のみを本体棒部331の内部に埋没する態様で変位させても良い。この場合、凸設部312と当接部332との衝突を避けながら、開閉部材340を第1位置状態で維持することができる。なお、当接部332を本体棒部331の内部に埋没させる方法としては、ソレノイドで引き込む態様や、ノック式ボールペンの機構を利用する態様等が例示される。   Further, instead of pulling down the main body bar portion 331 downward, only the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 may be displaced so as to be buried in the main body bar portion 331. In this case, the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained in the first position while avoiding a collision between the protruding portion 312 and the contact portion 332. Note that examples of the method of burying the contact portion 332 in the main body bar portion 331 include a mode of drawing with a solenoid, a mode of using a mechanism of a knock-type ballpoint pen, and the like.

上記第5実施形態では、操作部材310の操作により回転動作した開閉部材340が第1分割円環部材5450に負荷を与え、開閉部材340から与えられる負荷で本体板部5451が移動する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、報知期間外での操作部材310の操作が検出されることで駆動するソレノイドにより本体板部5451が移動するようにしても良い。これにより、例えば、開閉部材340の調整腕部345が調整段部5420の傾斜する連結面(例えば、第1面421と第2面422とをつなぐ傾斜面)と対向する状態で操作部材310が操作され、開閉部材340が回転動作することにより連結面と調整腕部345とが衝突することを防止することができる。従って、調整腕部345が傾斜面と衝突して、開閉部材340の回転方向に対して斜めの方向に沿って調整腕部345に負荷が与えられ、調整腕部345の耐久性が低下することを防止することができる。   In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotated by the operation of the operation member 310 applies a load to the first divided annular member 5450 and the main body plate portion 5451 moves by the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion 5451 may be moved by a solenoid that is driven by detecting the operation of the operation member 310 outside the notification period. Thereby, for example, the operation member 310 is in a state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 faces the connecting surface (for example, the inclined surface connecting the first surface 421 and the second surface 422) of the adjustment step portion 5420. When the opening / closing member 340 is operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the coupling surface and the adjustment arm portion 345 from colliding with each other. Therefore, the adjustment arm portion 345 collides with the inclined surface, and a load is applied to the adjustment arm portion 345 along a direction oblique to the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 340, and the durability of the adjustment arm portion 345 decreases. Can be prevented.

上記第6実施形態では、報知の無い時に操作部材4310を操作したとしても、操作時の外観は普段と変わらず、誤操作であることを認識し難い場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、報知の無い時に操作部材4310を操作すると発光するランプを操作デバイス6300の遊技者から視認される箇所に配置するようにしても良い。この場合、ランプの光り方を視認させることで、誤操作に気付かせることができる。   In the sixth embodiment, the case where the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification and the appearance at the time of operation does not change as usual and it is difficult to recognize that it is an erroneous operation has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, a lamp that emits light when the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification may be disposed at a location that is visible to the player of the operation device 6300. In this case, it is possible to notice an erroneous operation by visually recognizing how the lamp shines.

上記第7実施形態では、操作カバー7320の内部に配置される操作部材4310が開閉部材4340に対して上下動作することにより、許容状態と規制状態とが切り替えられる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、膨出部4312が下面視における位相ごとに変化する形状から構成され、操作部材4310が開閉部材4340に対して操作部材4310の底板の中心を軸に回転することにより、許容状態と規制状態とが切り替えられるようにしても良い。この場合、許容状態と規制状態とで操作部材4310の上面位置を変化させる必要が無いので、遊技者が、操作部材4310の状態変化を外観から把握することを困難にすることができる。   In the seventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation member 4310 disposed inside the operation cover 7320 moves up and down with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 so that the permissible state and the restricted state are switched. It is not limited. For example, the bulging portion 4312 is configured with a shape that changes for each phase in the bottom view, and the operation member 4310 rotates around the center of the bottom plate of the operation member 4310 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, thereby allowing the restricted state and the restricted state. And may be switched. In this case, since it is not necessary to change the upper surface position of the operation member 4310 between the allowable state and the restricted state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state change of the operation member 4310 from the appearance.

上記第7実施形態では、操作部材4310が操作カバー7320に対して重力で移動する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材4310を操作カバー7320に対して上下動作させる駆動モータを設けても良いし、ダンパ装置により駆動しても良い。   Although the case where the operation member 4310 moves by gravity with respect to the operation cover 7320 has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a drive motor that moves the operation member 4310 up and down with respect to the operation cover 7320 may be provided, or may be driven by a damper device.

上記各実施形態では、切替装置400,2400,3400,5400が、真円の円環形状から構成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、上面視楕円形状から構成されても良い。この場合、本体円環部410がどの位相で調整腕部420と対向するかにより、本体円環部410と調整腕部345との当接点と、軸部323との距離を変化させることができ、開閉部材340の動作態様の設計自由度を向上させることができる。また、本体円環部410を同軸の複数の円環から構成するようにしても良い。   In each of the above-described embodiments, the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, and 5400 have been described as having a perfect circular ring shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise from the top view elliptical shape. In this case, the distance between the contact point between the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment arm portion 345 and the shaft portion 323 can be changed depending on the phase at which the main body ring portion 410 faces the adjustment arm portion 420. In addition, the degree of freedom in designing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved. Further, the main body ring portion 410 may be constituted by a plurality of coaxial annular rings.

上記各実施形態では、クラッチ部材330が操作部材310の操作に連動して動作する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、土台部材320の内部にソレノイドが収容され、そのソレノイドの駆動により本体棒部331が下方に引き込み動作されるものでも良い。この場合、遊技者が操作部材310を押し込み操作しない場合であっても、開閉部材340を第2位置状態へ回転動作させることができる。   In each of the above embodiments, the case where the clutch member 330 operates in conjunction with the operation of the operation member 310 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, even when the player does not push in the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated to the second position state.

例えば、押し込み指示の無いタイミングで本体棒部331を引き込み、開閉部材340を回転動作させ、操作部材310の押し込み指示後、押し込み操作があったことを検出したら、本体円環部410を回転動作させ開閉部材340を閉じる演出を行うことができる。   For example, the main body bar portion 331 is pulled in at a timing when there is no push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated, and after detecting the push-in operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 is detected, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated. An effect of closing the opening / closing member 340 can be performed.

また、本体棒部331を引き込んだまま、本体円環部410を複数回、回転動作(順方向、逆方向、反転、及びそれらの組み合わせの回転動作)させることで、開閉部材340が開閉を複数回繰り返す演出を行うことができる。   Further, the opening / closing member 340 opens and closes a plurality of times by rotating the main body ring portion 410 a plurality of times (forward operation, reverse direction, inversion, and a combination thereof) while the main body rod portion 331 is retracted. It is possible to produce an effect that repeats times.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340,2340,4340の開閉の態様を、開閉部材340,2340,4340よりも奥側に配置される切替装置400,2400,3400,4500,5400,6500,7500の状態の変化(変位)により変化させる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材310,4310の状態を変化(例えば、軸中心に回転変位)させることにより、開閉部材340,2340,4340の開閉の態様を変化させるようにしても良い。この場合、操作部材310,4310の状態変化の様子を遊技者に視認させることにより、通常の状態から何か変化があったことを把握させることができ、操作部材310,4310を操作する遊技者の期待感を向上させることができる。   In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340 are opened / closed with respect to the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, 4500, 5400, 6500, and 7500 that are arranged on the back side of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340. Although the case where the state is changed by the change (displacement) of the state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state of opening / closing of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, 4340 may be changed by changing the state of the operation members 310, 4310 (for example, rotational displacement about the axis center). In this case, the player who operates the operation members 310 and 4310 can recognize that there has been a change from the normal state by visually recognizing the state change of the operation members 310 and 4310. Can improve expectations.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340が第2位置状態側へ向けて付勢されることにより、操作部材310の操作深度によらず開閉部材340が所定位置まで回転動作する場合と、開閉部材4340が第1状態側へ向けて付勢されることにより、操作部材4310の操作深度により開閉部材4340の回転動作の態様が変化する場合とを説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、それらの組み合わせ、即ち、開閉部材340の第1位置状態と第2位置状態との間の状態である第3位置状態までは開閉部材340が操作部材310の操作深度によらず回転動作し、一度そこで留まり、更に操作部材310が深く押し込まれると、操作部材310の押し込み深度に追従して開閉部材340が回転動作するようにしても良い。この場合、開閉部材340の動作態様をより多くすることができる。   In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing member 340 is biased toward the second position state side, the opening / closing member 340 rotates to a predetermined position regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310, and the opening / closing member 4340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing member 340 rotates regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310 until the third position state, which is a combination thereof, that is, the state between the first position state and the second position state of the opening / closing member 340. Once the operation member 310 stays there, and the operation member 310 is further pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 may rotate in accordance with the pushing depth of the operation member 310. In this case, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340よりも下方に切替装置400を配置することで、切替装置400を遊技者が視認し難い場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、非透過性のフィルムを操作部材310の底面に貼り、そのフィルムの開閉部材340と対向する部分のみを切り抜くことで、開閉部材340は操作部材310を通して視認できるが、開閉部材340以外の部分(切替装置400の部分)はフィルムに遮蔽され視認できないように構成しても良い。この場合、遊技者に凝視されることで切替装置400の状況を把握され、実際には操作部材310を押さずに、大当たり期待度を把握するという遊技を防止することができる。   In each of the above embodiments, the case where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching device 400 by arranging the switching device 400 below the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by attaching a non-permeable film to the bottom surface of the operation member 310 and cutting out only a portion of the film that faces the opening / closing member 340, the opening / closing member 340 can be visually recognized through the operation member 310, but portions other than the opening / closing member 340 (The part of the switching device 400) may be configured so as not to be visually recognized by being shielded by the film. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game in which the situation of the switching device 400 is grasped by staring at the player and the expectation degree of jackpot is grasped without actually pressing the operation member 310.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340を回転動作する部材として説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材310の操作方向と交差する方向に両開きの態様でスライド動作する部材でも良い。   In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing member 340 has been described as a member that rotates, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member that slides in a double-open manner in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the operation member 310 may be used.

上記各実施形態では、遊技者が操作する操作部材310は形状を維持し、操作部材310を挟んで遊技者から隔絶される開閉部材340が動作する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作部材310が遊技者の操作により動作(変形)、例えば、操作部材310の上底部分が中心位置で割れるようにしても良い。   In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the operation member 310 operated by the player maintains the shape and the opening / closing member 340 that is isolated from the player operates with the operation member 310 interposed therebetween, but is not necessarily limited thereto. is not. For example, the operation member 310 may be operated (deformed) by the player's operation, for example, the upper bottom portion of the operation member 310 may be broken at the center position.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340が土台部材320に軸支される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、操作デバイス300の内部に、複数の球状部材(ビーズ等)が収容され、操作部材310を押し込むことに伴って、その球状部材が移動する(弾け飛ぶ)態様でも良い。この場合、遊技者の予想外の演出を行うことができる。   In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is pivotally supported by the base member 320 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which a plurality of spherical members (beads and the like) are accommodated in the operation device 300 and the spherical members move (bounce off) as the operation member 310 is pushed in may be possible. In this case, the player can perform an unexpected effect.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340の状態を特に検出せず、その外観上の変化により演出を行う場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、開閉部材340の状態を検出し、その配置により第3図柄表示装置81の演出を切り替えるようにしても良い。   In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the state of the opening / closing member 340 is not particularly detected and the presentation is performed by a change in its appearance has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state of the opening / closing member 340 may be detected, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 may be switched depending on the arrangement.

上記各実施形態では、開閉部材340の動作態様により大当たり期待度を予想することができる場合について説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、開閉部材340の動作態様が、大当たりするか否かに実際に影響を与えるようにしても良い。例えば、既に主制御装置で取得済みの乱数を、開閉部材340が所定の動作態様を行った場合に他の乱数に書き換えるようにしても良い。この場合、最初の乱数が外れの乱数だったとしても、書き換えにより大当たりの乱数を取得する可能性を残すことができる。   In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the jackpot expectation degree can be predicted by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operating mode of the opening / closing member 340 may actually affect whether or not a big hit is made. For example, a random number that has already been acquired by the main control device may be rewritten to another random number when the opening / closing member 340 performs a predetermined operation mode. In this case, even if the initial random number is an out-of-range random number, there is a possibility of acquiring a jackpot random number by rewriting.

本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回(例えば2回、3回)大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機(通称、2回権利物、3回権利物と称される)として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Vゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。   You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。   In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作(ボタン操作)に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。   In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。   The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<ボタン自体が割れる演出。割れ方、戻り方、を変更可能>
遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、を備える遊技機において、前記操作手段と動作手段との間に介在すると共に、前記操作手段と同期動作可能とされる第2動作手段を備え、前記操作手段と同期して前記第2動作手段が前記動作手段に対して所定量変位することで、前記動作手段が動作することを特徴とする遊技機A1。
<Direction that the button itself breaks. How to break and return can be changed>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means And a return means for returning to the first position, the game machine further comprising a second operation means interposed between the operation means and the operation means and capable of operating synchronously with the operation means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the operating means operates when the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the means.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、ボタンを覆うことで、そのボタンを押せなくする状態と、ボタンから離れ露出させることで、そのボタンを押し込み可能とする状態とを形成可能なカバー部材を備え、カバー部材を駆動モータで動作させることで、押し込みボタン周辺の見栄えを変化させる演出をする遊技機がある(例えば特開2015−112276号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、カバー部材はボタンと機械的に係合していないので、ボタンとカバー部材との動作タイミングを合わせ、互いに同期動作させる演出をすることが困難であるという問題点があった。   Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a cover member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed in by being exposed away from the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around the push button by operating a cover member with a drive motor (see, for example, JP-A-2015-112276). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the cover member is not mechanically engaged with the button, it is difficult to produce an effect in which the operation timing of the button and the cover member is synchronized and synchronized with each other. There was a point.

これに対し、遊技機A1によれば、動作手段の動作が、操作手段と動作手段との間に介在されると共に操作手段と同期動作可能とされる第2動作手段が操作手段の操作により動作手段に対して所定量変位することにより行われるので、操作手段の操作と、動作手段の動作との、タイミングを合わせることができる。これにより、遊技者が、操作により操作手段に関わる演出に関わったという実感を得ることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the second operation means that is operated between the operation means and the operation means and that can operate synchronously with the operation means is operated by the operation means. Since the operation is performed by displacing the device by a predetermined amount, the timing of the operation of the operation device and the operation of the operation device can be matched. As a result, it is possible to obtain an actual feeling that the player has been involved in the performance related to the operation means by the operation.

なお、第2動作手段としては、操作手段に固定される手段や、操作手段の操作中の一定区間において操作手段になついたまま動作することで同期動作する手段などが例示される。   Examples of the second operation means include a means fixed to the operation means, a means that operates synchronously by operating while staying on the operation means in a fixed section during operation of the operation means, and the like.

遊技機A1において、前記第2動作手段から前記動作手段へ負荷が与えられることを特徴とする遊技機A2。   In the gaming machine A1, a load is applied from the second operating means to the operating means.

遊技機A2によれば、遊技機A1の奏する効果に加え、機械的な係合により動作手段を動作開始させることができるので、第2動作手段と動作手段とが離間して配置される場合に比較して、それぞれの動作タイミングを合わせ易くすることができる。   According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be started by mechanical engagement, so that the second operating means and the operating means are arranged apart from each other. In comparison, each operation timing can be easily adjusted.

遊技機A1又はA2において、前記操作手段を操作する前後で前記動作手段が変位する可変状態と、前記操作手段を操作する前後で前記動作手段が同位置に配置される不変状態とを、形成可能な切替手段と、その切替手段の状態を任意に変化させる駆動力を発生する駆動手段と、を備えることを特徴とする遊技機A3。   In the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is possible to form a variable state in which the operating means is displaced before and after operating the operating means, and an invariant state in which the operating means is disposed at the same position before and after operating the operating means. A gaming machine A3, comprising: a switching means; and a driving means for generating a driving force for arbitrarily changing the state of the switching means.

遊技機A3によれば、遊技機A1又はA2の奏する効果に加え、切替手段の状態を駆動手段で変化させることができるので、操作手段を操作する遊技者の、動作手段に対する注目力を増大させることができる。   According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the state of the switching unit can be changed by the driving unit, so that the player who operates the operating unit increases the attention to the operating unit. be able to.

なお、可変状態における動作手段の位置変化の態様は、限定されるものでは無く、様々な態様が例示される。例えば、操作手段を所定の閾値以上に操作することにより、その操作量の大小によらず、動作手段が所定量だけ位置変化するようにしても良いし、操作手段の操作量の大小に対応して、動作手段の変位量が増減するようにしても良い。   In addition, the aspect of the position change of the operation means in the variable state is not limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, by operating the operating means above a predetermined threshold value, the operating means may change its position by a predetermined amount irrespective of the magnitude of the operating amount, or it corresponds to the operating amount of the operating means. Thus, the displacement amount of the operating means may be increased or decreased.

また、不変状態における動作手段の挙動は、限定されるものでは無く、様々な態様が例示される。例えば、遊技者が操作手段を操作している間中、動作手段が同位置で維持されるようにしても良いし、遊技者が操作手段を操作している間には動作手段が変位するが、操作手段の操作を終了する際には動作手段が操作前の位置に復帰するようにしても良い。   Moreover, the behavior of the operation means in the invariant state is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means may be maintained at the same position, or while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means is displaced. When the operation of the operation unit is finished, the operation unit may return to the position before the operation.

遊技機A3において、前記切替手段が、前記復帰手段を構成することを特徴とする遊技機A4。   In the gaming machine A3, the switching means constitutes the return means, the gaming machine A4.

遊技機A4によれば、遊技機A3の奏する効果に加え、動作手段を第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段を個別で用意することを不要にできると共に、部材個数を削減することにより、組立工数を低減したり、部品コストを低減したりできる。   According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, it is possible to eliminate the need to individually prepare return means for returning the operating means to the first position, and by reducing the number of members, the assembly man-hour can be reduced. This can reduce the cost of components.

遊技機A3又はA4において、前記切替手段は、前記動作手段と対向配置される対向部を備え、前記可変状態と、不変状態とでは、前記対向部と前記動作手段との間の距離が変化することを特徴とする遊技機A5。   In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the switching means includes a facing portion that is disposed to face the operating means, and the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes between the variable state and the unchanged state. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

遊技機A5によれば、遊技機A3又はA4の奏する効果に加え、対向部と、動作手段との間の距離が変化することで、可変状態と、不変状態とが切り替わるので、不変状態において、動作部材と切替手段との当接により、動作手段の動作を機械的に防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes, so that the variable state and the invariable state are switched. Due to the contact between the operating member and the switching means, the operation of the operating means can be mechanically prevented.

そのため、遊技者が操作手段を操作するのを待って、操作のタイミングで動作手段の動作を防止するように駆動手段を駆動する必要はなく、予め、切替手段を変化手段により駆動し所定の状態とした上で、操作手段の操作を待ち受けることができる。   Therefore, it is not necessary to wait for the player to operate the operation means and drive the drive means so as to prevent the operation means from operating at the timing of the operation. Then, it is possible to wait for the operation of the operation means.

遊技機A5において、前記切替手段は、前記可変状態を形成する場合において、前記対向部と前記動作手段との間の距離を、複数種類形成可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A6。   In the gaming machine A5, the switching means is configured to be capable of forming a plurality of types of distances between the facing portion and the operating means when the variable state is formed.

遊技機A6によれば、遊技機A5の奏する効果に加え、遊技者が操作手段を操作することによる動作手段の動作量を、複数種類用意することができるので、操作手段を操作する遊技者の、動作手段に対する注目力を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of operation amounts of the operating means when the player operates the operating means, so that the player operating the operating means Therefore, attention to the operating means can be improved.

遊技機A5又はA6において、前記動作手段は、一対の可動部材から形成され、一方の前記可動部材と、前記対向部との間の距離である第1距離と、他方の前記可動部材と、前記対向部との間の距離である第2距離とを、異なる大きさで構成可能に、前記切替手段が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A7。   In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the operating means is formed of a pair of movable members, a first distance that is a distance between one of the movable members and the facing portion, the other movable member, The gaming machine A7, wherein the switching means is formed so that the second distance, which is the distance between the facing portions, can be configured with different sizes.

遊技機A7によれば、遊技機A5又はA6の奏する効果に加え、一対の可動部材を、それぞれ任意に、可変状態または不変状態とすることができるので、動作手段が単一の部材から構成される場合に比較して、動作手段の動作態様を、より多く用意することができる。これにより、遊技者の、動作手段に対する注目力を増大させることができる。   According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the pair of movable members can be arbitrarily changed into a variable state or an invariable state, so that the operating means is composed of a single member. Compared to the case, the operation mode of the operation means can be prepared more. Thereby, the player's attention to the operating means can be increased.

遊技機A7において、前記切替手段が前記復帰手段を構成し、前記切替手段は、正逆両方向に動作可能に構成され、前記一対の可動部材が前記第2位置から前記第1位置へ向けて復帰する順序を、前記切替手段の動作態様により切り替え可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A8。   In the gaming machine A7, the switching unit constitutes the return unit, the switching unit is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and the pair of movable members return from the second position toward the first position. The gaming machine A8 is configured to be switchable according to the operation mode of the switching means.

遊技機A8によれば、遊技機A7の奏する効果に加え、切替手段の状態の変化を、操作手段の操作の前後における動作手段の変位の可否だけでなく、動作手段を構成する一対の可動部材の動作順序の変化にも兼用できるので、作用部材の兼用により、部材個数(特に、切替手段を駆動する駆動手段の個数)の削減を図ることができる。換言すれば、1の駆動手段で、操作手段の操作の前後で動作手段(を構成する可動部材)を変位させるか否かの切替と、第2位置における動作手段(を構成する可動部材)の位置の維持長さの切替と、を行うことができる。   According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the change of the state of the switching means is not only the possibility of displacement of the operating means before and after the operation of the operating means, but also a pair of movable members constituting the operating means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of members (particularly, the number of drive means for driving the switching means) by using the action member also. In other words, the switching of whether or not the operating means (movable member constituting the operating means) is displaced before and after the operation of the operating means by one driving means and the operating means (movable member constituting the second position) at the second position. The position maintenance length can be switched.

遊技機A1からA8のいずれかにおいて、前記動作手段を前記第2位置へ向けて移動させる付勢力を発生する付勢手段を備え、前記第2動作手段が、前記動作手段を前記第1位置に維持する固定状態と、前記動作手段を前記第1位置から移動可能にする解除状態とを形成可能とされ、前記操作手段が所定量操作されることにより、前記第2動作手段が前記固定状態から前記解除状態とされることを特徴とする遊技機A9。   In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the game machine includes an urging unit that generates an urging force that moves the operating unit toward the second position, and the second operating unit moves the operating unit to the first position. It is possible to form a fixed state to be maintained and a release state in which the operating means is movable from the first position, and the second operating means is moved from the fixed state by operating the operating means by a predetermined amount. A gaming machine A9 that is in the released state.

遊技機A9によれば、遊技機A1からA8のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、動作手段の動作に係る負荷を付勢手段により発生させ、第2動作手段には動作手段が動作可能となるか否かを切り替える役割をもたせることにより、操作手段へ動作部材から負荷が与えられることを防止することができ、動作手段の配置により操作手段を操作した遊技者が受ける反力が変化することを防止することができる。これにより、遊技者が、操作時の反力の変化により違和感を覚えることを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, is the load related to the operation of the operation means generated by the urging means, and can the operation means be operable in the second operation means? By giving the role of switching whether or not, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the operating means from the operating member, and to prevent the reaction force received by the player operating the operating means from changing due to the arrangement of the operating means can do. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in reaction force during operation.

遊技機A9において、前記第2動作手段が固定状態を形成する場合において、前記動作手段が前記第1位置から第2位置へ向けて移動開始することにより、前記第2動作手段の固定力が上昇することを特徴とする遊技機A10。   In the gaming machine A9, when the second operation means forms a fixed state, the operation means starts moving from the first position toward the second position, so that the fixing force of the second operation means increases. A gaming machine A10 characterized by:

遊技機A10によれば、遊技機A9の奏する効果に加え、遊技者から遊技機に与えられる衝撃や、他の振動部材の振動により、動作手段を第1位置から第2位置へ向けて移動させようとする負荷が意図せず大きくなり、動作手段が第1位置から動作開始されそうになる場合に、固定手段の固定力が上昇するように構成されるので、動作手段が第1位置から移動することを防止し易くすることができる。   According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the operating means is moved from the first position to the second position by an impact given to the gaming machine by the player and vibrations of other vibrating members. When the load to be increased unintentionally and the operating means is about to start operating from the first position, the fixing means is configured to increase the fixing force, so that the operating means moves from the first position. It can be made easy to prevent.

遊技機A9又はA10において、前記切替手段は、前記操作手段が所定の閾値以上に操作された場合に、前記切替手段の状態に関わらず、所定の付勢力を前記操作手段に対して負荷する反力手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機A11。   In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the switching means applies a predetermined urging force to the operating means regardless of the state of the switching means when the operating means is operated beyond a predetermined threshold. A gaming machine A11 comprising a force means.

遊技機A11によれば、遊技機A9又はA10の奏する効果に加え、操作手段を介して遊技者に与えられる反力により遊技者に動作手段の状態を判別されないようにする効果と、所定の閾値以上に操作された場合に操作手段に反力手段からの付勢力を加えることにより遊技者に操作量の目安を提供する効果とを、1の装置、即ち、切替手段のみにより奏させることができる。これにより、駆動手段の配設個数を削減することができる。   According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9 or A10, the effect of preventing the player from determining the state of the operating means by the reaction force applied to the player via the operating means, and a predetermined threshold value The effect of providing the player with an indication of the operation amount by applying the urging force from the reaction force means to the operation means when operated as described above can be achieved by only one device, that is, the switching means. . Thereby, the arrangement | positioning number of a drive means can be reduced.

<ボタン押しの態様で動作手段が変形するか否かが変わる>
遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、を備える遊技機において、前記動作手段が所定の動作を行うのに要する前記操作手段の操作態様を切り替える切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機B1。
<Whether or not the operating means changes depending on the button press mode>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position, comprising a switching means for switching an operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to perform a predetermined operation.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、押し方によって2値以上の押し下げ態様が識別されるボタンを備える遊技機がある(例えば特開2008−119165号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、識別された押し下げ態様の違いを、可動役物を駆動させるか否かで報知しており、操作対象としてのボタンの態様は変化しないので、ボタンによる演出が十分にされているとは言えず、ボタンの注目力を向上させることができないという問題点があった。   Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a button that identifies a pressing state of two or more values depending on how it is pressed (see, for example, JP-A-2008-119165). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the difference in the identified push-down mode is notified by whether or not the movable accessory is driven, and the mode of the button as the operation target does not change, so the effect by the button is There is a problem that it cannot be said that the attention of the buttons can be improved.

これに対し、遊技機B1によれば、切替手段により、操作手段の操作に伴って動作する動作手段が、動作するのに要する操作手段の操作態様を切替可能に構成されるので、遊技者による操作手段の操作態様の違いを、動作手段の動作に反映させることができる。従って、操作手段の操作態様の違いにより変化する演出を、動作手段により行うことができ、動作手段の注目力を向上させることができると共に、動作手段の動作と関連する操作手段の注目力を向上させることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the switching means is configured so that the operating means that operates in accordance with the operation of the operating means can be switched between the operation modes of the operating means required to operate. Differences in the operation mode of the operation means can be reflected in the operation of the operation means. Therefore, an effect that changes depending on the operation mode of the operation means can be performed by the operation means, and the attention of the operation means can be improved, and the attention of the operation means related to the operation of the operation means can be improved. Can be made.

なお、動作手段が動作するとは、遊技者がその動作を確認できるほどにはっきりと動作していることを意味する。即ち、一瞬開いて、即座に戻るといった態様は、誤動作と誤解される程度の動作であり、このような動作を含む物では無い。   Note that the operation means operating means that the player is operating so clearly that the player can confirm the operation. That is, the mode of opening for a moment and returning immediately is an operation that is misunderstood as a malfunction, and does not include such an operation.

なお、操作手段を操作する操作態様の違いとしては、何ら限定されるものではなく、複数の態様が例示される。例えば、操作手段を操作する距離が異なっていても良いし、操作手段を操作する期間が異なっていても良い。また、操作手段を操作する頻度が異なっていても良い。   In addition, as a difference of the operation mode which operates an operation means, it does not limit at all, A several aspect is illustrated. For example, the distance for operating the operating means may be different, and the period for operating the operating means may be different. Further, the frequency of operating the operating means may be different.

遊技機B1において、前記切替手段は、前記操作手段と前記動作手段との間に介在し、前記動作手段の前記第2位置まで移動を許容する許容状態と、その許容状態とは異なる規制状態と、が前記操作部材の操作態様により切り替えられる介在手段と、前記許容状態を形成する操作態様を変化可能に構成されると共に前記許容状態に対応する操作態様に合わせて前記介在手段を予め変位させる変位手段と、を備えることを特徴とする遊技機B2。   In the gaming machine B1, the switching unit is interposed between the operation unit and the operation unit, and permits a movement of the operation unit to the second position, and a regulation state different from the permitted state. Is configured to be able to change the operation mode that forms the permissible state and to displace the interposition unit in advance according to the operation mode corresponding to the permissible state. And a gaming machine B2.

遊技機B2によれば、遊技機B1の奏する効果に加え、変位手段により変位する介在手段が操作手段と動作手段との間に介在し、動作手段の第2位置までの移動を許容する操作態様に合わせて介在手段を予め変化させているので、遊技者の操作態様に対応して他の部材を駆動させて動作手段の動作態様を決める場合に比較して、遊技者の操作に基づいて動作手段が動作するまでの応答性を高めることができると共に、動作手段の動作の確実性を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, an operating mode in which an intervening means displaced by the displacing means is interposed between the operating means and the operating means, and allows the operating means to move to the second position. Since the intervening means is changed in advance in accordance with the player's operation mode, it operates based on the player's operation compared to the case where the operation mode of the operating means is determined by driving other members corresponding to the player's operation mode. Responsiveness until the means operates can be improved, and the certainty of operation of the operating means can be improved.

遊技機B2において、前記介在手段の位置によらず、前記操作手段の操作時に遊技者に返される反力が同等とされることを特徴とする遊技機B3。   In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player when the operation means is operated is made equal regardless of the position of the interposition means.

遊技機B3によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、遊技者に返される反力が介在手段の位置で変化することを防止できるので、操作手段の操作時に遊技者に違和感を与えることを防止できる。   According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, it is possible to prevent the reaction force returned to the player from changing at the position of the intervening means, so that the player feels uncomfortable when operating the operating means. Can be prevented.

遊技機B3において、前記切替手段は、前記操作手段が所定の閾値以上に操作された場合に、所定の付勢力を前記操作手段に対して負荷する反力手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機B4。   In the gaming machine B3, the switching means includes a reaction force means for applying a predetermined urging force to the operation means when the operation means is operated above a predetermined threshold. B4.

遊技機B4によれば、遊技機B3の奏する効果に加え、反力手段により、所定の閾値以上に操作したか否かの操作量の目安を、反力の変化として遊技者に提供することができる。これにより、操作量の大小が音声や映像により報知される場合に比較して、操作量大で操作するか、操作量小で操作するかの操作態様の切替を遊技者が直感的に行うことができる。   According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the reaction force means can provide the player with an indication of the amount of operation as to whether or not the operation has been performed beyond a predetermined threshold as a reaction force change. it can. This allows the player to intuitively switch the operation mode between operating with a large amount of operation or operating with a small amount of operation compared to when the amount of operation is notified by voice or video. Can do.

遊技機B1からB4のいずれかにおいて、前記切替手段は、前記操作手段に当接して状態変化し、状態変化することで前記動作手段の可動範囲を変化させる操作時切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機B5。   In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the switching unit includes an operation time switching unit that changes a state in contact with the operation unit and changes a movable range of the operation unit by changing the state. A gaming machine B5.

遊技機B5によれば、遊技機B1からB4のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、第2手段が、操作手段との当接により状態変化し、動作手段の可動範囲を変化させる操作時切替手段を備えるので、操作時切替手段を電気モータなどで駆動する場合に比較して、操作手段を操作してから、操作時切替手段が状態変化するまでに時間遅れが生じることを防止できる。これにより、切替手段により切替られた動作手段を動作開始させるための条件を満足していないのに、動作手段が動作するという不具合を防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the second means has an operation time switching means for changing the state by contact with the operating means and changing the movable range of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time delay from the time when the operation means is operated until the state change of the operation time switching means, as compared with the case where the operation time switching means is driven by an electric motor or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the operating means operates even if the condition for starting the operation of the operating means switched by the switching means is not satisfied.

遊技機B1からB5のいずれかにおいて、前記切替手段は、遊技者からは視認不能に隠されると共に、正逆両方向に動作可能に構成され、正方向か、逆方向かのどちらかに同量動作することによって、切替後の、前記動作手段が動作開始するのに要する操作手段の操作態様が変化する中間配置を形成可能であることを特徴とする遊技機B6。   In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the switching unit is hidden from view by the player and is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and operates in the same direction in either the forward direction or the reverse direction. By doing so, it is possible to form an intermediate arrangement in which the operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to start operation after switching can be formed.

遊技機B6によれば、遊技機B1からB5の奏する効果に加え、切替手段の動作音を遊技者が注意して聞いたとしても、切替手段の状態を予測することを困難にできる。これにより、操作手段を操作するまで、操作手段の注目力を維持することができる。   According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, it is difficult to predict the state of the switching means even if the player listens carefully to the operation sound of the switching means. Thereby, the attention of the operating means can be maintained until the operating means is operated.

遊技機B1からB6のいずれかにおいて、前記復帰手段は、前記切替手段により形成されることを特徴とする遊技機B7。   In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the return means is formed by the switching means.

遊技機B7によれば、遊技機B1からB6のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、切替手段を、復帰手段と兼用することにより、それぞれを他部材から構成する場合に比較して、切替手段の配設スペースを確保することができる。また、復帰手段として個別の部材を用意することを不要とできるので、部品コストを削減することができる。   According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the switching means is also used as the returning means, so that the switching means is arranged compared to the case where each is constituted by other members. Installation space can be secured. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare an individual member as the return means, the component cost can be reduced.

遊技機B1からB7のいずれかにおいて、前記切替手段が切り替える操作態様は、前記操作手段の操作量に対応すると共に、操作量の違いに寄らず、単一の検出手段により操作の有無が検出されることを特徴とする遊技機B8。   In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the operation mode switched by the switching unit corresponds to the operation amount of the operation unit, and regardless of the operation amount, the presence or absence of the operation is detected by a single detection unit. A gaming machine B8.

遊技機B8によれば、遊技機B1からB7のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、操作手段の操作量の違いにより演出を変化させながら、それにより検出手段の個数が増加することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, it is possible to prevent the number of detection means from increasing while changing the effect due to the difference in the operation amount of the operation means. it can.

遊技機B2において、前記介在手段の状態が変化することで、前記操作手段の操作時に遊技者に返される反力が変化することを特徴とする遊技機B9。   In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player at the time of operation of the operation means is changed by changing the state of the interposition means.

遊技機B9によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、遊技者に返される反力が介在手段の状態で変化するので、操作手段の操作時の反力で、遊技者に介在手段の状態の変化に気付かせることができる。   According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player varies depending on the state of the intervening means, so the reaction force upon operation of the operating means causes the player to You can notice changes in

遊技機B2において、前記切替手段は、前記介在手段を前記操作手段の操作方向に反して押し付ける付勢力を発生させる第1付勢手段と、前記操作手段が初期位置から所定距離以上離間することにより前記付勢手段の付勢力を解除する解除手段と、を備え、前記介在手段が前記操作手段の操作方向に前記操作手段に対して相対移動可能な移動空間が形成され、その移動空間を前記介在手段が相対移動することで前記許容状態が形成され、前記第1付勢手段の付勢力に比較して小さな前記操作手段の操作方向に沿った向きの負荷が前記介在手段に与えられていることを特徴とする遊技機B10。   In the gaming machine B2, the switching means includes a first urging means for generating a urging force that presses the interposition means against the operation direction of the operation means, and the operation means is separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Release means for releasing the urging force of the urging means, and a moving space is formed in which the interposing means can move relative to the operating means in the operating direction of the operating means, and the moving space is interposed in the intervening space. The allowable state is formed by relative movement of the means, and a load in the direction along the operation direction of the operation means that is smaller than the urging force of the first urging means is applied to the interposition means. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

遊技機B10によれば、B2の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢手段による付勢力が操作手段の配置により解除され、その付勢力に反する方向の負荷により介在手段が移動するので、操作手段が初期位置から所定距離以上離間してから、介在手段が許容状態となるまでの期間を確保することができる。これにより、操作手段を、一定期間以上操作することにより動作手段を第2位置へ移動させることが可能となる遊技性を提供することができる。   According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of B2, the urging force by the first urging means is released by the arrangement of the operating means, and the interposing means moves due to the load in the direction opposite to the urging force. It is possible to secure a period from the time when the intervention means is allowed to be allowed after being separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Accordingly, it is possible to provide gameability that allows the operating means to be moved to the second position by operating the operating means for a certain period or longer.

<動作手段の変形→復帰までの間隔を変化させ、押し込み後の注目力向上>
遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、を備える遊技機において、前記動作手段の動作態様を変化させることで、操作に対する前記操作手段の反応の態様を切り替える切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機C1。
<Deformation of operating means → Change the interval until return to improve attention after pressing>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A game machine comprising: a return means for returning to the first position; and a switching means for switching a mode of reaction of the operation means with respect to an operation by changing an operation mode of the operation means. Machine C1.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、ボタンを復帰させる付勢バネの弾性力を予め変化させることにより、ボタンを押した遊技者が感じる反発力を変化させ、それを演出に利用する遊技機がある(例えば特開2010−252949号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、依然、ボタンを移動範囲の端まで移動させて停止させており、一目でボタンに起きた変化を認識する事は困難であった。また、遊技中に様々な情報(映像や、音声)を受け取る遊技者にとって、ボタンから受ける反発力の変化を認識することは困難であるので、ボタンの変化を、十分に演出に反映させられていないという問題点があった。   Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, by changing the elastic force of the biasing spring for returning the button in advance, the repulsive force felt by the player who pressed the button is changed and used for the production. (See, for example, JP 2010-252949 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the button is still moved to the end of the moving range and stopped, and it is difficult to recognize a change occurring in the button at a glance. In addition, since it is difficult for a player who receives various information (video and audio) during a game to recognize a change in the repulsive force received from the button, the button change is sufficiently reflected in the production. There was no problem.

これに対し、遊技機C1によれば、操作に対する操作手段の反応の態様の切替が、動作手段の動作態様の変化により生じるので、遊技者は、動作手段を視認することで、切替手段による切り替えが起きたことを容易に把握することができる。これにより、操作手段および動作手段の注目力を向上させることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the switching of the operation mode of the operation unit with respect to the operation occurs due to the change in the operation mode of the operation unit, the player can visually check the operation unit to switch by the switching unit. Can easily grasp that happened. Thereby, the attention of the operating means and the operating means can be improved.

また、動作手段の動作は、遊技者が操作手段を操作することにより生じるので、操作後の操作手段および動作手段への注目力が低下することを防止することができる。   Further, since the operation of the operating means occurs when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the attention of the operating means and the operating means after the operation from being reduced.

なお、ここで、「復帰するまでの期間」とは、特に態様を限定されるものでは無い。例えば、復帰開始するまでの期間でも良いし、第2位置への復帰が完了するまでの期間でも良い。   Here, the “period until the return” is not particularly limited. For example, it may be a period until the return starts or a period until the return to the second position is completed.

また、操作に対する操作手段の反応の切替の態様としては、特に限定されるものでは無い。例えば、操作した後の操作手段が、操作前の位置まで復帰することが防止される(途中で停止する)態様でも良いし、操作した後の操作手段が、操作前の位置まで復帰するまでに数段階に分けて一時停止を繰り返す態様でも良い。また、遊技者に与える反力が変化するように構成しても良い。   Moreover, the mode of switching the reaction of the operating means with respect to the operation is not particularly limited. For example, the operation means after the operation may be prevented from returning to the position before the operation (stopped in the middle), or before the operation means after the operation is returned to the position before the operation. It is also possible to repeat the pause in several stages. Moreover, you may comprise so that the reaction force given to a player may change.

遊技機C1において、前記切替手段により、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に配置された状態における前記操作手段の操作後の復帰を遅延可能に切り替えられることを特徴とする遊技機C2。   In the gaming machine C1, the switching means can switch the return after the operation of the operation means in a state in which the operation means is located at the second position so that it can be delayed.

遊技機C2によれば、遊技機C1の奏する効果に加え、切替手段により、操作手段の操作後の復帰を遅くできるので、不要なタイミングにおいて、遊技者が操作手段を連打操作することを抑制することができる。これにより、不要な連打により操作手段が破損することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the switching means can delay the return after the operation of the operation means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation means at unnecessary timing. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged due to unnecessary repeated hitting.

また、動作手段が第2位置に配置された状態と、操作手段の復帰が遅くなる場合とが対応するので、動作手段に注目させることで、操作手段の復帰の態様が変化したことを、遊技者に容易に把握させることができる。   Further, since the state where the operating means is arranged at the second position corresponds to the case where the return of the operating means is delayed, it is possible to indicate that the manner of return of the operating means has changed by paying attention to the operating means. Can be easily grasped by a person.

遊技機C1又はC2において、前記動作手段は、前記第1位置から、前記第2位置へ動作する間に、間の状態である第3位置を経由し、前記切替手段は、前記動作手段の動作態様を、前記動作手段が前記第2位置まで動作する第1動作態様と、前記動作手段が前記第3位置まで動作し前記第2位置までは至らない第2動作態様とで、切替可能に構成され、前記操作手段の反応の態様は、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に到達するか否かで切り替えられることを特徴とする遊技機C3。   In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means passes through the third position which is in the middle while operating from the first position to the second position, and the switching means is an operation of the operating means. The mode is configured to be switchable between a first operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the second position and a second operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the third position and does not reach the second position. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the mode of reaction of the operating means is switched depending on whether or not the operating means reaches the second position.

遊技機C3によれば、遊技機C1又はC2の奏する効果に加え、動作手段の動作態様を、第1動作態様と、第2動作態様との複数で形成可能とし、第1動作態様では操作手段の反応の態様を切り替える一方、第2動作態様では操作手段の反応の態様を動作手段が動作しない場合と同一に維持するので、動作手段が動作した後も、操作手段に対する注目力を維持することができる。   According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operation mode of the operation means can be formed by a plurality of first operation modes and second operation modes. In the second operation mode, the response mode of the operating means is maintained the same as when the operating means does not operate, so that the attention to the operating means is maintained even after the operating means is operated. Can do.

なお、第2位置と、第3位置とは、遊技者が目視で違いを識別し難い程度の違いであることが望ましい。これにより、遊技者が、動作後の動作手段の状態を目視により識別し、操作手段の反応の態様が切り替えられたか否かを把握することを困難にすることができ、操作直後の操作手段への注目力を維持することができる。   Note that the second position and the third position are desirably different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to visually identify the difference. This makes it difficult for the player to visually identify the state of the operating means after the operation, and to grasp whether or not the mode of reaction of the operating means has been switched to the operating means immediately after the operation. You can maintain your attention.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記動作手段は、前記第2位置において、前記操作手段の操作方向に沿った前記操作手段の側面と当接することを特徴とする遊技機C4。   In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means abuts against a side surface of the operating means along the operating direction of the operating means at the second position.

遊技機C4によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、動作手段が第2位置に配置されることにより、動作手段が操作方向に沿った操作手段の側面と当接し、操作手段が動作することを防止しようとする態様で作用するので、動作手段を動作させる力を効果的に操作手段に負荷することができ、操作手段の動作の再現性を保つことができる。   According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means is arranged at the second position, so that the operating means abuts against the side surface of the operating means along the operating direction, Since it acts in such a manner as to prevent the operation means from operating, the force for operating the operation means can be effectively applied to the operation means, and the reproducibility of the operation of the operation means can be maintained.

遊技機C4において、前記動作手段が第2位置に配置された状態において、前記操作手段が操作方向の移動幅の終端位置に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機C5。   In the gaming machine C4, in a state where the operating means is arranged at the second position, the operating means is arranged at the terminal position of the movement width in the operating direction.

遊技機C5によれば、遊技機C4の奏する効果に加え、動作手段が第2位置に配置された状態において遊技者が操作手段を操作しようとしても、それ以上に操作手段が移動することは無いので、遊技者が操作手段を無理矢理に操作したとしても、操作手段と動作手段との間に生じる負荷により動作手段が破損することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4, even when the player tries to operate the operating means in a state where the operating means is disposed at the second position, the operating means does not move any further. Therefore, even if the player forcibly operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged by the load generated between the operating means and the operating means.

遊技機C1からC5のいずれかにおいて、前記切替手段を所定量動作させることにより、前記動作手段が前記第1位置へ復帰する態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機C6。   In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is configured in such a manner that the operation unit returns to the first position by operating the switching unit by a predetermined amount.

遊技機C6によれば、遊技機C1からC5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、動作手段の動作態様を切り替える切替手段を、動作手段を第1位置へ復帰する手段として兼用することができるので、動作手段を第1位置へ復帰させる手段を別で用意する場合に比較して、切替手段の配置スペースを拡大することができると共に、部品個数を低減することができる。   According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the switching means for switching the operation mode of the operating means can be used as the means for returning the operating means to the first position. Compared to a case where another means for returning the operating means to the first position is prepared, the arrangement space of the switching means can be expanded and the number of parts can be reduced.

遊技機C1又はC2において、前記切替手段は、前記操作手段の操作量に対応して前記操作手段を介して遊技者に与える負荷の変化態様を、複数種類で切替可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機C7。   In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means can switch a change mode of a load applied to the player via the operation means corresponding to an operation amount of the operation means in a plurality of types. A gaming machine C7.

遊技機C7によれば、遊技機C1又はC2の奏する効果に加え、切替手段により、操作手段の操作量に対応して操作手段を介して遊技者に与えられる負荷の変化態様が複数種類で変化可能とされるので、遊技者が、負荷の変化態様を判別し易い操作態様で操作手段を操作する確率を上げることができる。即ち、操作手段を叩きつけるような操作態様を抑制し、操作手段を時間をかけて押し込む操作態様を促進することができるので、操作により操作手段が受ける負荷を低減することができ、操作手段の破損を防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means changes the manner in which the load applied to the player via the operating means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating means is changed in a plurality of types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player operates the operation means in an operation mode in which the load change mode can be easily determined. That is, it is possible to suppress an operation mode in which the operation unit is struck and promote an operation mode in which the operation unit is pushed in over time, so that the load received by the operation unit by the operation can be reduced, and the operation unit is damaged. Can be prevented.

遊技機C7において、前記切替手段は、前記動作手段を前記第2位置で維持可能に構成され、前記操作手段の操作により前記動作手段に与えられる負荷が、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に配置される場合に最小となるように切替可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機C8。   In the gaming machine C7, the switching unit is configured to be able to maintain the operation unit at the second position, and a load applied to the operation unit by operation of the operation unit is arranged at the second position. A gaming machine C8, which is configured to be switchable so as to be minimized when played.

遊技機C8によれば、遊技機C7の奏する効果に加え、動作手段が第2位置に配置される場合に、操作手段から動作手段に与えられる負荷が最小となるようにすることができるので、動作手段を第2位置で維持することにより、操作手段の操作により操作手段に与えられる負荷を低減することができ、操作手段の破損を抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the load applied from the operating means to the operating means can be minimized, By maintaining the operating means at the second position, the load applied to the operating means by the operation of the operating means can be reduced, and damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

<指示外のタイミングで押し込み操作→駆動制御は同じままで、正しく動かない>
遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、遊技者に対して前記操作手段を操作する期間を報知する報知手段と、を備える遊技機において、前記報知手段により報知される期間外で前記操作手段が操作された場合に、第1状態から第2状態へ状態が切り替えられると共に、その状態の切替により前記動作手段の動作態様を変化可能な切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機D1。
<Push-in operation at a timing outside the instruction-> Drive control remains the same and does not move correctly>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means In a gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position and a notifying means for notifying a player of a period for operating the operating means, the operating means is outside the period notified by the notifying means. A gaming machine D1 comprising a switching unit that is switched from the first state to the second state when the operation is performed, and capable of changing an operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、ボタンの移動を規制するストッパー部材を変位させ、ボタンが押し下げ不可能となる状態を形成可能とすることで、無意味な連打操作を抑制し得る遊技機がある(例えば特開2012−115586号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、そもそもボタンが下降せず、遊技者が押し込みを行っていることを検出できないので、不慣れな遊技者が、ボタンが押し下げられないことを、仕様である(固いボタンである)と勘違いして、更に大きな力で押し下げようとする(誤操作する)場合であっても、遊技機側からアラームをかけることができない。   Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the stopper member that restricts the movement of the button is displaced, and a state in which the button cannot be pushed down can be formed, thereby making it possible to suppress a meaningless continuous hitting operation. (For example, refer to JP2012-115586A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the button does not descend in the first place and it is not possible to detect that the player is pushing down, it is a specification that an inexperienced player cannot push down the button (hard Even if you misunderstand that it is a button) and try to push it down with a greater force (incorrect operation), you can't give an alarm from the gaming machine side.

これに対し、遊技機D1によれば、報知手段に操作を促された期間外で操作手段が操作された場合に状態が切替られ、状態の切替により動作手段の動作態様を変化可能な切替手段を備えるので、不慣れな遊技者に対しても、動作手段の動作態様を視認させることで誤操作を行っていることに気付かせることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the state is switched when the operation unit is operated outside the period in which the operation is prompted by the notification unit, and the switching unit can change the operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can be made aware that an erroneous operation is performed by visually recognizing the operation mode of the operation means.

また、変化するのは動作手段の動作態様なので、操作手段を押し込み不可にすることで遊技者が手を痛めることにつながったり、液晶演出が変化する場合のように遊技者の操作により演出が途切れたりすることを防止できる。そのため、敢えて誤操作を行う遊技者は、従来通りの遊技を続行できる。即ち、遊技者は、操作手段の操作の仕方を自分で選択できる。   In addition, the operating mode of the operating means changes, so that the operating means cannot be pushed in, leading to the player's hand hurting, or the effect is interrupted by the player's operation, such as when the liquid crystal effect changes. Can be prevented. Therefore, a player who dares to perform an erroneous operation can continue the game as usual. That is, the player can select how to operate the operation means.

なお、報知手段による報知の態様は限定されるものではなく、様々な態様が例示される。例えば、液晶表示装置で「押せ」や「PUSH」などの文字を表示する態様でも良いし、音響装置から「今だ」などの音声を出力しても良いし、また、予め決められた条件が揃うことにより報知がされたと見なしても良い(所謂「裏ボタン」)。   In addition, the mode of notification by the notification unit is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a mode in which characters such as “push” and “PUSH” are displayed on a liquid crystal display device, a sound such as “now” may be output from an acoustic device, and predetermined conditions are set. It may be considered that the notification has been made by aligning them (so-called “back button”).

なお、報知期間外で操作手段を操作する場合に動作手段の動作から遊技者が得られる利益が、報知期間で操作する場合に動作手段の動作から遊技者が得られる利益以下に設定されるようにしても良い。   The profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating the operating means outside the notification period is set to be equal to or less than the profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating during the notification period. Anyway.

この場合、報知期間で操作する方が報知期間外で操作する場合に比較して遊技者にとって不利とならないので、動作手段の動作態様から少しでも有利な情報を得たい(例えば、大当たり期待度を予想したい)遊技者に対して、報知手段の報知に従って操作手段を操作するように仕向けることができる。これにより、遊技者が、報知手段により報知される期間以外の期間で操作手段を無意味に連打操作することを抑制することができる。そのため、感情が高ぶった遊技者がボタンを連打操作することに対しての抑止力を、十分に高めることができる。   In this case, since it is not disadvantageous for the player to operate during the notification period compared to when operating outside the notification period, it is desirable to obtain a little more advantageous information from the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) It is possible to direct the player to operate the operation means according to the notification of the notification means. Thereby, it can suppress that a player carries out a meaningless repeated operation of an operation means in periods other than the period alert | reported by an alerting | reporting means. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enhance the deterrence against a player who is highly emotional from repeatedly hitting the button.

なお、遊技者が得られる利益の態様は限定されるものではなく、様々な態様が例示される。例えば、大当たり期待度(大当たり遊技状態等の特別遊技状態の発生に対する期待感)を高い精度で把握できる利益でも良いし、電動チューリップの開閉部材が開状態の時に球が入賞口に到達し易い発射タイミングを把握できる利益でも良いし、遊技者が有利となり易い発射強度や発射タイミングを把握できる利益でも良い。   In addition, the aspect of the profit which a player obtains is not limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it is possible to use a profit that can grasp the jackpot expectation degree (expectation for occurrence of a special gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state) with high accuracy, or the ball can easily reach the winning opening when the opening and closing member of the electric tulip is open The profit which can grasp | ascertain a timing may be sufficient, and the profit which can grasp | ascertain the firing strength and the firing timing which a player tends to become advantageous may be sufficient.

遊技機D1において、前記操作手段を介して遊技者に反力を与える反力発生手段を備え、その反力発生手段が与える反力は、報知期間外での操作の有無に関わらず同等とされることを特徴とする遊技機D2。   The gaming machine D1 includes reaction force generation means for applying a reaction force to the player via the operation means, and the reaction force provided by the reaction force generation means is equal regardless of whether there is an operation outside the notification period. A gaming machine D2 characterized by that.

遊技機D2によれば、遊技機D1の奏する効果に加え、反力発生手段が遊技者に与える反力が、報知期間外での操作の有無に関わらず変化しないので、報知手段の報知に無関係に操作手段を操作する遊技者でも違和感なく操作手段を操作することができる。   According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the reaction force applied to the player by the reaction force generating means does not change regardless of whether or not there is an operation outside the notification period. Even a player who operates the operating means can operate the operating means without feeling uncomfortable.

また、操作態様の違いが変化したことに遊技者が反力の違いにより気付くことを防止することで、動作手段への注目力を向上することができる。   In addition, it is possible to improve attention to the operation means by preventing the player from noticing that the difference in the operation mode has changed due to the difference in the reaction force.

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記切替手段は、前記動作手段の動作態様を当接により変化させる当接手段と、その当接手段を駆動する駆動手段と、前記報知手段の報知期間外での操作で動作手段が動作することにより第1状態から第2状態へ状態変化可能とされる変位手段と、を備え、その変位手段は、前記第2状態において、前記動作手段と前記当接手段との間に介在可能とされ、前記変位手段が前記動作手段と前記当接手段との間に介在することで前記操作手段の操作に伴う前記動作手段の動作態様が変化することを特徴とする遊技機D3。   In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means includes a contact means for changing an operation mode of the operation means by contact, a drive means for driving the contact means, and an operation outside the notification period of the notification means. Displacement means capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state when the operation means operates in the second state, the displacement means in the second state between the operation means and the contact means. A gaming machine characterized in that an operation mode of the operation means changes in accordance with an operation of the operation means when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means. D3.

遊技機D3によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、変位手段が第2状態となり動作手段と当接手段との間に介在することで動作手段の動作態様が変化されるので、切替手段の当接手段の動作部材に対する態様を切り替えずとも、遊技者が報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段を操作するか否かにより、動作手段の動作態様を変化させることができる。従って、遊技者が操作手段を操作することを契機に当接手段の動作手段に対する態様を切り替える場合に比較して、当接手段を駆動する駆動手段の制御負担を低減することができる。   According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement means is in the second state, and the operation mode of the operation means is changed by being interposed between the operation means and the contact means. Even if the mode of the switching unit with respect to the operating member of the contacting unit is not switched, the operating mode of the operating unit can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating unit outside the notification period of the reporting unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the drive means for driving the contact means, as compared with the case where the mode of the contact means with respect to the operation means is switched when the player operates the operation means.

なお、変位手段の配置場所は限定されるものでは無い。例えば、当接手段上に配置されても良いし、動作手段に配設されても良いし、当接手段と動作手段との間に配設される別手段に配設されても良い。   In addition, the arrangement | positioning place of a displacement means is not limited. For example, it may be disposed on the contact means, may be disposed on the operation means, or may be disposed on another means disposed between the contact means and the operation means.

遊技機D3において、前記変位手段が第2状態に変化したことを検出する検出手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機D4。   In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with detecting means for detecting that the displacement means has changed to the second state.

遊技機D4によれば、遊技機D3の奏する効果に加え、変位手段が第2状態に変化したことを検出手段により検出できるので、報知手段の報知と照合することなく、報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段が操作されたと判定することができる。従って、報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段が操作されたことを判定する制御フローを短縮することができる。   According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since the detecting means can detect that the displacement means has changed to the second state, it is outside the notification period of the notification means without collating with the notification of the notification means. It can be determined that the operating means has been operated. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the control flow for determining that the operation means is operated outside the notification period of the notification means.

遊技機D3又はD4において、前記変位手段が前記動作手段と当接手段との間に介在することにより生じる動作手段の動作態様は、報知期間外で操作手段の操作が行われなかった場合のいずれの動作態様とも異なることを特徴とする遊技機D5。   In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation unit that occurs when the displacement unit is interposed between the operation unit and the contact unit is any of cases where the operation unit is not operated outside the notification period. A game machine D5, which is also different from the operation mode.

遊技機D5によれば、遊技機D3又はD4の奏する効果に加え、変位手段が動作手段と当接手段との間に介在することで生じる動作手段の動作態様が、報知期間外で操作手段の操作が行われなかった場合のいずれの動作態様とも異なるので、遊技者が意図せず報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段を操作している場合にも、動作手段の動作態様に注目させることで、通常とは異なる操作態様で操作手段を操作していることに気付かせることができる。   According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is different from any operation mode when the operation is not performed, even when the player unintentionally operates the operation unit outside the notification period of the notification unit, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the operation unit. It can be noticed that the operation means is operated in an operation mode different from usual.

また、液晶装置の表示を変化させたり(例えば、エラー表示をしたり)、音響・照明装置で異常を知らせたりする場合に比較して、遊技者に過度にストレスを与えることなく、動作手段に注目する遊技者にだけ気づかせるという演出を行うことができる。   In addition, compared with the case where the display of the liquid crystal device is changed (for example, an error is displayed) or the abnormality is notified by the sound / lighting device, the operation means is not excessively stressed. It is possible to produce an effect that only noticed players are noticed.

遊技機D3又はD4において、前記変位手段が前記動作手段と当接手段との間に介在することにより生じる動作手段の動作態様は、報知期間外で操作手段の操作が行われなかった場合のいずかの動作態様と同等とされることを特徴とする遊技機D6。   In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means is when the operation means is not operated outside the notification period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being equivalent to any operation mode.

遊技機D6によれば、遊技機D3又はD4の奏する効果に加え、変位手段が動作手段と当接手段との間に介在することで生じる動作手段の動作態様が、報知期間外で操作手段の操作が行われなかった場合のいずれかの動作態様と同等とされるので、現に生じている動作手段の動作態様が、変位手段の介在により生じているのか、変位手段が介在せず生じているのか、遊技者が把握することを困難とでき、報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段を操作する遊技者を混乱させる演出を行うことができる。これにより、遊技者に報知手段の報知期間外での操作手段の操作を行わせないように仕向けることができる。   According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is equivalent to one of the operation modes when the operation is not performed, the operation mode of the operation means currently occurring is caused by the intervention of the displacement means, or is caused without the intervention of the displacement means. However, it is difficult for the player to grasp, and it is possible to produce an effect that confuses the player who operates the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means. Thus, the player can be directed not to operate the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means.

遊技機D3からD6のいずれかにおいて、前記駆動手段は、前記変位手段を前記第2状態から前記第1状態へ切り替える第1駆動態様で駆動可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機D7。   In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is configured to be drivable in a first driving mode in which the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state.

遊技機D7によれば、遊技機D3からD6のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、遊技者が報知手段の報知期間外で操作手段を操作していたとしても、駆動手段が第1駆動態様で駆動されることにより変位手段が第2状態から第1状態へ切替られるので、駆動手段の駆動態様を把握不能とすることにより、動作手段の動作態様が、変位手段の介在により生じているのか、変位手段は介在せず生じているのかの把握を困難とすることができる。   According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is driven in the first driving mode even if the player operates the operating means outside the notification period of the notification means. As a result, the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state. Therefore, by making it impossible to grasp the drive mode of the drive unit, whether the operation mode of the operation unit is caused by the intervention of the displacement unit or not It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the means is present without intervention.

遊技機A1からA11,B1からB10,C1からC8,D1からD7のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機Z1。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(ストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。   One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

遊技機A1からA11,B1からB10,C1からC8,D1からD7のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機Z2。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞(又は作動口を通過)することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置(特定入賞口)が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値(景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む)が付与されるものが挙げられる。   One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

遊技機A1からA11,B1からB10,C1からC8,D1からD7のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機Z3。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。   One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 パチンコ機(遊技機)
13 遊技盤
81 第3図柄表示装置(報知手段の一部)
310 操作部材(操作手段)
330 クラッチ部材(第2動作手段)
340、2340、4340 開閉部材(動作手段、可動部材)
340a 開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
340b 開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
345 調整腕部(動作手段の一部、可動部材の一部)
400 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
420、2420、3420 調整段部(対向部)
490、4590 駆動モータ(駆動手段)
2340a 第1開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
2340b 第2開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
2340c 第3開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
2340d 第4開閉部材(可動部材の一部)
2400 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
3400 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
3410 本体円環部(変位手段の一部)
3440 第1動作装置(介在手段の一部、操作時切替手段)
3450 第2動作装置(介在手段の一部、操作時切替手段)
4310 操作部材(操作手段、切替手段の一部、介在手段)
4312 膨出部(第2動作手段)
4500 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
4520 スライド部材(変位手段の一部、当接手段の一部)
4530 第1復帰部材(当接手段の一部)
4540 第2復帰部材(当接手段の一部)
5400 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
5413 被検出部材(検出手段の一部)
5420 調整段部(対向部、当接手段の一部)
5450 第1分割円環部材(変位手段の一部)
5460 第2分割円環部材(変位手段の一部)
6360 移動カバー部材(変位手段)
6500 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
7301e 押し上げ部材(変位手段の一部、第1付勢手段、切替手段)
7320 操作カバー(操作手段)
7324 規制部(解除手段)
7500 切替装置(復帰手段の一部、切替手段)
NB1 ねじりバネ(復帰手段の一部、付勢手段)
KC51 検出センサ(検出手段の一部)
KC71 検出センサ(検出手段)
SP1 スプリング(反力発生手段の一部)
SP2 スプリング(反力発生手段の一部)
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of the notification means)
310 Operation member (operation means)
330 Clutch member (second operating means)
340, 2340, 4340 Opening / closing member (operation means, movable member)
340a Open / close member (part of movable member)
340b Open / close member (part of movable member)
345 Adjustment arm (part of movement means, part of movable member)
400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
420, 2420, 3420 Adjustment step (opposite part)
490, 4590 Drive motor (drive means)
2340a First opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340b Second opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340c Third opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340d Fourth opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3410 Ring body part (part of displacement means)
3440 1st operation | movement apparatus (a part of interposition means, switching means at the time of operation)
3450 Second operating device (part of intervening means, switching means at operation)
4310 Operation member (operation means, part of switching means, intervening means)
4312 Swelling part (second operating means)
4500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
4520 slide member (part of displacement means, part of contact means)
4530 1st return member (a part of contact means)
4540 Second return member (part of contact means)
5400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
5413 Detected member (part of detection means)
5420 Adjustment step (opposite part, part of contact means)
5450 First divided annular member (part of displacement means)
5460 Second divided annular member (part of displacement means)
6360 Moving cover member (displacement means)
6500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
7301e Push-up member (part of displacement means, first biasing means, switching means)
7320 Operation cover (operation means)
7324 Restriction part (release means)
7500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
NB1 Torsion spring (part of return means, biasing means)
KC51 detection sensor (part of detection means)
KC71 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 spring (part of reaction force generation means)
SP2 spring (part of reaction force generation means)

Claims (3)

遊技者が操作する操作手段と、その操作手段の操作に伴って、第1位置と、その第1位置とは異なる第2位置との間を動作可能とされる動作手段と、その動作手段を前記第1位置へ復帰させる復帰手段と、を備える遊技機において、
前記動作手段の動作態様を変化させることで、操作に対する前記操作手段の反応の態様を切り替える切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機。
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means In a gaming machine comprising return means for returning to the first position,
A gaming machine comprising a switching unit that switches a mode of a response of the operation unit to an operation by changing an operation mode of the operation unit.
前記切替手段により、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に配置された状態における前記操作手段の操作後の復帰を遅延可能に切り替えられることを特徴とする請求項1記載の遊技機。   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit can switch the return of the operation unit after the operation unit in a state in which the operation unit is disposed at the second position so that the return can be delayed. 前記動作手段は、前記第1位置から、前記第2位置へ動作する間に、間の状態である第3位置を経由し、
前記切替手段は、前記動作手段の動作態様を、前記動作手段が前記第2位置まで動作する第1動作態様と、
前記動作手段が前記第3位置まで動作し前記第2位置までは至らない第2動作態様とで、切替可能に構成され、
前記操作手段の反応の態様は、前記動作手段が前記第2位置に到達するか否かで切り替えられることを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載の遊技機。
The operating means passes through the third position which is an intermediate state while operating from the first position to the second position,
The switching means includes an operating mode of the operating unit, a first operating mode in which the operating unit operates to the second position,
The operation means is configured to be switchable between the second operation mode that operates up to the third position and does not reach the second position,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a mode of a response of the operation means is switched depending on whether or not the operation means reaches the second position.
JP2015233118A 2015-11-30 2015-11-30 Game machine Active JP6575328B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015233118A JP6575328B2 (en) 2015-11-30 2015-11-30 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015233118A JP6575328B2 (en) 2015-11-30 2015-11-30 Game machine

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2019098913A Division JP2019135018A (en) 2019-05-27 2019-05-27 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2017099461A true JP2017099461A (en) 2017-06-08
JP6575328B2 JP6575328B2 (en) 2019-09-18

Family

ID=59014958

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2015233118A Active JP6575328B2 (en) 2015-11-30 2015-11-30 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6575328B2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2022162015A (en) * 2019-05-27 2022-10-21 株式会社三洋物産 game machine

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019150676A (en) * 2019-06-19 2019-09-12 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009178217A (en) * 2008-01-29 2009-08-13 Sammy Corp Pinball game machine
JP2010082179A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-04-15 Olympia:Kk Game machine
JP2013066651A (en) * 2011-09-26 2013-04-18 Daito Giken:Kk Game machine

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009178217A (en) * 2008-01-29 2009-08-13 Sammy Corp Pinball game machine
JP2010082179A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-04-15 Olympia:Kk Game machine
JP2013066651A (en) * 2011-09-26 2013-04-18 Daito Giken:Kk Game machine

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2022162015A (en) * 2019-05-27 2022-10-21 株式会社三洋物産 game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6575328B2 (en) 2019-09-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2022105708A (en) Game machine
JP2022105706A (en) Game machine
JP6201696B2 (en) Game machine
JP2017099462A (en) Game machine
JP2024107347A (en) Gaming Machines
JP2024107346A (en) Gaming Machines
JP6575328B2 (en) Game machine
JP4826104B2 (en) Game machine
JP2017099459A (en) Game machine
JP2015104550A (en) Game machine
JP2019150676A (en) Game machine
JP2019135018A (en) Game machine
JP5880659B2 (en) Game machine
JP2017099460A (en) Game machine
JP2015104549A (en) Game machine
JP2012055357A (en) Game machine
JP5716772B2 (en) Game machine
JP2020039666A (en) Game machine
JP5035409B2 (en) Game machine
JP2018027496A (en) Game machine
JP2018043051A (en) Game machine
JP2018051353A (en) Game machine
JP2017205620A (en) Game machine
JP2017131752A (en) Game machine
JP2016083527A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20180316

A871 Explanation of circumstances concerning accelerated examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A871

Effective date: 20180316

A975 Report on accelerated examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971005

Effective date: 20180612

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20180626

A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20180622

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20180827

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20181030

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20181228

A02 Decision of refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A02

Effective date: 20190226

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20190527

A911 Transfer to examiner for re-examination before appeal (zenchi)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A911

Effective date: 20190529

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20190723

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20190805

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6575328

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250